AUTODESK REVIT BUILDING 8.

1
®

Metric Tutorial

August 2005

Copyright © 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state cation, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell ™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield ™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts ............................................................................................... 1
Understanding the Basics ................................................................................................................................. 2 Navigating the Revit Building User Interface ............................................................................................. 4

Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .................................................................................. 11
Creating Your First Building Model ............................................................................................................... 12 Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing ................................................................ 12 Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing ............................................................................................ 24 Dimensioning the Building Model ........................................................................................................... 32 Adding Doors and Windows ..................................................................................................................... 41 Adding Floors and Floor Openings ........................................................................................................... 58 Adding a Roof and Ceiling ........................................................................................................................ 74 Adding Multi-Level Stairs .......................................................................................................................... 80 Creating the East Wing and Passageway .................................................................................................. 87 Scheduling the Building Model .............................................................................................................. 100 Rendering the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 104 Documenting the Building Model .......................................................................................................... 106

Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .......................................................................... 113
Modifying System Settings ........................................................................................................................... 114 Modifying General System Options ........................................................................................................ 114 Specifying File Locations ......................................................................................................................... 115 Specifying Spelling Options .................................................................................................................... 117 Modifying Snap Settings ......................................................................................................................... 118 Modifying Project Settings ........................................................................................................................... 120 Creating and Applying Materials ............................................................................................................ 120 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns ........................................................................................................ 123 Controlling Object Styles ........................................................................................................................ 125 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles ........................................................................................................ 128 Modifying Annotations ........................................................................................................................... 131 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options ........................ 133 Modifying Project Browser Organization ............................................................................................... 134 Creating an Office Template ........................................................................................................................ 136 Choosing the Base Template ................................................................................................................... 137 Modifying Project Settings ...................................................................................................................... 137 Loading and Modifying Families and Groups ........................................................................................ 142 Modifying Views and View Templates ................................................................................................... 144 Modifying Render Scene Settings ........................................................................................................... 147 Modifying Import/Export Settings .......................................................................................................... 148 Setting up Shared and Project Parameters .............................................................................................. 149 Creating Named Print Settings ............................................................................................................... 151

Chapter 4 Ceilings ............................................................................................................................... 153
Creating Ceilings .......................................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Automatic Ceilings ................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Compound Ceilings ................................................................................................................. 156

Chapter 5 Openings ............................................................................................................................ 159
Cutting Roof Openings ................................................................................................................................ 160 Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof ..................................................................................................... 160 Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening ................................................................................................. 164

Contents | i

Creating a Vertical Roof Opening ........................................................................................................... 167 Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings ................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Floor ............................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling ............................................................................................................ 173 Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool .............................................................................................. 174

Chapter 6 Railings ............................................................................................................................... 177
Creating Railings .......................................................................................................................................... 178 Creating the Railing Layout .................................................................................................................... 178 Adjusting Railing Parameters .................................................................................................................. 180

Chapter 7 Roofs ................................................................................................................................... 185
Creating Roofs .............................................................................................................................................. 186 Creating an Extruded Roof ...................................................................................................................... 186 Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................. 190 Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint ............................................................... 192 Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint .................................................................................................... 194 Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................... 197 Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof ...................................................................................................... 199 Aligning Roof Eaves ................................................................................................................................ 201 Creating a Mansard Roof ........................................................................................................................ 202 Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits ............................................................................................................ 204 Creating Roof Fascia ................................................................................................................................ 204 Creating Gutters ...................................................................................................................................... 205 Creating Soffits ........................................................................................................................................ 206

Chapter 8 Stairs .................................................................................................................................. 209
Creating Stairs .............................................................................................................................................. 210 Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run ........................................................................................................ 210 Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run ..................................................................................................... 215 Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs .......................................................................................... 221 Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings .................................................................................................... 224 Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run .................................................................................................. 231 Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run ............................................................................................ 236 Working with the Stair Calculator .......................................................................................................... 241

Chapter 9 Walls .................................................................................................................................. 247
Creating Walls .............................................................................................................................................. 248 Sketching Walls ....................................................................................................................................... 248 Working with Compound Walls ............................................................................................................ 258 Working with Vertically Compound Walls ............................................................................................ 266 Joining Walls to Floors ............................................................................................................................ 276 Working with Foundation Walls ............................................................................................................ 278 Working with Wall Wraps ...................................................................................................................... 281 Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments ....................................................................................... 283

Chapter 10 Curtain Systems ................................................................................................................ 287
Flat Curtain System ...................................................................................................................................... 288 Creating an Entrance .............................................................................................................................. 288 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System  ................................................................................................ 296 Curved Curtain System ................................................................................................................................ 299 Adding a Curved Curtain System  .......................................................................................................... 299 Adding a Custom Curtain Panel ............................................................................................................. 301 Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel  ...................................................................................... 304 Additional Curtain Systems ......................................................................................................................... 307 Sloped Glazings  ...................................................................................................................................... 307 Storefront System  ................................................................................................................................... 308 Curtain System by Lines  ........................................................................................................................ 311

Chapter 11 Creating Drawings ............................................................................................................ 315
Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project ........................................................................................................... 316 Creating a Drawing Sheet ....................................................................................................................... 316 Adding a Sheet to the Project .................................................................................................................. 323 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet .......................................................................................... 324

ii | Contents

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets ..................................................................................................... 326 Using Legends .............................................................................................................................................. 333 Creating a Symbol Legend ...................................................................................................................... 333 Creating a Wall Type Legend .................................................................................................................. 335 Using a Legend View to Match Types ..................................................................................................... 337 Using Revision Tracking ............................................................................................................................... 339 Setting Up a Revision Table .................................................................................................................... 339 Sketching Revision Clouds ...................................................................................................................... 340 Tagging Revision Clouds ......................................................................................................................... 341 Working with Revisions .......................................................................................................................... 342

Chapter 12 Detailing ............................................................................................................................. 345
Creating a Detail from a Building Model ..................................................................................................... 346 Creating a Callout View .......................................................................................................................... 346 Detailing the View .................................................................................................................................. 350 Adding Detail Lines ................................................................................................................................. 356 Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation ................................................................................................... 359 Adding Break Lines ................................................................................................................................. 360 Adding Text Notes ................................................................................................................................... 363 Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views ......................................................... 364 Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View ............................................................................ 364 Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View ........................................................................................ 366 Creating a Drafted Detail ............................................................................................................................. 369 Creating a Drafting View ........................................................................................................................ 369 Creating a Detail in the Drafting View ................................................................................................... 369 Importing a Detail into a Drafting View ................................................................................................. 376 Creating a Reference Callout .................................................................................................................. 379

Chapter 13 Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 381
Creating Type and Instance Schedules ........................................................................................................ 382 Creating a Window Schedule .................................................................................................................. 382 Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Color Diagram ............................................................................................................ 394 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes ....................................................................................................... 396 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions ..................................................................... 396 Scheduling Shared Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 401 Creating a Multi-Category Schedule ....................................................................................................... 401 Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules ...................................................................................................... 406 Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter ............................................................................... 406 Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula ............................................................................ 408 Scheduling Project Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 409 Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters ............................................................................... 410 Exporting Project Information with ODBC ................................................................................................. 411 Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access ............................................................................ 411

Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning ......................................................................................... 413
Setting the Base Elevation of a Project ......................................................................................................... 414 Setting the Base Elevation of a House ..................................................................................................... 414 Dimensioning ............................................................................................................................................... 416 Creating Dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 417 Controlling Witness Line Location ........................................................................................................ 422 Modifying Dimension Properties ............................................................................................................ 425 Working with Alignments and Constraints ........................................................................................... 426 Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions ......................................................................................... 432 Annotating ................................................................................................................................................... 434 Creating Angular Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 434 Sequentially Tagging Rooms ................................................................................................................... 435 Tagging Doors and Windows .................................................................................................................. 437

Chapter 15 Viewing .............................................................................................................................. 441
Viewing a Building Model ............................................................................................................................ 442 Exploring the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 442 Creating a Perspective View with a Camera ........................................................................................... 445

Contents | iii

Creating a Section View .......................................................................................................................... 451 Creating Elevation Views ........................................................................................................................ 453 Controlling Fill Pattern Colors ..................................................................................................................... 455 Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material ..................................................................................... 455 Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type ................................................................... 457 Creating a View Plan Region ........................................................................................................................ 459 Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan ................................................................................................... 459

Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .............................................................. 463
Rendering an Exterior View ......................................................................................................................... 464 Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model ....................................................................... 464 Adding Trees to the Site .......................................................................................................................... 468 Creating a Perspective View .................................................................................................................... 470 Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View ............................................................................................. 473 Rendering an Interior View .......................................................................................................................... 476 Adding RPC People ................................................................................................................................. 476 Creating the Interior Perspective View ................................................................................................... 478 Creating a New Render Scene ................................................................................................................. 481 Defining Daylights and Rendering the View .......................................................................................... 482 Creating and Recording Walkthroughs ....................................................................................................... 484 Creating a Walkthrough ......................................................................................................................... 484 Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position ........................................................................ 487 Recording the Walkthrough ................................................................................................................... 489

Chapter 17 Presentation Views ........................................................................................................... 491
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique ............................................................................................... 492 Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique .............................................................................................. 492 Using Advanced Model Graphics ............................................................................................................ 494 Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet ............................................................................................................ 496 Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique .............................................................................................. 499 Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique ................................................................................... 500 Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet .......................................................... 502 Adding Section Views to the Analytique ..................................................................................................... 504 Preparing a Section View for the Analytique .......................................................................................... 505 Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View ............................................................................... 509 Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique ............................................................................... 510 Working with a Presentation View Template ......................................................................................... 514 Working in a Callout Analytique ............................................................................................................ 517 Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes .................................................................................................. 524 Creating Cutaway Isometric Views ......................................................................................................... 525 Creating Cutaway Perspective Views ...................................................................................................... 531 Annotating the Analytique ..................................................................................................................... 536

Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor ........................................................................... 539
Using Families and the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to Families ......................................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 542

Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .................................................................. 545
Creating a Door Family ................................................................................................................................ 546 Drawing the Door Plan View Components ............................................................................................ 546 Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry ................................................................................................. 550 Assigning Materials to the Door Components ....................................................................................... 553 Defining New Door Types ....................................................................................................................... 556 Creating a Window Family .......................................................................................................................... 558 Specifying the New Window Parameters ................................................................................................ 559 Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry ........................................................................................ 560 Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry ........................................................................................... 566 Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry .......................................................................................... 569 Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 574 Assigning Materials to the Window Components ................................................................................. 584 Defining New Window Types ................................................................................................................. 587 Creating a Furniture Family ......................................................................................................................... 591 Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters ......................................................................................... 592

iv | Contents

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 597 Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 600 Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry ..................................................................................................... 609 Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 614 Defining New Furniture Types ................................................................................................................ 617 Creating a Baluster Family ........................................................................................................................... 619 Drawing a Baluster .................................................................................................................................. 619 Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run .............................................................................................. 621 Creating Profile Families .............................................................................................................................. 623 Drawing a Sweep Profile .......................................................................................................................... 623 Drawing a Rail Profile ............................................................................................................................. 624 Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile ................................................................................................................ 624 Drawing a Reveal Profile ......................................................................................................................... 625 Drawing a Host Sweep Profile ................................................................................................................. 626 Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path ................................................................................................... 627 Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls .................................................................................................. 629 Creating a Room Tag .................................................................................................................................... 631 Specifying Room Tag Parameters ............................................................................................................ 631 Creating an Annotation Symbol .................................................................................................................. 633 Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol ............................................................................ 633 Adding the New North Arrow to a Project ............................................................................................. 636 Creating a Titleblock Family ........................................................................................................................ 636 Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet ............................................................................................... 637 Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock .............................................................................................. 640 Adding the Titleblock to a New Project .................................................................................................. 649 Creating In-Place Families ............................................................................................................................ 650 Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family ............................................................................................... 651 Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family .......................................................................................... 658

Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques ................................................................. 661
Planning a Parametric Component Family .................................................................................................. 662 Determining Component Needs ............................................................................................................. 662 Selecting the Family Template ................................................................................................................ 663 Creating the Component Skeleton .............................................................................................................. 665 Adding Reference Planes ......................................................................................................................... 666 Adding Dimensions and Constraints ...................................................................................................... 671 Creating New Length Parameters ........................................................................................................... 674 Flexing the Component Model ............................................................................................................... 678 Adding Solid Geometry ................................................................................................................................ 680 Creating Solid Extrusions ........................................................................................................................ 680 Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry ............................................................................................ 682 Creating Additional Solid Geometry ...................................................................................................... 685 Testing the Family in a Project ..................................................................................................................... 693 Loading a Family into a Project .............................................................................................................. 693 Testing a Family Instance in a Project .................................................................................................... 694 Working with Nested Subcomponents ........................................................................................................ 697 Adding a Nested Component ................................................................................................................. 698 Creating Formula-controlled Parameters ................................................................................................ 702 Arraying Nested Subcomponents ............................................................................................................ 706 Reloading a Family into a Project ........................................................................................................... 711 Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters ..................................................................................... 712 Creating and Applying Subcategories ..................................................................................................... 713 Creating Material Parameters .................................................................................................................. 717 Controlling Component Visibility ............................................................................................................... 719 Assigning Detail Level and View Controls .............................................................................................. 719 Creating Component Types ......................................................................................................................... 722 Creating Multiple Component Types ..................................................................................................... 722 Creating Conditional Formulas .............................................................................................................. 723

Chapter 21 Area Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 725
Using Area Analysis Tools ............................................................................................................................ 726 Creating Area Schemes and Plans ........................................................................................................... 726 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans ................................................................................. 732

Contents | v

Chapter 22 Massing ............................................................................................................................... 735
Using Massing Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 736 Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model ...................................................................................... 736 Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model .......................................................... 741 Using Mass Family Files in a Project  ........................................................................................................... 743 Creating New Mass Family Types  .......................................................................................................... 743 Loading and Placing New Mass Families ................................................................................................ 744 Joining Mass Elements ............................................................................................................................ 747 Using Mass Elements with Design Options ................................................................................................. 750 Mass Elements in Design Options .......................................................................................................... 750 Creating Building Components from Mass Elements ................................................................................. 752 Creating Walls by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 753 Creating Floors by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 755 Creating Roofs by Picking Faces .............................................................................................................. 759 Creating Curtain Systems  ...................................................................................................................... 761 Editing Elements Created from Massings ............................................................................................... 763 Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility ............................................................................................................ 768

Chapter 23 Site ..................................................................................................................................... 771
Using Site Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 772 Creating a Toposurface ........................................................................................................................... 772 Adding Property Lines ............................................................................................................................. 777 Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings ...................................................................................... 781 Creating Topographic Subregions ........................................................................................................... 783 Grading the Toposurface ......................................................................................................................... 788 Adding a Building Pad ............................................................................................................................ 793 Adding Site Components ........................................................................................................................ 795 Tagging Site and Parking Components .................................................................................................. 798 Creating Parking Space Schedules ........................................................................................................... 799

Chapter 24 Grouping ............................................................................................................................ 801
Creating Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 802 Creating a Group ..................................................................................................................................... 802 Placing a Group ....................................................................................................................................... 803 Modifying a Group .................................................................................................................................. 804 Creating Nested Groups ............................................................................................................................... 805 Creating a Nested Group ......................................................................................................................... 806 Modifying a Nested Group ...................................................................................................................... 807 Working with Groups .................................................................................................................................. 809 Duplicating a Group ............................................................................................................................... 809 Creating a Detail Group .......................................................................................................................... 812 Using Attached Detail Groups ................................................................................................................ 813 Saving and Loading Groups .................................................................................................................... 815 Automatically Creating a Group ............................................................................................................. 816

Chapter 25 Structural .......................................................................................................................... 819
Adding Structural Walls ............................................................................................................................... 820 Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay .............................................................................................. 820 Sketching Structural Walls ...................................................................................................................... 821 Dimensioning and Modifying Walls ...................................................................................................... 830 Adding Structural Columns and Beams ....................................................................................................... 833 Adding Structural Columns .................................................................................................................... 834 Adding Structural Beams and Girders ..................................................................................................... 838 Adding Joists and Purlins ........................................................................................................................ 848 Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels .................................................................................................. 854 Defining New Levels ............................................................................................................................... 855 Duplicating the Existing Design ............................................................................................................. 856 Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation ......................................................................................................... 858 Creating a Framing Elevation ................................................................................................................. 858 Adding Structural Braces ......................................................................................................................... 860

Chapter 26 Sharing Projects ................................................................................................................ 865
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 866

vi | Contents

Using Worksharing in a Project ................................................................................................................... 866 Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals .......................................................................................... 866 Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets ................................................................................... 869 Working Individually with Worksets ..................................................................................................... 873 Using Worksets with Multiple Users ....................................................................................................... 876 Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users ......................................................................... 881

Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .................................................................................. 885
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project ............................................................................................ 886 Creating the Structural Design Options ................................................................................................. 886 Creating the Roof System Design Options ............................................................................................. 896 Managing Design Options ...................................................................................................................... 903

Chapter 28 Project Phasing ................................................................................................................. 909
Using Phasing ............................................................................................................................................... 910 Phasing Your Model ................................................................................................................................ 910 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags ............................................................................................................. 915

Chapter 29 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates ....................................................... 919
Linking Building Models .............................................................................................................................. 920 Linking Building Models from Different Project Files ............................................................................ 920 Repositioning Linked Building Models ................................................................................................... 928 Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility ........................................................................................ 931 Managing Linked Building Models ......................................................................................................... 933 Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models ........................................................................................... 935 Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates ................................................................................................... 935 Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates ........................................................................................ 937 Scheduling Components of Linked Files ................................................................................................ 941 Working with a Linked Building Model ................................................................................................. 943 Managing Shared Locations .................................................................................................................... 944

Contents | vii

viii | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit Building. You learn how Revit Building works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface.

In the lesson that follows, you learn many of the important features in Revit Building that contribute to a user-friendly design environment, enhanced productivity, and faster construction documents. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Building is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and how to navigate the user interface.

1

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Building is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

What is Autodesk Revit Building?
The Revit Building platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Building model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Building collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Building parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Building provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Building: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Building coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Autodesk Revit Building keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Building immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Building uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Building uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum. This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Building elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Building. Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce your documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together. In Revit Building, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Autodesk Revit Building terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Building are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Building, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Building. The first term you need to know is "project." In Revit Building, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design,

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Building makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Another important term to understand is "level". Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

When creating your project, you add Revit Building parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Building classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements. A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model. Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Most families are component family files, which means you can load them into your project and create them from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Other families are called system families. These families, which include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Revit Building predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects. Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Understanding the Basics | 3

Autodesk Revit Building terms

Navigating the Revit Building User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Building is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Building window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Building uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Building is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

The Title Bar
2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template that the project is based on.

The Menu Bar
3 On the View menu, click Zoom.

The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit, and View. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You then click the command name to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZX. While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.

There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The Options Bar
5 On the Modelling menu, click Wall. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

Understanding the Basics | 5

The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 On the Modelling menu, click Door. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar, notice a door type is specified.

The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

8 On the Modelling menu, click Wall.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

9 In the Type Selector, notice the list of walls that are available. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First, you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. For example, if you intend to add a door, the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Within the drawing area, you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector.

The Design Bar
10 On the Window menu, click Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
■ ■ ■ ■

Basics tab—includes commands for creating most basic building model components. View tab—commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab—all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab—commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab—commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab—commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab—commands for executing conceptual massing commands Area Analysis tab—commands for making area schemes and plans Structural tab—commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab—includes commands for creating construction industry information

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

Understanding the Basics | 7

The Project Browser
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and groups of your current project. You can right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category (doors, walls, windows), and group name. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. To open a view, double-click the name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is also dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

14 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you create a browser organization scheme, you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box, click Cancel.

The Status Bar
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 17 Place your cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.

Understanding the Basics | 9

■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Building Help window. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Building session. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. You can also press SHIFT+F1. 20 Press TAB. You can use this tri-pane. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. find a keyword on the Index tab. 18 On the Design Bar. click . use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. The Status Bar also provides information. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. In the Status Bar. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. In this case. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Click the Help button. When you place the cursor over a component. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. click Autodesk Revit Help. It highlights when the cursor is over it. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. regarding selected components within a view. in conjunction with Tooltips. Windows: From any window. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. If there is no Help button displayed. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. press F1 to get help on that dialog box.In the bottom left corner of the window. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. click Modify. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. There are several tools that help you find information." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. Autodesk Revit Building Help 21 On the Help menu.

Understanding the Concepts. This tutorial is designed to teach concepts as well as methods. before proceeding further. stairs. and fundamental concepts before creating your first building model. If you have not already done so. The building model you create consists of an east wing and a west wing joined by a curtain wall passageway. and a roof . Therefore.Creating Your First Building Model 2 This tutorial is designed to familiarize you with the basic concepts and methods of creating a building model using Autodesk Revit Building. You should understand the user interface. the design process might differ in a real-world scenario. you learn about the Revit Building parametric capabilities and ease of use. all views and schedules instantly update. review the tutorial. 11 . doors. and then add the passageway between them. common terms. this tutorial uses a diversity of methods whenever possible.including all windows.mirror it to create the east wing. Because the design process in Revit Building is extremely flexible. floors. you can normally use various means to accomplish identical tasks. For training purposes. As you make design changes throughout this tutorial. For learning purposes. you create the shell of the west wing . While creating your first building information model.

you create. Minor modifications have been made for training purposes. NOTE The dataset for this tutorial was created using the default template. click Level. You then apply the new wall type to the existing walls. Using the mirror tool. you begin with a project file based on a simple template to which you add several new levels. stairs. modify. When you create walls. Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and a roof. You can add and modify levels at any time during the design process. 12 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you render the model and document the project by adding schedules and views to sheets. you can assign the wall height to a level or a specific value. you can. After sketching the walls. at a later time. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. As you design the walls. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. You then add sketched components such as floors.Creating Your First Building Model In this lesson. reassign the top constraint to a specific level. Open m_First_Project. you use the west wing to create the east wing. Finally. and double-click North. you sketch the exterior walls of the west wing. click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Metric folder. Add new levels 1 In the Project Browser. You then sketch the exterior and interior walls of the west wing. expand Views (all). and then add the passageway between them. If you sketch the walls with the top constraint specifying a height. you add and modify doors and windows. you define the levels first so that you can set the top constraint when you first create the walls. Notice that Level 1 and Level 2 are already defined. ceilings. After adding dimensions. and apply new wall types. In this exercise. expand Elevations. you create a new wall type with multiple wall sweeps and reveals.

7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you click the 3D control. When you select Level 4. the extents of the other level lines adopt the same change. 9 Click directly on the Level 4 text. click Modify. This means that changes to the extents are applied only to the active view. ■ Select . ■ ■ Enter 4000 mm for Offset. notice that a floor plan and ceiling plan have been created for Level 3. this indicates that you can select and edit the values. In this view. ■ ■ 6 Click Level 3 to add Level 4. it changes the extent of that datum in all other parallel views. 5 Click Level 2 to create level 3 at the designated offset above it. This means that if you move the extents of one level line.3 On the Options Bar. the datum is in model extent mode. This means that if you drag the control to resize the datum extent. The left and right extents of the new level are aligned and locked to the levels below. With the 3D designation. This allows you to create a new level by picking an existing line and applying an offset. it toggles to 2D. Verify that Make Plan View is selected 4 Move the cursor over Level 2 and notice the prospective new level displays above it. Creating Your First Building Model | 13 . 8 Select Level 4. When you click Modify. provided those datums also have the 3D model extent control. the level name and height value displays with the color blue. You can also use the ESC key to accomplish this. In the Project Browser. notice the following: ■ There is a control titled 3D that displays at the ends of the datum. it terminates the command in progress.

right-click in the drawing area and use the zoom tools on the context menu. 12 In the Project Browser. Theoretically. You can use the zoom tools located on the View menu. 14 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 11 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. which define the East. because the east wing is a mirror image of the west wing. and South elevation views. North. you could begin the model by simply sketching the exterior walls and then continuing the design process from that point. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. you can take advantage of the parametric capabilities of Revit Building by designing the majority of the west wing. tool on the toolbar. mirroring it to create the east wing. the floor plan would resemble the following illustration. West. use the wheel on your mouse. a west wing. Sketch the exterior walls 13 This building model consists of an east wing. or scroll the 10 Enter Roof and press ENTER. there are four elevation symbols. and then designing the passageway to connect the two. This process reduces the amount of repetitive work and ensures consistency between each wing.TIP You may need to zoom in to accomplish this. notice that the name of the Level 4 floor plan is changed to Roof. TIP The Level 4 ceiling plan view has also been renamed to Roof. and a curtain glass passageway connecting the two wings. In the steps that follow. However. In such a case. you create the exterior walls of only the west wing. In this view. double-click Level 1.

17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Make sure you click the arrow and not the round part of the symbol. A solid line with two drag handles displays on the West elevation symbol. TIP You can turn off the visibility of the elevation symbols by using the Visibility/Graphics command found on the View menu. This means that each view is infinite. do not turn on the far clip planes at this time. For training purposes. you use this command to modify the view. The name of the elevation view is displayed in a tooltip or in the status bar at the bottom of the drawing window. click Wall. 18 In the Type Selector. Do not click the symbol.Brick on CMU. 16 In the drawing area. North. The drag handles control the left and right clip planes of the elevation view. You can activate the far clip plane in the element properties dialog box of each respective view. Creating Your First Building Model | 15 . click the Elevation: West symbol. select Basic Wall: Exterior . NOTE The far clip plane for the East. Later in this tutorial.15 Move the cursor over the left elevation symbol and then over the elevation arrow. West. and South elevation views are inactive.

make sure you sketch the rectangle just to the right of the west elevation symbol. Because the west wing is later mirrored to the right. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can control the default witness line location for temporary dimensions and save the settings to the project. The selected wall is red.000 mm wide and 24. you can flip the wall orientation. Select the drawing tool. and flip arrows display on the exterior face of the wall.19 In the Options Bar. This is a temporary dimension. . click . select the four walls by dragging a selection box around them. vertical wall of the rectangle.000 mm long. specify the following options: ■ ■ Specify Roof for Height. 16 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . You can click the temporary dimension value and modify it. and click to complete the rectangle. click Modify. as shown. Click the arrows a second time to return the exterior face to the outside of the rectangle. TIP From the Settings ➤ Temporary Dimensions menu. 23 Click the arrows once to set the exterior face of the wall on the inside of the rectangle. TIP If necessary. Move the cursor down and to the right until the rectangle is 12. 24 On the View toolbar. Also notice the dimension that displays. ■ 20 Sketch the rectangle by clicking the upper left corner to specify the rectangle starting point. and use the directional arrows on your keyboard to move them into position as shown above. Temporary dimensions are primarily sketching aids. By clicking the arrows. 22 Select the left. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line.

In addition. You do not need to enter 12000 mm. 26 Drag the wall to the right as shown and release the mouse button when the width of the rectangle is approximately double the original size. notice the shape handles (arrows) on top and bottom of the wall.25 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right. 27 Click the temporary dimension value and reset the rectangle width to 12000 mm. For example. Creating Your First Building Model | 17 . The blue dots at the base of the wall are drag handles that allow you to modify the length of the wall. Notice that temporary dimensions also display in 3D views. TIP When entering a value. you do not need to type the metric suffix. you can enter 12000 and press ENTER. you can use these handles to modify the height or depth of the wall.

28 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area and. Notice the wall remains selected. When a surface pattern becomes too dense. 18 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . it is displayed as solid fill. click Modify. including the brick surface pattern displays. The brick surface pattern displays. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. and click Shading with Edges. as shown. and click Hidden Line. click the Model Graphics Style control. Notice that the brick surface pattern becomes solid fill after you zoom to fit. click Zoom in Region. 33 On the View Control Bar. 29 Draw a region around the corner. enter ZF. 32 On the keyboard. Notice the material settings. 31 On the View Control Bar located at the bottom-left corner of the frame. 30 On the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control.

it has no effect on components that are not selected. you can see the list of type parameters. any changes made to the type parameters would be applied to all components of the same type. you should click Duplicate to create a new component type. You can then make changes to the type parameters without inadvertently modifying the components of the original type. In the steps that follow. you would click Edit/New to access the type parameters. if you changed the Top Offset of the wall. and then apply it to the remaining walls. modify it. you cannot modify them within this dialog box. In the upper half of the dialog box. You could then make changes to the wall structure as needed.Create and apply new wall type 34 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right as shown. If you change an instance parameter. which control all components of the same type. you add horizontal sweeps of soldier course brick to the wall structure. Although you can scroll through the list of type parameters. The lower half of the dialog box contains the instance parameters. which control the selected component or components. only the wall that you selected would change. If your intent is to modify only the structure of the selected component. For example. The Element Properties dialog box displays the parameters of the selected component. 35 On the Options Bar. However. if you wanted to modify the wall structure. To accomplish this. you create a new wall type. For example. Creating Your First Building Model | 19 . click .

20 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Edit/New. enter 13500 for Sample Height. enter the new wall name. but you should specify a value high enough to allow you to create the desired wall structure. click Duplicate. For training purposes. 38 In the Name dialog box. The sample height is the height of the wall in the preview pane. 40 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Edit. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Preview. The sample height does not determine the height of any walls in the project.36 In the Element Properties dialog box. You can specify the sample height to any value you want. the original wall type must remain unchanged. and click OK. Therefore. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. under the Value column for Structure. you must create a new wall type before altering the wall structure. Exterior . 41 In the lower left corner of the Edit Assembly dialog box.

Click inside the Material field. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side.Brick Soldier Course. select Section: Modify type attributes. 45 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. ■ ■ ■ ■ 46 Click OK. 44 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. for View. select Masonry . 48 Draw a region around the soldier course. select layer 9. make the following modifications: ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. Verify that Base is selected for From. the corresponding layer is highlighted in the preview area. click Add. Notice the vertical structure tools are now active. under Name. Creating Your First Building Model | 21 .Notice that the vertical structure tools are inactive. and click OK. This is because the preview is displaying a plan view.0 mm for Offset. Enter -50. Make sure the offset is a negative number. When you select a layer. 43 Under Modify Vertical Structure. 47 Right-click in the preview area and click Zoom in Region from the context menu. click Sweeps. This should be the interior finish layer. 42 Under the preview pane. In the Materials dialog box. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. 49 Under Layers.

Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. 51 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. Make sure it is a negative number. 22 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Verify that the Offset is zero.Brick Soldier Course for Material. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. 58 Click Add. 55 In the Reveals dialog box.Add a second sweep 50 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Add. and click OK. 56 Specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. Verify that Base is selected for From. click Add. 52 For the second wall sweep. Enter -50 mm for Offset. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. Verify that Base is selected for From. click Sweeps. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. Select Masonry . under Modify Vertical Structure. 57 Click Apply. Select Flip. click Reveals. Add reveals 54 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 53 Click OK. modify the settings as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile.

Notice some of the line weights in this view are rather heavy. 63 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. 62 In the Type Properties dialog box. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. You can also use the thin lines tool to temporarily apply thin lines globally to all views. 65 On the View menu. This can be affected by the view scale for this particular view. click OK. 66 On the View toolbar.59 Specify the parameters for the second reveal: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click OK. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and draw a zoom region around the corner that includes one of the sweeps and a reveal. Select Flip. Verify that the Offset is zero. click OK. Creating Your First Building Model | 23 . click . 64 On the Design Bar. Verify that Base is selected for From. 60 Click OK.

68 Enter ZF. 72 On the Design Bar. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise.rvt. and click Save. Exterior . 24 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. 67 On the View Control Bar. When finished. name the file m_First_Project-in_progress.Brick on CMU.Notice thin lines are applied to all the linework in this view. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing. 73 On the File menu. you add the interior walls of the west wing. choose Basic Wall: Exterior . Also notice the button remains activated. This turns off thin lines globally. click Save As. click . 75 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that. 74 Navigate to your preferred directory.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. 71 In the Type Selector. after the new wall type is applied. press and hold the CTRL key while you select each component. They do not have sweeps or reveals. 70 Select the three walls that are still the original wall type. 69 On the View toolbar. the interior walls resemble the following illustration. click the Model Graphics Style control. TIP To select multiple components. and click Shading with Edges. This indicates that thin lines will continue to be applied globally to the project. click Modify. the corners of the sweeps and reveals wrap automatically.

double-click Level 1. under Views (all). Sketch the main corridor 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall.135mm Partition (2-hr). 6 Move the cursor down. m_First_Project-in_progress. Select the Line sketching tool. Creating Your First Building Model | 25 . select Basic Wall: Interior . 3 In the Type Selector.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. place the cursor over the north wall.rvt. and click. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. 5000 mm from the centerline of the west exterior wall. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ Verify that Level 2 is selected for Height. . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. ■ 5 Using the following illustration as a guide.

the snap values decrease. Draw a crossing pick from the upper-right to the lower-left that crosses both interior walls. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . TIP The temporary dimension snap values are dependent on your zoom settings. and select the second interior wall. click Modify. Click to specify the wall start point.7 Move the cursor over the north exterior wall and 2500 mm to the right of the wall you added in the previous step. press and hold CTRL. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you zoom into the model. 10 Select both interior walls using one of the following three methods: ■ ■ Select one of the interior walls. ■ Draw a pick box from the upper-left to lower-right that includes both interior walls in their entirety. 8 Move the cursor down.

The temporary dimensions are displayed for both walls. select Options. specify the selection color.79mm Partition (1-hr). This allows you to analyze their location in relationship to each other and modify the location of both walls at the same time. and enter 4750 mm. and under Colors. Add remaining interior walls 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 Add four horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the left exterior wall to the centerline of the left wall of the corridor. click Wall. click a temporary dimension value. On the Settings menu. 12 Using the following illustration as a guide. This places both interior walls 4750 mm from the centerline of the closest exterior wall. 15 In the Type Selector. Notice that temporary dimensions do not display automatically when multiple components are selected. TIP You can change the selection color by modifying the system settings. 11 On the Options Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 27 . Each wall should be 4800 mm from the previous wall. click the Graphics tab. select Basic Wall: Interior . as shown. click Modify.After the walls are selected. they display as red. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Activate Dimensions.

17 Add five horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the right wall of the corridor to the centerline of the right exterior wall. The dimension lines have been provided for training purposes. as shown. modify temporary dimension values to obtain exact placement. Use the dimensions shown in the following illustration when adding the walls. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . If necessary. 18 Add the final four interior walls in each corner of the right side of the building model. Dimension lines have been added for training purposes.

place the cursor over the intersection of the right wall of the corridor and the short horizontal wall that intersects it as shown. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. The cursor displays as a cutting tool. When you are finished splitting the walls. This line represents where the underlying object is to be split. 24 Click to split the wall. After splitting the wall. a thin line appears at the tip of the cursor. 23 In the drawing area. and you can now split walls and lines. As you move the cursor over the wall. you can click on the View toolbar. This places the view in thin lines mode. notice the exact placement of the cursor and the location of the proposed wall split. 21 Sketch a zoom region around the upper-right quadrant of the building model. This is the shortcut key for Zoom in Region. 22 On the Tools toolbar. In the above illustration and callout. TIP If the lines within the floor plan display too thick. 20 Enter ZR.Use split tool to modify walls 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. there is no immediate and obvious indication of the split location. Creating Your First Building Model | 29 . click Modify. click the tool a second time to turn thin lines mode off. you can activate it by opening the Windows menu and clicking Toolbar  ➤ Tools. click . NOTE If the Tools toolbar is not available.

29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 30 Enter ZF. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click . 27 On the Standard toolbar. 28 Using the same techniques learned in previous steps. and delete the segment.26 Select the short wall segment that you split from the right wall of the corridor. click Modify. zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model. split the right corridor wall. This is the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit.

33 Using the following illustration as a guide. click 36 On the View toolbar. select Delete Inner Segment. click . 34 Press ESC to end the Split command. Creating Your First Building Model | 31 . 31 On the Tools toolbar. After the second split. 32 On the Options Bar. NOTE Arrows have been added at the location of the two splits. 37 Press and hold SHIFT and spin the building model by dragging one of the corners in any direction. Notice the interior walls that you added and split.There are two remaining splits to make. split the right wall of the corridor at the intersection of the two center horizontal interior walls. . This tool allow you to spin the model in any direction. click . Zoom in as necessary. the inner segment is deleted automatically. 35 On the View toolbar.

6 In the Type Selector. select Wall centerlines. Next. the dimension value is displayed at its true size and is not selectable for modification. under Floor Plans.2. Level 1 . enter Level 1 . 5 On the Options Bar. The floor plan. select Individual References. specify the following dimension parameters: ■ Click . click Rename. options. 39 Proceed to the next exercise.5mm Arial. you add a multi-segmented dimension string to modify the witness lines.Dimensioned and Annotated. both permanent dimensions and temporary dimensions display. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. should be open. and in the context menu. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. m_First_Project-in_progress. You create a dimension by selecting the dimension type. Create and rename copy of Level 1 1 In the Project Browser. When geometry is selected for modification.Dimensioned and Annotated. and components that require dimensioning. 2 In the Project Browser. under Views (all).38 On the File menu. If the geometry referenced by a permanent dimension is not selected for modification. the dimension value displays in blue and can be modified directly by clicking the value. In that case. click Save. The dimension styles available in the Type Selector are dependent on the type of dimension selected on the Options Bar. and click OK. You begin by adding a simple dimension between two walls. In the final section of this exercise. ready for modification. you constrain the building model using equality and locking constraints. Dimensioning the Building Model.rvt. When you duplicate a view. under Floor Plans. Dimensioning the Building Model In this exercise. Add a dimension line between two walls 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Permanent dimensions can appear in two different states: modifiable and non-modifiable. it opens automatically in the Project Browser. click Dimension. you add dimension lines to the building model. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . right-click Copy of Level 1. This is the aligned dimension option. A permanent dimension is considered modifiable when one or more of the components that it references is selected for modification. and click Duplicate. ■ ■ For Prefer. For Pick. select Linear Dimension Style: Diagonal . right-click Level 1.

7 In the drawing area. Creating Your First Building Model | 33 . When a dashed line is displayed on the wall centerline. click to select it. Click in the empty space of the drawing area to place the dimension line. When a dashed line displays on the wall centerline. move the cursor over the left exterior wall as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click to select it. 9 Move the cursor just above the north wall. 8 Move the cursor over the right exterior wall as shown.

and draw a zoom region around the north exterior wall and dimension line. the value is not available for modification. Notice the dimension value turns blue. 16 Click the permanent dimension value. 13 Place the cursor over the blue control in the center of the left witness line. 17 Click the temporary dimension value. These controls allow you to modify and constrain the dimension. Click the control a second time and the witness line moves to the exterior face. Click it a third time to return the witness line to the wall centerline. This behavior is similar to the witness line control on temporary dimensions. This means you can modify the value by clicking it. and press ENTER. change it to 15000. indicating that the control moves the witness line.11 Enter the keyboard shortcut ZR for Zoom In Region. 15 Select the vertical exterior wall on the left. change it to 4750. and a blue padlock displays. 14 Click the control once and the witness line moves to the interior face of the wall. Notice that the dimension line and value displays as red. In its current state. the dimension value displays as modifiable. When you select a component referenced by a dimension witness line. or in the status bar of the drawing window. 12 Select the dimension line. Notice the selected wall moved to the left. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Notice that the dimension value is not blue. on each witness line. Notice that a temporary dimension also displays. Information is displayed in a tooltip. and press ENTER. Controls display on the value. This is one of the ways in which a permanent dimension differs from a temporary dimension. The control at the bottom of each witness line controls the gap between the end of the witness line and the component it references.

For Pick. and click to place the dimension as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 35 . 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 Select the left. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. vertical. click Dimension. select Intersecting Walls. exterior wall. Click the symbol to make the temporary dimension permanent. and click OK.18 Place the cursor over the dimension symbol located beneath the temporary dimension value. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. select Entire Walls. zoom out until you can see the entire building model. select Wall centerlines. click Modify. move the cursor to the left. Click Options. Add a multi-segmented dimension 20 Using one of the zoom methods learned previously.

NOTE Make sure you right-click the blue control and not the dimension line. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 26 Using the following illustration as a guide.24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modify witness lines 25 Select the multi-segmented dimension you added in the previous steps. and click Delete Witness Line. click Modify. right-click the blue control on the witness line second from the top.

27 Right-click the dimension line. 28 Select the centerline of the interior wall where you previously deleted the witness line. click Edit Witness Lines. and in the context menu. WARNING Do not right-click a witness line. it provides a different set of options on the context menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 37 .

NOTE There are two alternative ways of ending the dimension edit process: You can click Modify on the Design Bar. Create constraints 30 Select the second interior wall from the top to the left of the corridor.29 After selecting the wall. click in the empty space of the drawing area to complete the editing process. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . or press ESC on the keyboard.

Creating Your First Building Model | 39 .Notice that the dimension values become modifiable on each side of the witness line that refers to the selected wall. 31 Drag the wall downward until the distance between it and the wall below it is approximately 2400 mm.

Lock symbols offer the opportunity to constrain the building model by locking a dimension value or an alignment. The relationship between these components is constrained. You can turn the lock on and off by clicking the lock symbol. 35 Select the multi-segmented dimension. the other moves with it and maintains the locked dimension value. 36 Click the lock symbol on the 2400 mm segment to remove the constraint between the two walls. Notice that the dimension value for the locked segment remains unchanged as you move the wall. Notice a lock displays for each segment. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 33 Click the lock on the 2400 mm segment of the dimension. 34 Select the same wall you moved previously and drag it upward approximately 1200 mm as shown. if you move one component.32 Select the multi-segmented dimension line. This dimension does not need to be precise.

Notice an EQ symbol displays with a slash through it. you load multiple new door types and add them to the building model. select Save. select Value for Equality Display. Creating Your First Building Model | 41 . under Floor Plans. 40 In the Project Browser. click . In the final section of the exercise. double-click Level 1. you use the Paste Aligned tool to copy the Level 1 windows to Levels 2 and 3. you add doors and windows to the building model. You begin by adding single flush doors. Notice that each segment is now equally spaced and the dimension values display EQ. 38 On the Options Bar. This is an equality constraint that makes all dimension segments equal. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. You then add windows and use the mirror and array tools to save time and ensure consistency. 37 Click the equality constraint to activate it. Notice that each segment displays an equal value. under Views (all). Adding Doors and Windows. and click OK. 41 On the File menu. Next. under Other. Adding Doors and Windows In this exercise. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box.

you can flip the door opening immediately after placing it. m_First_Project-in_progress. the initial opening is based on the wall face from which the cursor approaches. Regardless of the initial placement. When you add a door. This is most evident when you add a door in an elevation or 3D view. the door resides on a level line. Do not click at this time. click Door.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Add single flush doors to the building model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. however. 2 In the Type Selector. 4 Approach the same corridor wall from inside the room. Doors are wall-hosted families and can only be added to a wall.rvt. doors snap automatically to the closest available level. 3 In the north side of the building model. place the cursor over the right corridor for the room shown in the following illustration. This is the mechanical room. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. A door symbol displays when the cursor is over the wall. In addition. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . You can offset the door from the level.

Creating Your First Building Model | 43 . You can use this to flip from left to right hand opening.5 Press the Spacebar once to flip the door hand. When you are finished. 7 Click each control to familiarize yourself with how the door controls work. Notice the blue controls that display. After you add door number 2. Press the Spacebar a second time. 9 Add an additional door of the same type to the small room above door number 1 as shown. and press ENTER. These control the door opening direction and the hand of the door (left or right). 6 Click to add the door with the opening inside the room. and modify temporary dimensions as shown. return the door to the position shown in the following illustration. Do not be concerned with exact placement. specify a value of 600 mm. 8 Click the temporary dimension value between the door centerline and the lower horizontal wall. use the flip controls to adjust the opening. The precise dimensions are not important.

All Revit Building families have an . 44 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .rfa extension. ZF. 16 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Doors folder. 11 On the Design Bar.10 Zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model and add a door of the same type to the room as shown. and set the temporary dimensions. and select M_Double-Glass 2. click Load. Load and apply new door types 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that a preview image of the selected door displays in the upper right corner of the dialog box. and select M_Double-Flush. 15 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 14 On the Options Bar.rfa. as shown. click Modify. 17 Press and hold CTRL. to zoom to fit. click Training Files. click Door. 12 Enter the keyboard shortcut.rfa. Flip the door.

Each door should open into the room. as shown. The distance between the door centerline and nearest wall centerline should be 600mm. 21 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. These door families are now available in the Type Selector drop-down list. Creating Your First Building Model | 45 .rfa. TIP Zoom in and out as necessary. 19 Click Open to load all three door families into the project. 20 In the Type Selector. 22 In the Type Selector. add a door to each of the five rooms to the left of the corridor. When more than one family is selected. a preview image does not display. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0864 x 2032mm. and select M_Single-Flush Vision. 18 Press and hold CTRL.You can load multiple families at the same time.

26 In the Type Selector. This is door number 14 in the following illustration.23 Zoom in around the upper-right corner of the building model and add doors 9 and 10 as shown. 25 Add the final M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm door in the center of the building model and to the right of the corridor as shown. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This is door number 13 in the following illustration. select M_Double-Flush: 1730 x 2134mm. The arrow has been added for training purposes. 24 Zoom in around the lower-right corner of the building model and add doors 11 and 12 as shown. 27 Add a door to the right exterior wall opposite of door number 1.

it would be easier if the visibility of the wall surface pattern was turned off. under Views (all). Creating Your First Building Model | 47 . Notice that the brick surface pattern displays as you zoom into this view. 30 On the View menu. zoom in until the brick pattern displays. double-click North. Although there is no technical reason you cannot add a door in this view. 29 Zoom around the building model and level heads. If your view displays solid fill. 32 Expand the Walls category. and scroll down to Walls.Add a door in elevation view 28 In the Project Browser. select Visibility/Graphics. 31 Click the Model Categories tab. under Elevations. NOTE The display of a surface pattern is zoom dependent. and clear Surface Pattern.

Tag a door in plan view 38 In the Project Browser. select M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm. NOTE The temporary dimensions refer to interior walls. then Level 2. You can apply an offset if required. double-click Level 1. click Door. Notice that the double doors on the north wall display without a tag. 36 Move the cursor over the wall at Level 3. as shown. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and down to Level 1. 37 Add a double-glass door centered on Level 1. the wall surface pattern will remain visible in all other views. 35 In the Type Selector. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Notice the door snaps to each level. it has two basic requirements: it must be hosted by a wall and it must be associated with a level.33 Click OK. Changes to Visibility/Graphics are applied only to the open view. When adding a door. under Floor Plans. In this case.

Components are tagged in the view in which they are placed. 41 On the upper exterior wall. 44 In the Type Selector. NOTE Because the default door tag was not designed to display in an elevation view. verify that M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm is selected. the Type Selector and Options Bar remember the last settings used for that component. a tag did not display when you added the door in the North elevation view. 42 Zoom in to the lower exterior wall. This should be door number 15. click Tag. as shown. 45 Add the final door centered on the lower exterior wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 49 . clear Leader. 39 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. TIP For each component type. click the double doors to add a tag. click Door. 40 On the Options Bar. 43 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

under Floor Plans. . just like doors. Add windows to the building model 51 In the Project Browser. Windows are wall-hosted components. Like doors. double-click Level 1. The window exterior is placed on the wall face closest to the cursor. and notice the doors you added. 47 On the View toolbar. 52 Zoom in on the upper exterior wall. you can flip the window after placement. click Window. click 48 On the View toolbar. click . select M_Andersen 400 C35: C35. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 49 Spin the model. As you move the cursor over a wall. click Save. 54 In the Type Selector. 53 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the window displays at the cursor. click Modify. 50 On the File menu.46 On the Design Bar.

In the family editor. Creating Your First Building Model | 51 . 62 In the Element Properties dialog box. 56 When the window displays at the tip of the cursor. 60 Make sure the distance between the window centerline and the left wall centerline is 1400 mm. 55 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the left side of the upper exterior wall. and reload it into the project. Notice the list of instance parameters available for modification. The designer can also create a window with few modifiable parameters. If you want to modify a window in a specific way but an instance or type parameter is not available to accomplish the task. as shown. click Modify. 61 On the Options Bar. you can edit the family in place or open the window in the family editor. 57 On the Design Bar. the window is using a type tag that displays the window type number rather than the window mark. 65 Zoom out so you can see the right side of the upper exterior wall. 59 Zoom around the window. When you add a window in a plan view. the default head or sill height is used to set the initial height of the window. 63 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 64 Add a window to the right of the existing window as shown. IMPORTANT  If necessary. 66 Add two C35 windows to the right of the exterior double door. click . go to Help. 58 On the View toolbar.You can add windows in plan. and visibility. click Window. For more information on creating and loading annotation tags. elevation. You can load and assign tags that display the specific information you need in the format you prefer. There should be a 1950 mm distance between the centerlines of the two windows. modify it. click to place it as shown. materials. click Cancel. the designer creates the instance and type parameters that control geometry. In this project. click the temporary dimension value and specify the correct distance. and select it. and 3D views. The list of parameters can vary depending on the window family design. click .

and click to set the mirror axis. click Mirror. click Modify. In this case. 74 Move the cursor to the left. 70 On the Edit menu. 73 When the triangular midpoint symbol displays on the exterior face of the wall. click to select it. indicating that the midpoint of that component is ready to be selected. click .67 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and make sure Copy is selected. A tooltip is displayed. 71 On the Options Bar. The copy option is selected by default. 69 Select one of the windows on the upper exterior wall. 72 Place the cursor over the middle of the exterior face of the right exterior wall. and select the three remaining windows. You also have the option to mirror a copy rather than the selected component(s). you can pick or draw the mirror axis. When you mirror a component or components. the selected windows are to be mirrored across a horizontal axis residing on the midpoint of the east exterior wall. Mirror the windows 68 Zoom out until the building model fits within the view. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . press and hold CTRL.

77 Add two windows to the left exterior wall. You tag the windows later in the exercise. Add and array windows 75 Zoom in to the room in the upper left corner of the building model.The windows are mirrored immediately after you specify the mirror axis. at the dimensions shown. click Window. Notice that the mirrored windows are not tagged. 76 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 53 .

click Array. Because all of the rooms on this side of the building model are equally spaced. Enter 5 for Number. click Modify. and click to set the array end point. Select Constrain. 79 Zoom out in the upper left corner so you can see the two rooms with doors 4 and 5. Rather than manually add the rest of the windows on the left exterior wall. select 2nd. it is an ideal situation to use an array. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that is selected for a linear array. 82 On the Options Bar. and click to set the array start point. you can use the array tool to finish the job. You then move the array to the second or last location. 80 Select the two windows that you just added on the left exterior wall. Creating an array is a three-step process.78 On the Design Bar. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 83 Move the cursor over the intersection of the left exterior wall and the intersecting interior wall shown below. You first click a point to specify the array start point. 81 On the Edit menu. For Move To. Clear Group And Associate.

NOTE It is extremely important to make sure the new array is centered between the walls of the next room. click Window. add the final window to the right exterior wall and centered in the second room from the bottom. undo the step and try again. If you make a mistake placing the array. as shown.84 Move the cursor down until the arrayed window group is centered in the room below the starting point. Add remaining level 1 window 85 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 55 . any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array continues down the wall. 86 On the bottom-right side of the building model. Notice the arrayed windows are not tagged. Because the rooms on the left side of the building model are of equal size. and click the similar intersection shown below to set the array end point.

90 Spin the model. you can use the paste-align tool to accomplish the same goal significantly faster. Rather than use the same methods to add similar windows to levels 2 and 3.87 If you are still using Thin Lines mode. click . turn it off by clicking 88 On the View toolbar. on the View toolbar. Paste align windows to Levels 2 and 3 91 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and notice the windows you added. click Modify. . 92 In the 3D Drawing area. drag a selection box around the entire building model. click 89 On the View toolbar. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

press and hold CTRL. 94 In the Filter dialog box. the window snaps to the default sill height which displays as a green dashed line. under Elevations. select Level 3. under Elevations. 99 In the Project Browser. double-click North. 100 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 96 On the Edit menu. clear walls and doors from the selection. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 104 On the Design Bar. notice that windows need to be added above the double doors on the north and south walls. This leaves only the windows selected within the 3D view. 105 Add C35 windows to the center of Levels 2 and 3 as you did in the previous steps. notice the wall surface pattern displays. click . 93 On the Options Bar. click Window. Don’t be concerned with precise placement or spacing between the windows and doors. 95 On the Edit menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 57 . 97 In the Select Levels dialog box. select Level 2. This is because the changes you made to the Visibility/Graphics of the North elevation view were applied only to that view. In this view. and click OK. and click OK. 101 On the Options Bar. click Window. click Copy to Clipboard. click Modify. After the windows are added to Level 2 and Level 3. The spacing can be manipulated using some of the dimensioning tools you learned earlier.This selects every component in the building model. 102 Add a C35 window in the center of Level 2 and Level 3 as shown below. Notice that when you add a window in elevation view. 103 In the Project Browser. double-click South. 98 On the Design Bar. such as equality constraints. clear Tag on Placement. The spacing will be modified in a later dataset.

Floors. where three openings are required for the stairs and elevators.106 In the Project Browser. 111 Proceed to the next exercise. Like walls. You add a more complex floor type to levels 2 and 3. When walls intersect a floor. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click . Adding Floors and Floor Openings In this exercise. Add a floor slab to Level 1 1 On the View toolbar. each of these components can have a compound structure. You can also select or draw lines. and click OK. click Save. roof. you can select walls to define the border of the component. 108 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. you add floors and floor openings to the building model. and ceilings are examples of sketched components. 107 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. select Window Tags. Adding Floors and Floor Openings. When sketching these components. You also add elevators and plumbing components to the building model. you begin by adding a floor slab Level 1. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. click 2 On the View toolbar. roofs. m_First_Project-in_progress. In this exercise. . 110 On the File menu. 109 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. Notice that all the windows in the view are tagged.rvt. 3 Spin the model and observe that floors are needed throughout the building model. or ceiling. and all require their borders to be sketched. the respective layers interact according to the functional assignment within the Edit Assembly dialog box.

5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that Pick Walls is selected. click Finish Sketch. double-click Level 1. 9 If the magenta line is not on the exterior face of the north exterior wall. In addition. 8 Click the upper exterior wall.4 In the Project Browser. 12 Select Concrete . 14 On the View toolbar.300mm for Type. You can click the flip arrows to move the floor boundary to either the interior or exterior face of a wall. under Floor Plans. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You are in sketch mode. click . Creating Your First Building Model | 59 . 11 On the Design Bar. Notice the floor on Level 1 that extends to the exterior face of the walls. 7 On the Options Bar. A magenta line displays with flip arrows. When in sketch mode. the building model becomes unavailable for modification until you finish the floor sketch. clear Extend into wall (to core). click Floor. 6 On the Design Bar. click Floor Properties. click the flip arrows to flip the line. Sketch. and click OK. 10 Select the three remaining exterior walls. you must either finish or quit in order to access other design modes. The Design Bar now has only one tab.

double-click Level 2. 17 On the Options Bar. The windows are not tagged because you did not add them within this view. Notice the location of the magenta line. 60 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . When the chain of walls highlights. when it highlights under the cursor. press TAB. 19 Zoom in to the upper exterior wall. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected.Add a floor to Level 2 15 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to select it. click Floor. 18 Place the cursor over the upper exterior wall and. You can use TAB to select a chain of walls or lines at any time. In this view. the interior walls on Level 1 display as an underlay.

24 Click Finish Sketch. select M_Elevator Center: 2032mm x 1295mm. A message displays asking if you want to join geometry and cut the overlapping volume out of the walls. 21 Use the flip arrows to place the magenta line on the exterior face of the core. and click OK. The line chain flips to each face of the core rather than the interior and exterior wall face. 22 On the Design Bar. To do this. click . 25 Click Yes to attach the wall tops to the floor. . A message displays asking if you want the walls that go up to this floor to attach to it. double-click Level 1. as shown. under Floor Plans. 32 In the Type Selector. and click to place it. 33 Add two elevators in the center room on the right side of the building model. click Component. you paste-align the level 1 interior walls and components to level 2 before adding the level 3 floor. 29 Spin the model and observe the new floor on Level 2. Creating Your First Building Model | 61 . This occurs because the structural layers of the floor must cut through the interior finish layer of the wall in order to extend to the wall core. 26 Click Yes to join geometry and cut out the overlapping volume. the walls remain attached. 31 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The interior walls of the building model are displayed in red.20 Click the flip arrows. click 28 On the View toolbar. Add elevators and bathroom components 30 In the Project Browser. move the elevator into position. indicating that they are not attached to the floor. 27 On the View toolbar. click Floor Properties. Next. 23 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. position the cursor on the wall. you add elevators and plumbing components on Level 1. Attaching the walls ensures that if you change the floor elevation. These elevators are wall-hosted components. After you add these components.

click Component. click Modify. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select each one. and specify the dimension 1150 mm as shown above. 38 Add the sink to the center of the room. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 36 On the Design Bar. toggle the temporary dimension witness line to the interior face of the adjacent wall.TIP After adding the elevators. as shown. select M_Pedestal Sink-3D: Pedestal Sink. 35 Zoom in to the upper right corner of the building model. 37 In the Type Selector.

For example. enter 90 on the keyboard and press Enter. establish the direction of the rotation. When rotating. Rotating an object requires two clicks. 40 Select the sink. an angular value displays that responds to keyboard entries. Listening dimensions react to cursor movements and keyboard entries. click Modify.39 On the Design Bar. The component will rotate to the value. you can use the listening dimension to accurately rotate the component. click Rotate. you can type the wall length and press Enter rather than setting the wall end point. 42 Place the cursor directly above the sink and click to set the rotation start point as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 63 . when rotating the component. The first click specifies the rotation start point. 41 On the Edit menu. TIP Although you can manually rotate the component. 43 Move the cursor 90 degrees to the left and click to set the rotation end point. the second click specifies the rotation end point. In this case. when you sketch a wall.

46 In the Type Selector. as shown.44 Drag the sink until it snaps to the center of the left wall face. click Component. 48 Use the same procedure to add a toilet and sink in the similar room at the lower right corner of the building model. 45 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 47 Add the toilet on the right wall. select M_Toilet-Commercial-Wall-3D: 480mm Seat Height.

Before adding the final floor. and plumbing fixtures can be paste aligned to Levels 2 and 3. elevators. click . Depending on the exact placement of the windows you added in the north and south elevation views. In addition. 52 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click. doors. you must add the openings for the stairwells and the elevators. click Copy to Clipboard. 55 On the Edit menu. a message might be displayed stating that the new walls conflict with an existing insert. clear Door Tags. and components. 54 On the Edit menu. and click OK. and click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 53 In the Filter dialog box. the interior walls. (Do not include the exterior walls in the selection. 51 Draw a crossing pick box beginning inside the upper-right corner of the building model and extending to the inside of the lower-left corner. Paste align interior walls 49 In an empty space within the drawing area. doors. Creating Your First Building Model | 65 . 56 Select Level 2.) This captures all the internal walls.

click 62 On the View toolbar. you are prompted to select the floor. you can click the controls on the side of the dialog box. If you know the source of the problem. you can continue working and the warning dialog box closes automatically. Therefore. or ceiling in which you want the opening. roof. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . zoom in to the upper exterior wall and notice that the center window conflicts with the left wall of the corridor. it is often a good idea to create a view that makes the selection process more precise. If you received this error. When you add a model opening. 58 If you received the conflict message. You can drag the window or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the window to a location that does not conflict with the interior wall. click . it is most likely because the center window intersects the corridor wall on Levels 2 and 3. double-click Level 2. For more information regarding the warning. you add floor openings to accommodate the elevators and stairs. In the steps that follow. 63 Spin the model so you can see the interior walls and components on level 2. Ignore the warning and proceed with the next step. 60 Check the lower exterior wall for the same problem and correct it. under Floor Plans.These conflict warnings alert you to problems in your layout. The message disappears once you click in the drawing area. 61 On the View toolbar. 59 Correct the problem by moving the window away from the corridor wall. if necessary. 57 In the Project Browser. .

and click Zoom To Fit. 67 Place the cursor over the upper right corner of the building model. under Floor Plans.Create a section view 64 In the Project Browser. 68 Click the section line. as shown. move the cursor down and click just below the south exterior wall. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the building model and set the depth just past the bathroom wall. After you add the section. Creating Your First Building Model | 67 . 69 Click the flip arrows to change the direction of the view towards the interior. 70 Using the shape handles. The first click specifies the section head. you can flip the view direction and modify the extents of the view. Adding a section is a two-click process. click Section. click to set the start point. 65 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. 66 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. and the second click specifies the section tail.

floor. 72 Double-click the section head. and click OK. the referenced view opens. click Modify. This view offers easy accessibility to all floors as well as the stairwells on the left and right. The section head is displayed in blue. select Pick a roof. click Opening. the section heads are linked directly to the view so when you double-click the section head. Create a floor opening 73 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 74 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box.71 On the Design Bar. select it. when it highlights. 75 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. just as the level heads do in an elevation view. Similarly. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . or ceiling and cut vertically.

81 Click each of the four padlocks to lock them. select Floor Plan: Level 2. select the rectangle drawing tool. these constraints ensure that the opening adapts to any changes in the associated walls. click Lines. the Go to View dialog box displays and offers you a selection of views to choose from. 77 Zoom around the stairwell in the lower right corner. 76 In the Go to View dialog box. When locked. 80 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell as shown below. 78 On the Design Bar. In the following illustration. the sketch lines have been enhanced for training purposes. and click Open View. Notice the locking constraints that display. 79 On the Options Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 69 .Because you must be in a view parallel to the screen in order to edit a sketch.

91 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell and lock the lines as shown. floor. 87 In the Go to View dialog box. The modification of the opening is done for you in a dataset used later in this tutorial. click Lines. or ceiling and cut vertically. 82 On the Design Bar. 83 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Section). 88 Zoom to the stairwell in the upper right corner. 85 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. it is often easier to add the stairs first and then modify the opening precisely to the location of the stairs. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 90 On the Options Bar. select Pick a roof. click Opening.NOTE Although the opening could account for the stair landings at this point. 92 Click Finish Sketch. 89 On the Design Bar. select it. select the rectangle drawing tool. Add a second opening 84 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2. and click Open View. 86 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and when it highlights. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. double-click Section 1.

click 104 On the View toolbar. 102 Click Finish Sketch. or ceiling and cut vertically. 98 Zoom in to the elevators. select Pick a roof. 97 In the Go to View dialog box. 99 On the Design Bar. 105 Spin the model so that you can see the vertical penetrations on level 2. Creating Your First Building Model | 71 . you paste align these openings rather than sketch them again. You have completed the three openings required for this level. and click OK. 95 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. double-click Section 1. click Opening.Add an opening for the elevators 93 In the Project Browser. and click Open View. 96 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. floor. click . 103 On the View toolbar. select Floor Plan: Level 2. under Sections (Building Section). . select the rectangle drawing tool. 100 On the Options Bar. After adding a floor to Level 3. click Lines. select it. when it highlights. 94 On the Design Bar. 101 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the elevator shaft and lock the lines as shown.

click Copy to Clipboard. click Floor. clear everything except Floors (Floor opening cut).Add a floor to Level 3 106 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 118 On the Edit menu. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 109 On the Options Bar. 117 In the Filter dialog box. when the chain of walls highlights. click to select it. 115 Draw a pick box around Level 2 so that you capture the three openings you created previously. when the wall highlights under the cursor. press TAB. and click OK. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click Zoom To Fit. 120 Select Level 3 and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 110 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls and. Copy floor openings to Level 3 114 In the Project Browser. 108 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 113 Click Yes to join geometry and cut volume. under Sections (Building Sections). click . Make sure you do not select Floors. 116 On the Options Bar. 107 Right-click. double-click Section 1. double-click Level 3. under Floor Plans. 112 Click Yes to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor. The floor type you assigned to Level 2 is used for Level 3. 119 On the Edit menu. 111 On the Design Bar. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. and.

123 Right-click. 124 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and components to Level 3.121 On the View toolbar. click Modify. doors. Paste-align components to Level 3 122 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. The vertical penetrations extend through Levels 2 and 3. under Floor Plans. The only remaining task in this exercise is to paste-align the Level 2 interior walls. and click Zoom To Fit. 125 Draw a crossing pick box beginning just inside the upper right corner and extending to the lower left corner. click . Creating Your First Building Model | 73 . Do not include the exterior walls. under Views (all).

this removes it from the selection set. 128 On the Edit menu. If you accidently select a component that does not belong in the selection set. hold the CTRL key down and select it. Reposition one or both of the windows that may be intersecting the corridor wall. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 127 In the Filter dialog box. clear Floors and Floors (Floor opening cut). click OK and go to the Level 3 floor plan. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. click . 131 On the View toolbar. click . 132 On the File menu. NOTE If you receive a warning that a conflict exists with an insert. and click OK. 126 On the Options Bar. 133 Proceed to the next exercise.TIP If you miss a component. click Copy to Clipboard. 130 Select Level 3 and click OK. 129 On the Edit menu. hold the SHIFT key down and select the component. click Save. you add a gable roof and ceiling to the west wing of the building model. Adding a Roof and Ceiling. Adding a Roof and Ceiling In this exercise.

5 Select the left exterior wall so that the sketch line is left of the wall.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating Your First Building Model | 75 . under Views (all). Add a gable roof to the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the upper exterior wall and the lower exterior wall. double-click Roof. click Pick Walls. Creating a footprint roof is very similar to creating a floor. select Defines slope. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. click the flip arrows to move the lines outside of the exterior walls. Both are sketched components and require you to define the border of the component. clear Defines slope. m_First_Project-in_progress. 6 Select the right exterior wall so that the sketch line is right of the wall. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. If the sketch lines are on the interior side of the exterior walls. Verify that Extend to wall core is clear. 7 On the Options Bar.

. 15 Move the cursor over the gable end wall until it is preselected.Timber for Type. click Finish Roof. Notice the exterior walls are not connected to the roof.9 On the Design Bar. 76 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select Warm Roof . 12 On the View toolbar. 14 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. click . 16 Press TAB to preselect the chain of exterior walls. click 13 On the View toolbar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Roof Properties. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar.

Modify the roof 22 Select the roof. Notice the drag handle on the roof ridge. The exterior wall chain displays as solid red. The exterior walls attach to the roof. select Attach. 23 Drag the roof ridge control upward to a point where the pitch is approximately doubled. 21 On the Design Bar.17 Click to select the entire chain of exterior walls. 19 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the roof. click Modify. for Attach Wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 77 . select Top. for Top/Base. 18 On the Options Bar.

click inside the room to add a ceiling as shown. and then click inside highlighted rooms to add a ceiling. double-click Level 3. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 600mm grid. TIP Although you can add a ceiling in a floor plan view. Notice the exterior walls adjust to the new roof pitch. 25 On the Design Bar. This returns the roof to its original position. click Ceiling. the ceiling is normally outside the view range and is not visible after you add it. you select a ceiling type from the Type Selector. 28 On the Modeling tab of the Design Bar. under Ceiling Plans. Add a ceiling to Level 3 27 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Type Selector. you can sketch the perimeter of a ceiling using the same pick and draw techniques learned when you added the floors and roof. 26 On the Edit menu. ■ In this case. click Undo Move. Using the sketch method. click Modify. There are two methods to create a ceiling: ■ Using Auto Ceiling. 30 In the upper-left corner of the building model. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you will use the auto ceiling method. under Views (all).24 Release the drag handle at the new position.

select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 1200mm grid. 32 In the Type Selector.31 Add a ceiling of the same type in the remaining rooms on the left side of the corridor and in both bathrooms. as shown. 33 Click within the main corridor and each stairwell to add a ceiling in each. Creating Your First Building Model | 79 .

double-click the section head. under Constraints. you begin by creating a set of stairs from Level 1 to Level 2. you modify the original stairwell to be a multistory stair and mirror a copy to the other stairwell. Rather than repetitively creating the same stairs on each level and in each stairwell. and click OK. enter 3900 mm for Height Offset From Level. click Modify. click Properties.34 In the Type Selector. Adding Multi-Level Stairs. 80 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and from the context menu. and select Shading with Edges. 38 On the View Control Bar. click Save. 39 Right-click the ceiling over the elevator shaft on Level 3. 35 Add a ceiling to the three remaining rooms on the right side of the corridor. 41 On the File menu. select Compound Ceiling: Plain. 36 On the Design Bar. 37 In the drawing area. Adding Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the Model Graphics Style control. 42 Proceed to the next exercise.

4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 81 . 5 Add the three lines as shown. click Lines. select Wide Lines. under Floor Plans. you create a set of U-shaped stairs similar to those in the following illustration.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. m_First_Project-in_progress. double-click Level 1. and use the temporary dimensions to specify the values shown in the following image. In the image below. In the steps that follow. In order to sketch the stairs accurately. Add stairs between Level 1 and 2 1 In the Project Browser. you first add temporary model lines that provide an underlay to trace over. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell in the lower right corner of the building model. under Views (all). the permanent dimension lines have been added as a training aid and the section line has been hidden temporarily.

82 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .NOTE It is important to dimension the lines to the interior face of the walls. the Run tool is active. not to the centerline. In the steps that follow. The dimensions have been predetermined. Click on the temporary dimension witness line control until it moves to the interior face of the wall. click Stairs. 8 Sketch the second half of the run by clicking on the top endpoint of the left vertical line. 7 Sketch the first half of the run by clicking on the bottom endpoint of the right vertical line. and then clicking the top endpoint of the same line. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and then specify the value. By default. You are in sketch mode. you sketch the stair run and trace the run over the two vertical lines. and then clicking the bottom endpoint of the same line. for example: 550 mm.

10 In the Railings Type dialog box.The stair run is complete. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Creating Your First Building Model | 83 . click Railings Type. Specify railing type 9 On the Design Bar. select 900mm Pipe. click Finish Sketch.

16 On the View Control Bar. 15 Delete the three model lines. 12 Select the stairs. click the Hide/Isolate control. 13 On the View Control Bar. This makes the model lines more apparent. click the Hide/Isolate control. and select Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.Notice that the model lines still display. and select Hide Object. 14 Select the three model lines. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

19 On the Options Bar. Use TAB or zoom in. Creating Your First Building Model | 85 . click . click Modify.17 In the Project Browser. as needed. under Views (all). 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Constraints. Modify stairs 18 Select the stairs. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. IMPORTANT Be careful not to select the railings. and click OK. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Building Section). 21 On the Design Bar.

27 Move the cursor upward and perpendicular to the floor. When the midpoint symbol and tooltip displays. This is done in the next exercise using a new dataset. Copy west stairs to east stairwell 22 Select the stairs created in the previous steps. as shown. 24 On the Options Bar. and click to set the mirror axis endpoint. click . Do not select the railings. you could modify the floor openings to accommodate the stair landings.NOTE At this time. SM. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 26 Place the cursor over the center of bottom edge of the Level 1 floor. and select Copy. click Mirror. click to specify the start point of the mirror axis. 23 On the Edit menu. The cursor now snaps only to midpoints. 25 Enter the keyboard shortcut.

Creating the East Wing and Passageway. click Save. 31 On the File menu. You add a curtain wall passageway between the wings with a suspended walkway between each of the upper floors. . you create the east wing of the building model by mirroring the west wing. a new dataset is supplied with the building model saved at this point. 29 On the View toolbar. NOTE Beginning with the next exercise. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Close. click Modify. Creating Your First Building Model | 87 . click 30 On the File menu. It has been modified slightly for training purposes.28 On the Design Bar. Creating the East Wing and Passageway In this exercise.

Mirror the west wing 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Open the m_First_Project-West_Wing. zoom out before making the selection. This dataset is essentially the same dataset you saved at the end of the last exercise. If necessary. under Views (all). You use this plane later as the mirror axis. The following modifications have been made: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wall inserts on the north and south walls were evenly spaced. and double-click 3D Southwest Isometric.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 Draw a pick box around the entire building model. Stair railings on Level 3 were added. click Open. expand 3D Views. Additional 3D views were added. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Floor openings were modified to create stair landings. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . NOTE It is important to capture every component within this building model.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon. click Ref Plane. 2 Draw a vertical reference plane 12000 mm from the exterior face of the right exterior wall as shown.

and select the section line to add it to the selection set.The entire model displays as selected. double-click Level 1. Creating Your First Building Model | 89 . 6 Press and hold CTRL. 8 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click and verify that Copy is selected. click Mirror. 5 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT Components selected in one view remain selected when you switch views. 7 On the Edit menu. 9 Select the vertical reference plane you added previously.

90 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Delete. 11 If necessary. 12 Select the reference plane. a progress bar displays on the status bar as the mirrored copy is generated. Add the passageway walls between wings 17 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. 10 After the mirrored copy displays. notice that a new section view exists in the Project Browser. 19 In the Type Selector. 21 Sketch the two curtain walls between the wings. click Wall. click 15 On the View toolbar. as shown. click Modify on the Design Bar. click the flip arrows to ensure the exterior face of the curtain wall is facing the outside. Notice that the new wing is a mirror image of the original. If necessary.After you specify the mirror axis. select Roof for Height. zoom out to see both wings of the building model. 16 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. 13 On the Edit menu. select Curtain Wall: Exterior Glazing. In addition. 14 On the View toolbar. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . The new components are numbered sequentially. .

23 On the Tools menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 91 . click Split Walls and Lines. 26 Using the same technique. 25 Split the face of the exterior brick wall at the intersection with the curtain wall. zoom into the intersection and make sure you split the wall where it intersects the exterior face of the elevator shaft wall. select Delete Inner Segment. as shown below. split the same exterior wall at the intersection of the exterior face of the wall hosting door 13 as shown. click . 24 On the Options Bar.Split and delete exterior wall faces of each wing 22 On the View toolbar. When splitting the wall.

29 On the Tools menu. 28 Zoom in to the intersection of the passageway and the exterior wall of the right wing. Notice the segment between the splits has been deleted. 30 On the Options Bar. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you can use the Align tool to clean up the intersection. verify that Delete Inner Segment is selected.27 Enter ZF to Zoom to Fit. TIP If the split does not line up perfectly with the intersecting wall. click Split Walls and Lines.

35 In the Project Browser. Creating Your First Building Model | 93 . enter 150 for Offset. and clear Extend into wall (to core).31 Using the technique learned previously. click Floor. split the face of the exterior brick wall at the similar intersections shown below. double-click Level 1. 37 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. to turn off thin lines mode. 39 Select both curtain walls so that the floor offset is on the exterior side of each wall. Arrows refer to each split location. click . click Modify. 32 On the Design Bar. Add a floor to the Level 1 passageway 36 Adjust your zoom settings until you can see the perimeter of the entire passageway. 33 On the View toolbar. click 34 On the View toolbar. 38 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.

In this case. 47 Select Concrete 300mm for Type. 42 Select the edge of the floor on both the west and east wings. 51 On the Design Bar. the sketch should be a single closed loop as shown. 48 Click Finish Sketch. NOTE In the following image. Add walkway to Level 2 49 In the Project Browser. 45 Continue cleaning up the intersections using this method. the sketch line weight has been increased for training purposes. 41 On the Options Bar. The general rule is that you should click the section of the line that you wish to keep. click Floor Properties. click Floor. In the following illustration. When finished. When sketching. click Lines. click Lines. and click OK. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 46 On the Design Bar. click Trim/Extend. 53 Sketch a rectangle with the vertical lines attached to the level 2 floor of each wing and each horizontal line 1500 mm from the inner face of the curtain wall. and then select the center of the top horizontal line. . 94 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .40 On the Design Bar. dimensions have been added for training purposes. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. click and Lock. there are two general rules that must be applied: You must have a closed loop and there cannot be intersecting lines. 52 On the Options Bar. notice the overlapping intersections that must be cleaned up before the sketch can be finished. 43 On the Tools menu. click the rectangle drawing tool. 44 Select the center of the left vertical line.

use the trim tool to make the sketch a single line. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. If they do. select 1100mm for Type. If necessary. 60 Select the line at the top edge of the walkway so that the sketch line is offset inside the walkway. click Railing Properties. you can use the SPACEBAR to toggle the offset. click Railing. as shown. click Floor Properties. zoom in when selecting the walkway edge to make sure the offset is correct. click and . 63 On the Design Bar. Add railings to Level 2 walkway 57 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 95 . 62 Draw two short lines to close the gap between the walkway and where it intersects each wing. 66 Select the railing. 59 On the Options Bar. 58 On the Design Bar. 61 On the Options Bar. and click OK. TIP When sketching. 64 In the Element Properties dialog box. and specify an offset of 50 mm. 65 On the Design Bar. and click OK.54 On the Design Bar. TIP Make sure the line intersections do not overlap. 55 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. click . 56 Click Finish Sketch.

as shown. only midpoints will be snapped to. select both railings and the walkway on Level 2. 69 Enter SM. click Section. click Modify. however. Add a new section view 71 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 73 On the Design Bar. You could create another railing on the other side of the walkway. and modify the direction and shape handles. continuous line. 72 Add a section view to the center of the passageway. move the cursor to the right. TIP Press and hold CTRL while making multiple selections. For the next mouse click. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click and Copy. 70 Click at the midpoint of the walkway for the mirror axis start point. and click to set the mirror axis. 68 On the Options Bar. It should be noted that the reason both railings weren’t sketched at the same time is because a railing sketch has to be a single.67 On the Edit menu. it is faster to mirror it. 75 In the section view. 74 Double-click the section head you created in the previous step. click Mirror.

click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. 81 Using the zoom commands. 77 On the Edit menu. select Level 3. 79 On the View toolbar. and click OK. Add roof to passageway 80 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Floor Plans. 83 On the Options Bar.76 On the Edit menu. 84 Select each curtain wall so that the offset is outside the curtain wall as shown. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. click . check Defines slope. 78 In the Select Levels dialog box. If necessary. Creating Your First Building Model | 97 . click Copy to Clipboard. zoom in until you can see the railings and walkways. 82 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The only remaining task is to add a roof to the passageway. adjust the view so you can see the entire passageway.

click Finish Roof.85 On the Design Bar. 89 Using the techniques you learned earlier. 87 Sketch two vertical lines that intersect the horizontal lines. click Lines. click the center of each roof line to clean up each corner. 90 On the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. Exact dimensions are not important. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 91 On the View toolbar. as shown. 88 On the Tools menu. click Trim/Extend. 86 On the Options Bar. as shown. click .

93 On the Tools menu. For training purposes. Joining a roof is a two-click procedure. 95 Click the outer edge of the main roof. click Join/Unjoin Roof. In this case. and then the outer edge of the corresponding wing roof. and click Hidden Line. you select the edge of the roof or wall that you want it joined to. Second. you select the edge of the passageway roof. The two roofs are joined. click the Model Graphics Style control. 94 Click the left edge of the passageway roof. First. it is easier to demonstrate the roof joins in hidden line mode. Creating Your First Building Model | 99 .Notice that the passageway roof needs to be joined to each wing. you click the edge of the roof that you want to join. Join the roofs 92 On the View Control Bar.

100 On the View Control Bar. you modify it to filter by level. click Join/Unjoin Roof. you create and modify a door schedule. click Save As. 97 Spin the model so that you have access to the unjoined end of the passageway roof and the east wing roof. 101 On the File menu. click . After creating the schedule.rvt 100 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. and select Shading with Edges. name the file First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. you duplicate the schedule twice. and click Save. click the Model Graphics Style control. 102 Navigate to your preferred directory. Finally. 98 On the Tools menu. rename each schedule. and change the filtering so each level has a unique door schedule. Scheduling the Building Model. Scheduling the Building Model In this exercise. 99 Join the passageway roof and the roof of the other wing using the same technique learned in the previous steps. The initial schedule contains all doors in the building model.96 On the View toolbar. 103 Proceed to the next exercise.

10 Move Cost below Hardware. Select Instance. You can add custom fields and make them either type or instance parameters. 9 Move Hardware so that it is directly below Family and Type. Select Text for Type.Create a door schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select Common for Discipline. and click Add. 4 From the Available Fields list. and click OK. enter Hardware for Name. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. click Schedule/Quantities. Select Other for Group parameter under. on the Fields tab. Under Parameter Data. select Mark and click Move up until it displays at the top of the list. 7 Click OK. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. add the following as scheduled fields: ■ ■ ■ Level Mark Cost Notice that there is not an available field for Hardware. select Doors for category. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. TIP If the View tab is not visible. right-click on the Design Bar and click View. TIP You can also double-click an available field to add it to the scheduled fields. Creating Your First Building Model | 101 . 5 Click Add Parameter. select Family and Type under Available Fields. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 8 Under Scheduled fields (in order). select Project parameter.

21 Under Fields. select the column grip between Door Type and Hardware and move the grip to the right until the door types display in their entirety. 24 Select Bold for Header text. 14 At the bottom of the tab. select Cost. 18 Enter Door Type for Heading. 23 Click the Appearance tab. select Level. You can hide this field because you are sorting and grouping by level. 12 Select Level for Sort by. 13 Under Sort by. select Hidden field. On the schedule. select Header and select Footer. 19 Under Fields.11 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 26 In the door schedule. select Calculate totals. 22 Under Field formatting. the column is redundant. select Grand totals and select Itemize every instance. and under Field Formatting. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Modifications to the schedule appearance display only when the schedule is added to a sheet. The door schedule displays. select Family and Type. Therefore. 17 Under Fields. 25 Click OK. 16 Click the Formatting tab. 20 Select Right for Alignment. 15 Select Mark for Then by. Door Type will display as the column heading rather than Family and Type.

specify Level equals Level 1 for Filter by. Duplicate and filter door schedules 30 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Cost is a type parameter. and click Properties. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. A message displays indicating that this change must be applied to all elements of the same type. and click OK. enter 500. Because you created the hardware parameter as an instance parameter. under Schedules/Quantities. right-click Door Schedule. each schedule still lists all the doors for each level. and press ENTER. and click Rename. 33 In the Rename View dialog box. 28 Click OK. 31 Repeat the previous step to create a second copy of the door schedule. Modify the schedule 27 Click in the Cost field for door mark number 1. under Schedules/Quantities. enter Brass. 29 Click in the Hardware field for door mark number 1. However. enter Door Schedule-Level 1. and click Duplicate. under Other. You now have a separate schedule for each level. Creating Your First Building Model | 103 . 34 Repeat the process to rename the remaining copies to Door Schedule-Level 2 and Door Schedule-Level 3. 35 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities.TIP In this view. and press ENTER. 32 In the Project Browser. each door is allowed a different value. any changes made to column size are not retained when the schedule is added to a sheet. right-click Door Schedule. click Edit for the Filter value. right-click Door Schedule-Level 1. This is because for this door type. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box.

modify the settings. Create the exterior scene 1 On the View toolbar. click .38 In the Element Properties dialog box. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 41 On the File menu. click OK. Rendering the Building Model In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. Notice that the information is now filtered for each level. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Type. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. Filter each schedule by their respective level.rvt. After rendering. and then render a 3D view using that scene. select Exterior. 40 In the Project Browser. 4 Click OK. Enter Exterior Scene for Name. double-click each door schedule. you capture the image and save it within the project. 39 Repeat the previous four steps for Door Schedule Level 2 and Door Schedule Level 3. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Settings. you create an exterior scene. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select New. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Rendering the Building Model. click Save.

Specify scene settings 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 11 In the Environment dialog box. 17 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. This is the background color for the scene. under Background Color. and B settings. G. 15 On the View toolbar. 16 Spin the building model until it resembles the following illustration. Creating Your First Building Model | 105 . click OK. click Region Raytrace. A color bar displays. 18 Drag a box around the building model as shown. 10 Click OK. select Solid Color. click the Bars tab. under Scene Settings. 13 Under Raytrace Settings. This is a white background color. the building model should resemble the following illustration. When the rendering process is complete. 8 In the Color Picker dialog box. 6 In the Environment dialog box. click Environment. under Scene Settings. select Good for Quality. 9 Specify a value of 250 for the R. click . 7 Click the color bar. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 12 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. The raytrace process begins and a progress bar displays on the status bar. 14 Click OK. and select Blurry Reflections and Blurry Transparency.

22 On the File menu. In the next exercise. and double-click {3D}. you add a rendered view and an elevation view. On the second sheet. click Display Model. expand Renderings. Documenting the Building Model In this exercise. you add this to a sheet. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. you add two sheets with titleblocks to the project. You add a floor plan and schedule to the first sheet. click Capture Rendering. click Save. This is the captured rendering from the previous steps. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. An expandable branch called Renderings is added to the Project Browser. Documenting the Building Model. 21 In the Project Browser.19 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt 106 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Titleblocks are a family just like any other component. and press ENTER. The creator of this titleblock family did not want this text to be modifiable in the project environment. click Load. The titleblocks that are listed are loaded into the project. enter your name. The blue text is text that you can modify. click OK to use the loaded titleblock. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Add a sheet and titleblock to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The text is not selectable by design. 8 Select the titleblock and zoom in to the lower right corner. 7 Try to select the logo in the upper right corner. Notice that several titleblocks are installed with the software. 4 Double-click the Titleblocks folder. 9 Click Owner. Creating Your First Building Model | 107 . click Sheet. You are prompted to select a titleblock. You can create a titleblock family and load it into the project or navigate to it from this dialog box. click Metric Library. 5 Click Cancel.

In this case. and click Add View to Sheet. select Floor Plan: Level 1. 14 In the Views dialog box. and click OK. Add a view to the titleblock 12 Zoom out until you can see the entire sheet. Titleblock numbering is sequential and automatic. 15 Move the cursor to the center of the titleblock and click. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. the label displays As Indicated. click Add View. 11 Enter First Building Model for Project Name. click Project Information. Notice that your name is displayed for Client Name. referring the reader to the view titles. the next sheet and titleblock will be A102. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . The Scale is blank and is filled in when a view is added to the titleblock. If you add views of different scales.10 On the Settings menu.

Notice drag handles display on the ends of the view title. 21 Right-click the view. click Modify. and on the context menu. However. and on the context menu. 25 Drag the view to the lower left corner of the titleblock as shown. 24 Adjust the view title length by dragging the shape handles under the extents of the view. 23 Select the view. You can work on the building model within this view. click Visibility/Graphics. Relocate the view title 22 Drag the view title under the view. Notice the elevation symbols display. and click OK. click Deactivate View. clear Elevations.16 On the Design Bar. 18 On the View menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 109 . The titleblock becomes an underlay and the view becomes active. click Activate View. 17 Right-click the view. you activated the view specifically to turn off the elevation symbol visibility. 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 20 Under Visibility.

Notice that the scale value has updated.26 Zoom in to the lower right corner. 110 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 27 Zoom out until the titleblock fits within the drawing area. drag Door Schedule-Level 1 onto the upper right corner of the titleblock. 28 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities.

Creating Your First Building Model | 111 . adjust each column width so no text wrapping occurs. 30 Using the column drag handles.29 Zoom in to the top of the schedule. 31 Zoom out and move the schedule into the upper right corner of the titleblock.

under Elevations (Building Elevations). the Scale label displays As Indicated. Add various views to a second sheet 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 36 On the File menu. under Renderings. drag North to the lower left corner of sheet A102. click Sheet.TIP When the schedule is selected. If necessary. Because these two views have different view scales. the schedule breaks in half. click Close. You can adjust the lengths of each section after the break. click Save. notice the z symbol in the center edge. 34 In the Project Browser. modify the location and width of the view titles. 33 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. You have completed your first building model. If you click this. 35 In the Project Browser. click OK to use the default titleblock. 112 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 37 On the File menu. drag {3D} to the upper right corner of the new titleblock.

113 . which is independent of the project settings. In the second lesson. In the first lesson. and set it as your default template. Finally.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. you modify the system environment. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. you create an office template. you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit Building working environment.

click the Graphics tab. journal cleanup options. 12 Under Colors. click Wall. the elements causing the error display using this color. they are not saved to project or template files. 15 Under Notifications. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 9 In the New Project dialog box. and click OK. select Invert background color. Modifying General System Options In this exercise.rte in the Metric folder. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 10 On the Settings menu. 6 In the New Project dialog box. click Modify. 11 In the Options dialog box. and click OK. select yellow. When an error occurs. Set graphics settings 1 On the File menu. click OK. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. click the value for Selection Color. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. and select the wall. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box.Modifying System Settings In this lesson. click Options. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . notification preferences. 5 On the File menu. These settings control the graphics. and your username when using worksets. click Close to close all open projects. Notice that the drawing area is black. selection default options. 2 On the Settings menu. under Template file. and click Open. 4 Under Colors. 16 Click OK. specify the following options: ■ ■ Select One hour for Save Reminder interval. 13 In the Color dialog box. 14 Click the General tab. 19 On the Design Bar. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Building. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Options. 8 Select m_Tutorial_Default. click Training Files. Select None for Tooltip Assistance. 3 In the Options dialog box. click the Graphics tab. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Building working environment. click Browse.

26 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Building session. 25 On the File menu. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. Your login name displays by default. 20 On the Design Bar. Modifying System Settings | 115 . the family libraries. clear Invert background color. 30 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ ■ Under Notifications. click Options. click No. as well as the material and rendering libraries. 23 On the File menu. click Close. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. click Close. Under Journal File Cleanup. 29 In the Options dialog box. you specify your default file locations. click the Training Files icon. 24 When prompted to save. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. 32 On the File menu. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. If prompted.Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Building sessions. 27 Open the m_Settings. Specifying File Locations. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. do not save the changes. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. These settings control location of important Revit Building files such as your default project template. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. the family template files. These files are used primarily in the software support process. click Open. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). click Modify. 28 On the Settings menu. Select Red for Selection Color. 31 Click OK. Under Username. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files.

you can start a new project with that template. 4 Click Cancel. When you are opening. 10 Under Libraries. choose New  ➤ Project. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog box.Set file locations 1 On the Settings menu. click Browse. and you can create new libraries. under Default path for family template files. On the File menu. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog box. click Browse. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click Browse. and click Browse to select a template. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. However. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog box. and change the name to My Library. or loading a Revit Building file. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 5 Under Default path for user files. and click the arrow that displays on the right side of the field. TIP To view a template. 8 Click Cancel. click the File Locations tab. 12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. You can modify the existing library names and path. under Libraries. In the following illustration. Save. notice the list of library names. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Each library path points Revit Building to a folder of families or training files. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. click . such as in a large. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog box. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. click Options. and click OK. 3 Under Default template file. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. 2 In the Options dialog box. select the folder to save your files to by default. Load. 7 In the Options dialog box. saving. and Import dialog boxes. centralized.

24 Under AccuRender resource location. Modifying System Settings | 117 . 18 Click Cancel. specify the new location here. 14 Under Library Name. 15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list. and click OK. or families. and select it as the library path. Load. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Notice that Revit Building navigates directly to the library path. view the current path. templates. Specifying Spelling Options. click My Library. and Import dialog boxes. This path specifies the location of the AccuRender® texture library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. 25 Click OK. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click the My Library icon. If you work in a large office. and click OK.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Building projects. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog box. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Building. Save. 21 Under Libraries. click Options. 16 On the File menu. 20 Click the File Locations tab. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. select My Library. click Open. 22 Click to delete the library. Specify rendering settings 23 Click the Rendering tab. This path is determined during installation. If you want to relocate this path. 19 On the Settings menu.

In this exercise. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. click the Spelling tab. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and click Open. 9 In the text editor. 20 Under Settings. 18 On the Settings menu. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 22 In the text editor. click Exit. click Edit. 11 In the Options dialog box. click Options. 2 In the New Project dialog box. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 4 Select m_Tutorial_Default. do not save the changes. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click OK. click Edit. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click OK. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 12 On the Standard toolbar. click the Spelling tab. If prompted. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 2 In the Options dialog box. delete sheetmtl-CU. you modify snap settings. 6 On the File menu. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. click Close. click Exit. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click Text. click Restore Defaults. work with snapping turned off. click Options. click Training Files. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Save. click OK. click Browse. 24 In the Options dialog box. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 5 In the text editor. You can turn snap settings on and off. 4 Under Personal dictionary. 7 On the File menu. 14 Click in the drawing area. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Modifying Snap Settings. click Edit. click Spelling. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 16 On the Tools menu.rte in the Metric folder. Modify snap increments 1 On the File menu. 25 On the File menu. click OK. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Save. 10 On the File menu. click to open a new Revit Building project using the default template. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. you modify snap increments. click Modify. enter sheetmtl-Cu.Modify spelling settings 1 On the Settings menu. and then click File  ➤ Exit. 19 In the Options dialog box. 3 Under Settings. 5 In the New Project dialog box. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. under Template file. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 23 On the File menu of the text editor. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project.

A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. Revit Building uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. use the wheel button on your mouse. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. snapping reverts to the system default settings. If you do not have a wheel button. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 8 Under Object Snaps.. This is the increment that you added previously. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000. As you zoom in and out within a view. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. This dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. zoom out until it does so. Modifying System Settings | 119 . Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. click Snaps. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 7 Under Dimension Snaps. and move the cursor to the right.6 On the Settings menu. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. While sketching. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. and enter 500 . For example. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. click OK. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. If it does not. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. click Wall. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 10 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Snaps dialog box.

26 Proceed to the next lesson. lines. and delete the value 500 . Do not set the wall end point. and the wall edges. fill patterns. 24 Click OK. click Snaps. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. click Modify. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. it will snap to the endpoints. and click Wall. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Modifying Project Settings. click Close. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. and specify the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. When you apply a material to a component. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. If you move the cursor along the wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Finally. Notice that snapping is once again active. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 Enter SM. save the project file with a unique name. Using these options. 21 Move the cursor downward. 25 On the File menu. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. annotations. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. and move the cursor to the right. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project.. You create and modify materials. and do not save the file. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. and object styles. and use it to complete the exercises. 22 On the Settings menu. the midpoint. you create a new material and apply it to a model component.

click Materials. This list includes all materials required by loaded model components.In the steps that follow. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog box. In the steps that follow.Fieldstone. 4 In the New Material dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. 3 Click Duplicate. nor is there an AccuRender texture applied. However. Masonry-Fieldstone. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. click Open. and select Masonry . Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. and click OK. Create a new material 1 On the Settings menu.Stone for Name. This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. Open m_Settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. enter Masonry . Modifying Project Settings | 121 . this material provides a good foundation for the new material. you render a region to observe the changes. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. 2 Scroll down. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. When a model component is loaded into a project. Notice that there is no Surface Pattern applied to this material. click the Training Files icon. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project.

12 In the Material Editor dialog box. . In the next exercise. 26 Select the right exterior wall. click Edit/New. on the Material menu.Fieldstone material. and click OK.Modify material settings 5 Under AccuRender. and double-click Level 1.Fieldstone for the name.75 for X and Y. and click OK. enter Masonry . and click Edit. 9 Select the entry under Image Mapping. click the Orientation tab. 15 Click OK. 10 In the Image Mapping dialog box. notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank. 17 Select the upper exterior wall.Fieldstone for Name. enter 0. The AccuRender texture Masonry . Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click to select a texture. Apply the new material 16 In the Project Browser. and select Stone82. Before closing the Materials dialog box. 24 In the Materials dialog box. select Masonry . 28 In the Type Selector. click New  ➤ Use Current Material as Template. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . select user from the list of libraries. expand Floor Plans. 11 Under Offset. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. and click . click Edit. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. and select the remaining two unchanged walls. 25 Click OK three times. 22 Click in the Material field for layer #1. Fieldstone on CMU. 14 In the Material Library dialog box. 8 In the Material Editor dialog box. 21 In the Value field for Structure. expand Views (all). 27 Press CTRL. click OK. 19 Click Duplicate.Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library. and click OK. click This is the material you created previously. and click OK. you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns within the rendering.Brick. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 In the Save Material As dialog box. By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map. click OK. The upper wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it. click the Maps tab. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 7 In the Material Library dialog box. 23 On the right side of the Material field. 20 Enter the new wall name. 6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\. It is currently assigned the material Masonry .

32 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 33 On the File menu. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. click Display Model. In the following exercise. Zoom into the model. click Save As. TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Modifying Project Settings | 123 . click Region Raytrace. Controlling Object Styles.rvt. click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. In the exercise. When finished. drag a rectangle around the 3D image. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. the fieldstone material that you created is displayed. and click Rendering. click . After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. select Region Raytrace. the rendering process begins. Notice the roof did not render. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. 30 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined.29 On the View Toolbar. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. 31 In the drawing area. you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this.

Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. choose Model. click Custom. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 9 Select Fieldstone_Model. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser.56 for Import scale. such as steel. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Building software. and click OK. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog box. 12 Click OK.pat from the Common folder. click Import. 7 Under Custom. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog box. and double-click East. Apply the fieldstone pattern 13 Select the east exterior wall. click Fill Patterns. m_Settings-in progress. select fldstn. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. and click Open. TIP Typically. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Revit Building\Training. 11 Enter Fieldstone for Name. expand Elevations. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and enter . The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation.There are two types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 2 On the Settings menu. 5 Click New. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 10 Under Custom.rvt. 3 Under Pattern Type.

22 In the Materials dialog box. 20 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. click . For example. click . 27 On the File menu. Object Styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. click . 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 Under Surface Pattern.Fieldstone. 18 On the right side of the Materials field. TIP If the pattern does not display. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Object Styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. click in the Material field for layer #1. 24 On the Design Bar. click OK. under Pattern Type. notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry . 21 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. click Save. 25 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears.” You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog box and apply it to all window types. click Edit. click Modify. click to select a fill pattern. The east wall of the building displays as solid fill.14 On the Options Bar. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click Edit/New.Fieldstone material. In the Materials dialog box. 23 Click OK three times. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 On the View Toolbar. there are often multiple window types within a project. and click OK. 16 In the Value field for Structure. Controlling Object Styles. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. select Model. Modifying Project Settings | 125 . you can set the window frame material to “By Category. Controlling Object Styles You can use Object Styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents.

m_Settings-in progress. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three left windows facing you. and double-click 3D Model View. expand 3D Views. 2 On the keyboard. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

17 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Shading with Edges. 4 Select one of the windows. and select the circular window on the second level. click OK. 11 Zoom out. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select 15 In the Materials dialog box. . 18 On the Design Bar. under Other. click . Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. Modifying Project Settings | 127 . click Edit/New. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box.3 On the View Control Bar. click By Category. click By Category. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. click . 5 On the Options Bar. and select 8 In the Materials dialog box. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. click the Trim Exterior value. under Other. click Edit/New. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. click the Trim Exterior Material value. click OK. . 12 On the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style. click OK.

. click Object Styles. click Save. 23 On the right side of the Material field.rvt. 27 Under Category. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. 28 On the View Toolbar. click 29 On the File menu. 21 Under Category. specify Trim . 25 In the Object Styles dialog box. expand Windows.19 On the Settings menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select Trim. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles. click OK. Notice that the material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. and click OK. m_Settings-in progress. click . click Object Styles. 20 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click in the Material field. expand Windows. 22 Under the Windows category. click Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Granite for name. 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 30 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK twice. select Trim .White for Trim material. 24 In the Materials dialog box. 26 On the Settings menu. Notice that the external window frames are now white. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof.

enter Roof Line for Name. 8 On the Settings menu. under Category. There are two ways to apply the line style to the roof. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog box. click Model Graphics Style. and select Roof Line for Line Pattern. click Line Patterns. now you must apply it. click Object Styles. 2 On the Settings menu. You have created a new line pattern. The line style is applied to the roof in all views. 7 On the View Control Bar. and click Hidden Line. click New. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog box. 11 Click OK. m_Settings-in progress.rvt.Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. Modifying Project Settings | 129 . 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. is open with the 3D view active. 9 In the Object Styles dialog box. 10 Select Red for Line Color. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. select Roofs.

click Object Styles. under Modify Subcategories. 16 Select Solid for Line Pattern. click Line Styles. and click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. double-click 3D Model View. select Roofs. 14 On the Settings menu. and click Hidden Line. 15 In the Object Styles dialog box. and select Roofs for Visibility. 20 Click Override for Line Style Projection. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 5 for Line Weight. 21 In the Select Line Style dialog box. click Model Graphics Style. click Visibility/Graphics. 19 Click the Model Categories tab. and select Black for Line Color. 18 On the View menu. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Create a new line style 23 In the Project Browser. 17 Click OK. click New. This overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 25 In the Line Styles dialog box. Select Roof Line for Line Pattern. Notice the site topography and the property lines. double-click Site. Select Blue for Line Color. Notice that the line style displays in this view also.12 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 24 On the Settings menu. under Floor Plans. under Category. 26 Enter Zoning Setback for Name. 22 Click OK twice.

34 On the View menu. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . 28 Click OK. Enter -3000 mm for Offset. Select Red for Line Color. Modifying Annotations. click Lines. 33 On the View Toolbar. 36 Click OK. click . select Zoning Setback. 42 On the File menu.27 For the Zoning Setback category. The -3000mm offset displays inside the property lines. 30 In the Type Selector. 40 Click OK. double-click Level 1 Annotated. under Floor Plans. expand Lines. Notice the Zoning Setback lines appear in this view. 35 On the Model Categories tab. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. 41 On the View Toolbar. click . This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the property lines. ■ 32 Click the upper-left corner of the property line to begin the rectangle. click Save. (Make sure you specify a negative value. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that the line style has not been applied to the roof in this view because you applied the override to the 3D Model View only. expand Lines. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 38 On the View menu. 39 On the Model Categories tab. and clear Zoning Setback. 37 In the Project Browser. 31 In the Options Bar. and clear Zoning Setback. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight Projection. specify the following: ■ ■ Click . Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. click Visibility/Graphics. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type number.) Click . and click to set the rectangle endpoint.

double-click Level 1 Annotated. 18 In the Open dialog box. under Category. You have created a new dimension style. click the default value for Units Format. 5 Under Text. scroll down to Windows. In the steps that follow. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. 3 In the Type Properties dialog box.Imperial and click OK. 7 Click OK twice.rvt. click Duplicate. m_Settings-in progress. 2 On the Settings menu. is open with the 3D View active. click Modify. and select M_Window Tag . m_Settings-in progress. 15 On the Settings menu. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. and that the tag displays the window type number rather than the window instance number. 6 In the Format dialog box: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.rvt. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. click . 14 Click Cancel. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 12 On the Options Bar. 4 Enter the name Linear . 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 17 Click Load. Notice that the windows on the east and west walls are tagged. click Dimension. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type number. notice that there is a Linear . click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. navigate to the Annotations/Architectural folder of the Metric Library. 11 Select any window in the east or west wall. In the Type Selector. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box.Imperial dimension available.Number. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 16 In the Tags dialog box. Load a new window tag 10 In the Project Browser.

23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 32 On the View Toolbar. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 28 Under Leader.Number. you modify three settings that have a broad impact on the project. click M_Window Tag . M_Window Tag . click Tag All Not Tagged. 21 Under Loaded Tags. Temporary Dimensions. you modify the detail level assignments. you specify the project units of measurements.In the preview image. Specifying Units of Measurement. notice Window Tags appears twice. m_Settings-in progress. notice that the label displays 1i. In the first section. dimension values display using this setting.Number. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. A window instance tag displays on each selected window. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Number is now the assigned tag. Specifying Units of Measurement. 29 On the east wall. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . In the second section.Number as the assigned tag. Temporary Dimensions. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. Notice that both window tag types can coexist within the same view. click the three left-most windows. clear Leader. the other displays the instance value. Unless overridden. click Tag. 19 Click Open. In the final section. 20 In the Tags dialog box. 25 On the left side of the north wall. Leave M_Window Tag . 26 On the Design Bar. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . and Detail Level Options In this exercise. verify that Create is clear. select one of the window tags that displays the type value. click 33 On the File menu. click Modify. 22 Click OK. and Detail Level Options. select M_Window Tag . you modify the temporary dimension settings.rvt. Under Category. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 27 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. click Save. 30 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Design Bar. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. and click OK. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. . 24 On the Options Bar.Number.

8 Under Walls.Set units of measurement 1 On the Settings menu. dimensions use these project settings. click the default value for Format. 14 On the File menu. click Detail Level. 6 Click OK. and expand 3D Views. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. expand Floor Plans. click Open. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. 9 Under Doors and Windows. Unless overridden. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. select meters squared for Unit suffix. click Temporary Dimensions. 12 Click OK. click the Training Files icon. In this table. Open c_Project_Browser. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. select Openings. under Area. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Format dialog box. click Close. and click OK. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 On the Settings menu. click Save. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. Specify detail levels 10 On the Settings menu. expand Views (all). you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. and click OK. Modifying Project Browser Organization. click Project Units. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. 13 On the File menu. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. You do not select a view scale to move it.rvt from the Common folder. select To the nearest 100 for Rounding. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog box. and click OK. under Length. select Faces. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. click . In this exercise. In this project. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the default value for Format. 3 In the Format dialog box.

and click OK. 4 On the Settings menu. 14 In the Project Browser. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. expand each sheet set. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 9 In the Browser Organization dialog box. expand Sheets (all). Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 On the Settings menu. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 7 On the Settings menu. and click Apply. click Browser Organization. expand each view type. On the Project Browser. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. In the Project Browser. click Browser Organization. 12 Click the Sheets tab.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 5 On the Views tab. 10 In the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . notice that Views are grouped based on Phase. under Sheets. 8 Select Phase. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . and click OK.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . select Discipline. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 2 In the Project Browser. click Browser Organization. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically.

click the Folders tab. You can also save these settings in a template file. click Browser Organization. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your office template. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. Creating an Office Template. In this lesson. and Discipline. under Views. you create a Revit Building template file and set it as your default template. and click New. expand Complete. Proceed to the next lesson. 21 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog box. named print settings. 22 On the File menu. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. dimensions styles. expand 3D Views. 16 Click the Views tab. When you create new projects. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and render scenes in a template. View Type (Family and Type). the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. and click OK. and expand both Architectural and Structural. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. Although Revit Building provides many templates to choose from. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box. If you want to save this file. navigate to your preferred directory. It is mostly conceptual and designed as a road map with options for your consideration. and click OK. click Close. and view names.Create a new browser organization name 15 On the Settings menu. In the lesson that follows. levels. and click OK. enter a unique file name. you create an office template. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .

Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. Other than the default template. click New  ➤ Project. 11 Under Create New. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. expand Views. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. If you have additional projects open. such as the structural template. click Browse. each is modified in a way to make it useful to the applicable industry. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. Other templates. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template.rte template. Creating an Office Template | 137 . You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 9 On the File menu. 8 In the Project Browser. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. Whenever you create a new project or template. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. 3 Under Template File. For example. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. 12 Under Template File. you select the starting point for your office template. In that case. in the drawing area. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. drag a zoom region around the level heads. 5 Click OK. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. If you want to use a template other than the default. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 7 On the View menu. structural or construction. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Close. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. Review existing templates 1 On the File menu. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. When you create the material. the same rules apply.Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. click New ➤ Project. and click Open. select Project Template. Modifying Project Settings. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. 10 On the File menu. 13 Select the default template. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. and double-click North. when you create a new project. select Project for Create new. 2 In the New Project dialog box. close them. When you create a new template based on an existing template. expand Elevations. click Browse. 14 Click Open. For example. you modify the project settings for your new template. you can select it now. for instance.

you may want to specify their appearance when rendered. You may want to save the material to a library located on a network path. Create and modify materials 1 On the Settings menu. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. you can do so by going to the Material menu and selecting New.In this exercise. you can set line weights. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. Specify object styles 9 On the Settings menu. Choose the appropriate option. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. specific modifications are not dictated. line colors. 3 Under AccuRender. rotate. RELATED See Modifying System Settings for more information on creating new AccuRender materials. see the previous lesson. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings for more information on creating new fill patterns. When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can also dimension to model pattern lines. 2 Scroll down the Name list. 7 Create new fill patterns as needed. For more details on modifying these settings. Observe the materials that are already defined. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. create and modify them as needed. click Materials. and move model patterns. or modify existing patterns. 8 Click OK when finished. click Fill Patterns. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. You can do this by setting the AccuRender Texture. line patterns. Modifying System Settings or refer to the Help documentation. be aware that access to the original material library may be necessary at some point. In the Object Styles dialog box. You can align. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. 4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialog boxes. Create and modify fill patterns 5 On the Settings menu. click to access the AccuRender Material Library. click Object Styles. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. weights. If you create or modify new materials. During this exercise. 6 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. and create the AccuRender material. If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects.

The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 12 If necessary. such as section lines and dimension lines. Creating an Office Template | 139 . 31 To modify a line pattern. such as walls and windows in orthographic views. and create new subcategories as needed. 17 For existing line categories. create new subcategories. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of modeling components. one for perspective model line styles. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for six different drawing scales. 18 If necessary. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. click Line Patterns. and scroll through the list of categories. 14 Modify categories. 11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. 25 Modify existing line weights as needed. 24 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog box. 33 Click OK. and one for annotation symbol line styles. 27 Modify existing line weights as needed. You can add and delete view scales. 23 Add and delete view scales as needed. 10 Click the Model Objects tab. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects such as walls and windows in perspective views.TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. create new line subcategories. 13 Click the Annotation Objects tab. or line pattern as needed. In the dialog box. 32 Add and delete line patterns as needed. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. click Line Weights. 26 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. Modify line styles 16 On the Settings menu. Modify line patterns 29 On the Settings menu. 19 Click OK. there are three tabs: one for model component line styles. line color. 28 Click OK. Modify line weights 20 On the Settings menu. modify the line weight. select it. 21 Click the Model Line Weights tab. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. and click Edit. click Line Styles. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 30 Scroll through the list of line patterns.

select it from this list. and Angle settings. 52 Under Length. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog box. name the style. 50 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 43 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. In the Tags dialog box. 49 To load new annotation tags. 56 Specify the Slope option. Specify project units 51 On the Settings menu. click Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. select it from this list. 42 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 48 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. Modify Dimension Styles 40 On the Settings menu. tags. To see the details of a particular style. For example. and click OK. 37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. and choose a decimal symbol. Modify loaded tags 47 On the Settings menu. and specify the properties. The arrowheads configured within this dialog box can be applied to text notes. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 57 Click OK. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 53 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. and radial dimensions are modified separately. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Radial. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Angular. and dimensions. ■ ■ On the Settings menu. and specify the properties. 55 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. click Duplicate. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. Linear. click Project Units. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 35 Select the Type drop-down list. angular. Volume. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 54 Click OK. 46 Repeat the previous five steps for angular and radial dimensions. when you add a door with the tag option selected. The tag assignments in this dialog box dictate the default tag for each category. name the style. 41 Select the Type drop-down list. To see the details of a particular style. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. On the Settings menu. click Duplicate. click Load. 45 Click OK. click Format. 39 Click OK. 36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style.Modify arrowheads 34 On the Settings menu. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear.

you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. Medium. The detail level is based on view scale. create new browser organization types. or Edit existing organization types. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 69 Click the Sheets tab. click Browser Organization. 67 Delete. Rename. see Modifying Project Browser Organization. or Fine. 72 Click OK. Although these settings can be saved within a template. create new browser organization types. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. To move the view scales. click the arrows between columns. click Temporary Dimensions. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. click Detail Level. 59 Under Walls. 63 Review the table. Modify project browser organization 65 On the Settings menu. Using the arrows between the columns. 68 If necessary. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. 66 In the Browser Organization dialog box. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. In a typical project. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. Specify detail levels 62 On the Settings menu. and move view scales as needed. Additional project settings 73 On the Settings menu. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog box. In such a case. When you create a new view. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. 70 Delete. 60 Under Doors and Windows. 61 Click OK. click the Views tab. However. 71 If necessary. 64 Click OK. For example. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. TIP In the drawing area. Creating an Office Template | 141 . Rename. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. or Edit existing organization types.Specify temporary dimensions 58 On the Settings menu. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template.

or modify a door. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. titleblocks.Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. In the Element Properties dialog box. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Obviously. there are some important thoughts to consider. or electrical fixtures. notice the list of doors already loaded. and click OK. See Modifying Views and View Templates. you could load detail components. do so before starting this exercise. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. or add to this selection. However. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. If this selection is satisfactory. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. the section cut material. 74 Proceed to the next exercise. create. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you changed a window within a project. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. click Door. Phases Project Phasing Area Settings Area Analysis View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. See Modifying Render Scene Settings Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings Render Scene If necessary. If necessary. you can create and modify area schemes if there are default settings applicable to most projects. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. 3 To modify. and make modifications in each area as necessary. If necessary. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. or use the Project Browser. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. and click Open. Modify door type 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . For example. select from the Options Bar. you can move onto the next component type. In addition. Site Settings If necessary. Although this is possible. Make modifications. You can find additional information in Help. In the steps that follow. 2 In the Type Selector. This could be useful for things such as hardware. and electrical fixtures. create. furniture. Use the instructions in the table below to load. you can create scene settings and save them to the template. you may want to delete. phase filters. Although the options are endless. and the poche depth. If necessary. or load a new door type. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. For example. you can set up the phases. Links to associated tutorials are provided. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. modify. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups. Use the table below as a checklist. You can load any family or group into a template. if you loaded every window type you could find. you do both. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can set the default contour line interval. select Edit/New. Each command is available on the Settings menu. Select it. Depending on the intended use of this template. If you have not completed the previous exercise. select Load. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change.

) 9 Expand the titleblock. expand Families. Creating an Office Template | 143 . 4 Click OK. 6 On the File menu. and click OK. Enter Name. click Load from Library. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group.Goal: Create new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. Press ESC twice to return to the template. and select the titleblock type. select Edit/New. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. and click OK. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. Notice that each family category is listed. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Click Duplicate. Modify type properties.

you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. you will first modify view templates. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. and click Delete. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. To load a titleblock. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. In this exercise. or modify any component families or groups as necessary.10 On the Options Bar. In addition. At any time. To do so. In this exercise. you can apply a view template to any view. click 11 Click <<Preview. Notice it has Revit Building in the upper-right corner. Modifying Views and View Templates. . load. View Range. you created new projects using different templates. 2 Select Architectural Plan for Name. click Load. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. Detail Level. you create the views required for your template. 12 Click OK. RELATED For more information. click View Templates. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. This titleblock is currently part of the template. Discipline. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. In addition. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. Create and modify view templates 1 On the Settings menu. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. see Creating a Titleblock Family. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click the component. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. create. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views.

13 On the View menu. You can also duplicate or delete the view. under Floor Plans. Upon the application of the view template. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. After applying the template. and elevations. 22 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Options Bar. click Apply View Template. click Apply View Template. double-click South. open the view from the Project Browser. and click OK. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. review the existing floor plans. 27 Recreate additional levels as needed. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 16 On the View menu. duplicate. the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. and then click OK. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. under Floor Plans. Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view. the view is not linked to the template in any way. click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. or delete them as needed. expand Floor Plans. 23 To add additional levels to the template. In addition. click Apply View Template. 11 Click Apply. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. duplicate. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. under Floor Plans. or delete this view. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. select Site Plan. Black level heads have no associated views. 15 In the Project Browser. select Make Plan View. double-click Site. If necessary. right-click Level 1. expand Views. 12 In the Project Browser. in the context menu. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. and double-click Level 1.By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 8 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. click Apply. 6 Click OK. This options means that every time a new plan view is created. Blue level heads have associated plan views. double-click Level 2. Creating an Office Template | 145 . and. ceiling plans. under Elevations. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. 21 In the Project Browser. you can rename this view according to your preference. and click OK. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. notice that you have the option to rename. review the floor plans. 4 If necessary. 18 If you modified any other view templates. and apply the appropriate template. click Apply. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. 20 In the Project Browser. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. Notice the level names. Rename. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply.

click Sheet. go to the View menu. click . and click View Properties. On the Formatting tab. select and order required fields. select the category type. 38 If you want to add schedules to your template. select one. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. This can save significant time and ensure office standards are maintained. 36 To save the view. Create and modify schedules 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. To do so. and click OK. and click OK. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . to orient and save the view. on the View toolbar. and click OK. click 33 On the View toolbar. expand 3D Views. 30 In the Project Browser. 32 To create additional 3D views. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views  ➤ 3D Views. modify settings as needed. If you have already loaded your office titleblocks into the template. Dynamically Modify View. You can use this tool. You can add schedules to a template. If necessary.Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. and select Rename. On the Filter tab. 31 Rename the 3D View. On the Appearance tab. modify settings as needed. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. on the View toolbar. Add sheets to the template 42 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and modify their properties accordingly. 34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog box. 40 Click OK. 35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target. click Schedule/Quantities. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. under 3D Views. click . right-click {3D}. assign filters. supply a view name. click 29 In the Project Browser. modify settings as needed. 41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. 39 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. You are prompted to select a titleblock.

45 Create new sheets as needed. 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors. 8 Under Scene Settings. Creating an Office Template | 147 . Modifying Render Scene Settings You can create interior and exterior scene settings and save them within the template. tiff. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. 3 Click OK. select Exterior. Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering. 44 To rename or renumber the sheet. jpeg. 10 Under Plant Season. Choose from bitmap. for example. and a Clouds tab appears. the relevant tab appears. you could render basic scenes much faster and with greater consistency without the need to spend time modifying these settings. Be sure that you have installed this software. and click New  ➤ Place Titleblock. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. exterior-default. under Scene Settings. place. and changes the color automatically depending on the sun and sky conditions. 43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. for example. select the titleblock and delete it. 3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors. and then click OK. go to the View menu. ■ ■ ■ 6 Specify the Advanced features: TIP As you select options. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Render Scene Settings. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. You can still add views to the sheet. Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information). Create and modify an exterior scene 1 On the Settings menu. if not. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. a deciduous tree in summer appears in full bloom with leaves. select the default titleblock. and click Rename. By adding a default interior and exterior rendered scene setting to the template. and provide a name for the scene. After the sheet is created. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can also save and load environmental settings. if one exists. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view. ■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background. Background images are available from the AccuRender software. 9 Specify the date and time. while in winter. 5 Specify the background color. 2 Under Type. select the Clouds option. click Sun. Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog. click Render Scene. which is included on the Revit Building CD. settings. click Environment. you can install AccuRender by running the install program on the Revit Building CD.TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. choose the appropriate season for plant rendering. and click OK. or targa. and colors. Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering. it is completely bare. ■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky. for example. 7 Click OK. To do so.

Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the solution. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. 16 Repeat the steps you performed when creating an exterior scene. when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts. Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts. Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass. Best. The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflections or transparencies are permitted. Best. 15 Provide a name for the new interior scene. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 On the File menu. Modifying Import/Export Settings. Shadows based on the size of the light source are calculated. Back face culling decreases rendering time and space. Better. These scenes are now part of the template and will provide users with two basic rendering scenes. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. Better.11 Specify Culling options: ■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. This works on opaque faces only. the quality also is lower. Meaningful values are between 0 and 1. This value is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar. Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. for example Interior . but also increases the solution time. Higher values cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface. Best is the slowest. and click OK. Higher values cause longer rendering times. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. ■ Set values for Reflection and Transparency bounces. Good. Medium. This setting is effective for region raytraces. Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better resolve the value of the pixel. 17 Click OK when finished. ■ ■ ■ Create and modify an interior scene 14 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box.Default. such as jaggy shadows or light leaks. Good. however. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. ■ 13 Specify Raytrace Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft. but provides the highest quality. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click New. Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass. ■ 12 Specify the Radiosity Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft. This is a very time consuming operation but. Draft provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. ■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. Medium.

9 Select Save As. windows. and they become the set mappings for the project. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Building line weight. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. Using Shared Parameters. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. For example. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. name the file. These settings are retained within the project template. and click Save. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. project parameters.txt for MicroStation). Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with Shared Parameters). Project Parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. and so on.txt for AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. You can save these mappings to a text file. therefore. They cannot be shared with other projects. and click Save. Revit Building presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. and related multi-category tags and schedules. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. name the file. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. Creating Named Print Settings. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. When you create a multi-category schedule.The Export Layers command maps Revit Building categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. In this exercise. 5 For each category. select Save As. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. you could use Shared Parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. 8 In the dialog box. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. name the file. select Save As. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. When scheduling. detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs. doors. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. for example. TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog box corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. project parameters. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Building program installation directory. 2 For each category. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. and so on. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. Modify export layers for DGN 4 On the File menu. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Creating an Office Template | 149 . Modify import line weights 7 On the File menu. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. see Scheduling Shared Parameters or Scheduling Project Parameters. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. and click Save. The layer names are stored in a text file (either exportlayers. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category.

and click OK when finished. 3 Name and save the file. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 31 Navigate to the directory. 17 Under Discipline. 23 To add a shared project parameter. 6 Create as many groups as needed. For information on creating multi-category tags. 5 Enter the group name. click Project Parameters. 18 Under Type. you may want to save the file to a network location. click Add. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. This allows you to name the external parameter file. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise.Set up shared parameters 1 On the File menu. click Shared Parameters. 22 Add project parameters as needed. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. 20 Select the element categories this parameter applies to. 30 On the File menu. For each parameter group. 26 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 21 Click OK. 27 Click OK. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 2 Click Create. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. and click Open. 9 Name the Parameter. Set up project parameters 13 On the Settings menu. you can begin creating parameter groups. select a parameter value type. 16 Under Name. 25 Click OK. click New. After the file is named. select the tag. select a parameter discipline type. you can load them into the template. enter a parameter name. and choose a shared parameter. under Groups. click New. and click OK. and assign which categories this parameter applies to. 10 Click OK. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 14 Click Add. 150 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and select Shared Parameter. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. If a file already exists. and specify the Type. or use the Help documentation for assistance. The tag is now part of the template. you can create a list of parameters. 7 Under Parameter group. 8 Under Parameters. add required parameters. 19 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. select a group that you want to add parameters to. 11 For each parameter group. select Project parameter. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 24 Click Select. click Load from Library  ➤ Load Family.

34 Under Name. save the file as a template. you create named print settings. 2 Under Name. 15 Name the template. make minor modifications if necessary. and create additional settings as needed. 11 Click OK when finished.Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. Depending on your office environment. you need only select a setting. If you need to share this file with others. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office.rte). you should save it to a network path. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 3 Under Settings. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Save. Creating an Office Template | 151 . enter a name for the schedule. Create named print settings 1 On the File menu. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. For each printer. select Template Files (*. 6 Modify the printer settings. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. and click OK. 5 In the New dialog box. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. By going first to the Print command. The only remaining task is to save it. By creating named settings within the template. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. click Print. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. Your template is complete. paper placement. 9 In the Print dialog box. click Save. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. and make it your default template file. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. click New. you can select the printer for each set of named settings within the Print Setup dialog box. click Setup. 36 When you have completed the schedule. select a different printer. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 14 Under Save as type. and the percent of actual size. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. click OK. 4 Click Save As. Save the template 12 On the File menu. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. click Setup. and print. and create new settings for this printer. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. Creating Named Print Settings.

Use the template 16 To use the template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 17 Select Browse. You can also set this template as your default template. you could delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. click Browse. select it. you ensure that office standards are maintained. If you have a project. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 23 Navigate to the template location. This can provide a good starting point for a template. click Options. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. and click New  ➤ Project. 24 Click OK. loaded components. Set the template as your default template file 20 On the Settings menu. go to the File menu. and click Open. In addition. In this lesson. In addition. you modified settings. 19 Click OK. By investing the time to individualize your template. 21 Click the File Locations tab. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. and saved them to a template. 152 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 Select the template. 22 Next to Default template file. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. and click Open.

You also learn how to change the surface pattern of a ceiling grid. you learn how to create automatic ceilings in Revit Building.Ceilings 4 In this tutorial. see the online Help. You learn how to add ceilings by selecting room boundaries to automatically place the type of ceiling that you select. For more information. You can also create ceilings by sketching them. 153 . and how to create a compound ceiling.

Create automatic ceilings 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to create ceilings with the AutoCeiling command. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 1200mm grid. select it. when the room boundary highlights. you can change the surface pattern of the ceiling grids. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 154 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . 4 Move your cursor into the upper center room and. The ceiling is displayed. 3 In the Type Selector. After you add ceilings to the model. click the Training Files icon.Creating Ceilings In this lesson. You add four different types of ceilings. and double-click Level 1. and then change the surface pattern of one of the ceiling grids. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Views (all). you learn how to add ceilings to an RCP view of a simple building model. expand Ceiling Plans. click Ceiling. click Open. You can create automatic ceilings in an RCP (reflected ceiling plan) view of the building model. Creating Automatic Ceilings In this exercise. Open c_Ceiling. You also learn how to create and add a compound ceiling to the building model.rvt located in the Common folder.

click .5 Select the lower center room and. under Name. select Finishes . 7 Select the room on the left and the room on the right. When selected. and then click . under Materials and Finishes. 10 On the Options Bar. NOTE You select one of the grids or the entire ceiling using the TAB key. click Duplicate. Change the ceiling grid surface pattern of room on the left 8 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box.Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. Creating Ceilings | 155 . 15 In the Materials dialog box. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. select it. click OK. it displays in the Type Selector. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 600mm grid. 13 In the Name dialog box. when the room boundary highlights.Interior . 9 Select the 600 x 600mm ceiling grid located in the room on the left. click Modify. click OK. The new ceiling material is applied to the ceiling. and click OK. 6 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. click in the Material type parameter Value field. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm.

you learn how to create a compound ceiling. click Open. Creating Compound Ceilings In this exercise. The original project units are imperial. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. In the steps that follow. on the File menu. add layers of material to the ceiling type. click the Training Files icon. You create a new ceiling type. and double-click First Floor. expand Views (all). you change the project to Metric. NOTE This common dataset is used in several imperial and metric datasets. and then add the ceiling to the building model. Create a new ceiling type 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Open c_Condominium. expand Ceiling Plans. click Save As. 156 | Chapter 4 Ceilings .rvt located in the Common folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.18 If you want to save your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

click Insert twice to add two new layers. enter Gypsum board on metal furring. select Finishes . under Layers. 4 In the Format dialog box. click OK. 11 In the Name dialog box. click Ceiling. under Construction.Specify metric project units 2 On the Settings menu. Add the compound ceiling 19 Move your cursor into the common area of the model and click to insert the Gypsum board on metal furring channels ceiling. and click OK. click Edit/New. under Material. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. specify Millimeters for units. select Compound Ceiling: Ceiling 1. Creating Ceilings | 157 . 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Preview to display the current layers. 3 In the Project Units dialog box. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 12 mm 16 Click OK.Interior . select Metal . under Material. 14 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 5 In the Project Units dialog box. 7 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box.Furring.Cold Rolled Channel. click OK. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Project Units. under Thickness. enter 20 mm Layer 4: Core Boundary Layer 5: Structure [1]. click OK. click Edit for the Structure type parameter value.Gypsum Wall Board. enter 45 mm Layer 3: Structure [1]. 13 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click . and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the format button for length. select Metal . under Material. 15 Define the five layers as follows and in the following order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Layer 1: Core Boundary Layer 2: Structure [1]. click Duplicate. under Thickness. under Thickness.

click the Detail Level control. 22 The compound ceiling is visible in the section view of the first floor. 158 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 21 On the View Control Bar. and double-click Section 1. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. You can also apply thin lines from the View menu. TIP You can use the zoom commands to zoom into the ceiling. expand Sections (Type 1). 23 If you want to save your changes. and click Fine. on the File menu.View the compound ceiling in a section view 20 In the Project Browser under Views (all).

When creating a hosted opening. In the exercises that follow.Openings 5 You can cut openings through roofs. and you can create an opening in a roof specifically for a dormer. or ceiling. or ceilings using the Opening command. floor. or ceiling. In addition. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and a vertical cut. you cut floor and ceiling openings that expose the stairs beneath them. You can cut vertically through a selected floor. 159 . floors. roof. you have the option to cut perpendicularly through the face of a roof.

click the Training Files icon. This allows you to precisely define the borders of the opening. 160 | Chapter 5 Openings . View current dormer construction 1 In the current 3D View. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. To use the Opening tool to cut a dormer opening.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Open. you cut an opening in a roof with an existing dormer.Cutting Roof Openings In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. notice the existing dormer. the view range of a wireframe view was modified to display the entire dormer roof. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and vertical cut. the project must have an existing dormer. and you should create a view where you can see the dormer geometry. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. In this case. Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof In this exercise.

Create the dormer opening 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. Cutting Roof Openings | 161 . expand Floor Plans. 3 In the Project Browser. and double-click Attic View. The dormer windows are above the roof so they do not display.Dormer. You need to cut an opening in the roof to accommodate the dormer. and. The camera is located in the attic and is pointing to the dormer interior. under Views (all). click Opening. Select the main roof to be cut. click to select it. when the edges of the roof highlight. right-click the Design Bar. and click OK. The view range was modified so the cut plane captured the entire dormer. and click Modelling. 6 Move the cursor over the main roof. Notice no opening exists in the roof for the dormer. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. This view has been set up specifically for the dormer.2 In the Project Browser. This is an interior 3D view. select Pick a roof to be cut by a dormer opening. The display is wireframe so each dormer component can be seen and selected when defining the borders of the opening. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. and double-click Roof . WARNING Do not select the dormer roof. expand Views (all).

Next. a side face of a wall. or a model line on the face of the roof to be cut. and. a bottom face of a floor. 7 Place the cursor over the dormer. 8 Zoom in around the dormer. select it. you define the boundary of the dormer opening. an edge of the roof to be cut. when it highlights. and select the exterior face of the three walls that define the dormer. Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its bottom face. 162 | Chapter 5 Openings . Sketch lines display along the border between the dormer roof and the selected roof.

and the horizontal line on the bottom dormer wall does not extend to the corners. 12 On the Design Bar. Cutting Roof Openings | 163 .Notice the sketch lines overlap in places. click Finish Boundary. and notice the drag controls on each end. 9 On the Design Bar. The dormer opening in the roof is apparent. the gaps in the bottom sketch line need to be closed. Although the overlapping lines are not a problem. double-click Attic View. 14 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under 3D Views. 13 Zoom out to see the entire plan view. 10 Select the lower sketch line. 11 Drag each control to the corner until it intersects with the vertical sketch line on that side.

rvt located in the Metric folder. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. 2 Using the spin function. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Close. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening In this exercise. select Save As from the File menu. 164 | Chapter 5 Openings . NOTE If you want to save this file. Create a perpendicular opening 1 On the View toolbar. you create a roof opening that is perpendicular to the roof face. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. click . click the Training Files icon.15 On the File menu.

In the following illustration. and click OK. click Opening. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. select it. 8 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof. floor. and. the opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. select Pick a face of a roof. which is the side of the roof without a dormer. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the main roof. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar.3 On the Design Bar. or ceiling and cut perpendicular to face. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. and click Modelling. when it highlights. Cutting Roof Openings | 165 . click . The opening on the right is cut vertically. click Modify.

166 | Chapter 5 Openings . select it. click Finish Sketch. and. 10 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening.9 On the Design Bar. when it highlights.

The opening is an element independent of the roof. click Open. click the Training Files icon. NOTE If you want to save this file. notice the tool displays. select Save As from the File menu. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. Creating a Vertical Roof Opening In this exercise.rvt located in the Metric folder. . You can move it. and constrain it like any other element. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. change the shape. click . Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. dimension it. 11 On the Options Bar. click 12 On the File menu. you create a roof opening that is cut vertically through the roof. Create a vertically cut opening 1 On the View toolbar. Cutting Roof Openings | 167 . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Close. 2 Using the spin function. and click Finish Sketch. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch.

6 Click OK. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. 7 Move the cursor over the main roof.3 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. floor. click Opening. and click Modelling. 168 | Chapter 5 Openings . TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. or ceiling and cut vertically. select Pick a roof. and. In the following illustration. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. select it. when it highlights. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular.

9 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 8 In the Project Browser. it is easier to sketch the boundary on a plan view. click Finish Sketch. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View Toolbar. and double-click Roof . when it highlights. click . 12 On the Design Bar. click .Dormer. 14 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. Cutting Roof Openings | 169 . and. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 11 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof on the side without the dormer. select it.Because the cut is vertical.

notice the tool. you created a roof opening that was cut vertically through the roof.rvt located in the Metric folder. and double-click Section 1. 15 On the Options Bar. you cut an opening on the second level of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs. dimension it. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. You can move it. click Close. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). In this exercise. Cut a floor opening 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Views (all). click Open.The opening is an element independent of the roof. click the Training Files icon. . Cutting an Opening in a Floor In this exercise. and click Finish Sketch. The exercises in this lesson must be done sequentially. click 16 On the File menu. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings In this lesson. NOTE If you want to save this file. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. you cut openings in a floor to accommodate a set of stairs that are already in place. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select Save As from the File menu. change the shape. 170 | Chapter 5 Openings . and constrain it like any other element.

make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. Before cutting the floor opening.Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. floor. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. When cutting a floor or ceiling for a stairway. right-click the Design Bar. The first click specifies the start point. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. click Opening. and the level 1 and 2 lines. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. click Ref Plane. select Pick a roof. However. In the following illustration. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. This is useful when sketching the opening in a plan view. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 171 . 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. or ceiling and cut vertically. and click Modelling. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. a section view provides an excellent vantage point to select faces or planes to cut. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face.

click Finish Sketch.6 Select the floor on Level 2. You are prompted to select a view. you may close the project with or without saving it. and the reference plane you added previously. under Views (all). 9 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Filled Arrow). select Floor Plan: Level 2. NOTE The next exercise requires this project in its current state. 172 | Chapter 5 Openings . If you intend to complete the next exercise. double-click Section 1. Notice the new floor opening. 11 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. Otherwise. 10 On the Options Bar. click . 13 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Model Graphics Style. and click Wireframe. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. the stairs. 14 In the Project Browser. 8 On the View Control bar. 12 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. do so now. and click Open View.

Notice the new ceiling opening. and click OK. Use the following illustration as a guide. 4 In the Go To View dialog box. floor. double-click Level 1 Interior View. under 3D Views. you cut a ceiling opening for the stairwell. 8 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. Cut a ceiling opening. under Sections (Filled Arrow). Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 173 . select Reflected Ceiling Plan: Level 1. 6 Sketch a rectangle that borders the reference plane. or ceiling and cut vertically. and the right and lower border of the stairs and floor you added in the previous exercise. click Finish Sketch. Dataset Continue using the dataset you were using in the previous exercise.Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling In this exercise. select Pick a roof. double-click Section 1. click . and click Modelling. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the interior face of the wall. and click Open View. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 5 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). right-click the Design Bar. 3 Select the ceiling below level 2. 9 In the Project Browser. click Opening. under Views (all).

When using the shaft tool to cut an opening. select Save As from the File menu. click Close. and double-click Section 1. you cut an opening through several levels of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs and to account for the possibility of extending the stairs up another level. NOTE If you want to save this file. click Open. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. The first click specifies the start point. However. however. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). Add a reference plane 1 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. and the level 1 and 2 lines. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process.rvt located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. Before cutting the opening.10 On the File menu. you must sketch in a plan view. Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. click the Training Files icon. 174 | Chapter 5 Openings . make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Views (all). Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool In this exercise. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

and the reference plane you added previously. click Opening.4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Modelling. click Properties. and click OK. double-click Section 1. click Model Graphics Style. 14 Click OK. the stairs. 10 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. If you selected level 2 for the base constraint. under Sections (Filled Arrow). 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. specify the following parameters: ■ Select Level 1 for Base Constraint. 16 In the Project Browser. and click Wireframe. right-click the Design Bar. 11 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. This accounts for the possibility of extending the existing stairs up another level. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. the ceiling of level 1 would remain intact. under Constraints. under Views (all). ■ ■ Select Up to level: Roof for Top Constraint. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 12 On the Design Bar. Entering a value for base offset ensures that the shaft opening does not cut through the floor at level 1. 15 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 175 . 7 On the View Control bar. 6 In the Go To View dialog box. Enter 3400 for Base Offset. but does cut the ceiling of level 1. click Lines. select Floor Plan: Level 2. click . and click Open View. select Create shaft opening.

and roof that interferes with the defined volume of the opening. ceiling. Using the shaft tool. you can cut a single opening through every floor. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.Notice the shaft opening that cuts through several levels. 176 | Chapter 5 Openings .

you learn how to create a railing and customize it using design information for rails. posts. 177 . balusters.Railings 6 In this tutorial. and panels.

Before you lay out the railing. you create a railing and add components to it. 4 In the Open dialog box.rfa. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. you need to load railing components from the library provided in the drawing template. and click Open.rfa.Custom4. Make certain that you draw the line from bottom to top because these starting and ending points are used to justify the railing later. navigate to Metric Library/Balusters. such as panels. 7 On the Options Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog box. M_Baluster Panel 1. 6 On the Design Bar.rte is selected as the Template file from the Metric Templates folder.rfa. click New ➤ Project. and M_Post . select Chain. The railing layout in this exercise is based on these custom components. click Railing. 8 Draw a 4300 mm vertical line from bottom to top as shown.Creating Railings In this lesson. Sketch a plan view of two railing lines 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to create and place a railing using design information such as the shape and finish material of the rails. Creating the Railing Layout In this exercise. You also learn how to use a pattern editor to place balusters and posts and how to customize the railing with additional components.rfa. between the balusters. Project is selected under Create new.rfa . click Lines. M_Post . Open five component families 1 On the File menu. verify that DefaultMetric.Square w Ball. 3 On the File menu.Custom3. select M_Baluster . M_Baluster . and click OK. 178 | Chapter 6 Railings . press the CTRL key.Newel.

and click OK. and click OK. click Insert. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. In row 2. enter Top for Name.Paint Finish . click Duplicate. In row 2. 16 In row 1. In row 2.9 Draw a second 4300 mm line at an angle of 37 degrees as shown. select Metal . Specify the railing parameters 10 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. .Dark Gray. in row 2. click in the Material field. click in the Material field. 18 In the Edit Rails dialog box. enter Railing with Glass Panel for Name. click Edit for Rail Structure. click Railing Properties.Paint Finish . and click OK. 15 In the Edit Rails dialog box. 19 In the Materials dialog box. enter Bottom for Name. Matte for Name. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box.Dark Gray. enter -25 mm for Offset. Creating Railings | 179 . TIP You may need to zoom in until the angular dimension increments by a single degree. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Metal . Matte for Name. 13 In the Name dialog box. In row 2. and then click . enter 300 mm for Height. and then click 17 In the Materials dialog box. select M_Rectangular Handrail : 50 x 50 mm for Profile. and then do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In row 1.

Enter 380 mm for Dist.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. 31 On the Design Bar. Adjusting Railing Parameters. enter 230 mm for Dist. from previous.Square w Ball : 60mm for Baluster Family and enter 50 mm for Top offset. 23 In row 2. 29 In row 3. you change the pattern of balusters and posts with the pattern editor to show different design options for the railing. and then click Duplicate. under Posts.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space.Glass for Baluster Family. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select M_Baluster . click . click OK. click Shading with Edges. 180 | Chapter 6 Railings . 25 In row 4. Adjusting Railing Parameters In this exercise. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. select M_Post. 30 Click OK three times. Lay out the main baluster pattern 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 33 On the View menu. in row 1. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 In row 2.20 In the Edit Rails dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Glass Panel for Name. select M_Post. A new row is displayed. from previous. Enter 380 mm for Dist. select M_Post . Select M_Baluster Panel 1: 600mm . 32 On the Toolbar. 34 On the File menu. IMPORTANT Completing this tutorial is required to successfully complete some exercises in the tutorial on Stairs.Custom 3 : 25mm for Baluster Family. click Finish Sketch. Lay out the post pattern 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 24 In row 3.rvt. Select Bottom for Base. Select Bottom for Base. under Construction. under Main pattern. from previous. click on row 2. 26 Select Beginning for Justify.

View the end justification option 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. expand Elevations. click Edit/New. under Construction. click Modify and select the railing. click . 13 Click OK three times. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 18 Click OK three times. View the beginning justification option 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Construction. 8 Click OK three times. View the center justification option 9 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. Creating Railings | 181 . and double-click East. expand Views (all). click . The railing layout reflects the assigned center justification option. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the railing. click Edit for Baluster Placement. select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. under Main pattern. click Edit/New. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. View the spread pattern to fit option 14 On the Options Bar. Training_Railing. under Main pattern. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. select Center for Justify. select End for Justify. click Edit for Baluster Placement. under Construction. The railing layout reflects the beginning justification option that you assigned in the previous exercise.rvt. The railing layout reflects the assigned end justification option. under Main pattern. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click . click Edit/New.

enter 54 degrees for Angle. under Main pattern. click Edit/New. under Construction. View the custom baluster with specified spacing excess length fill option 24 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 28 Click OK three times. under Construction. under Construction. and select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . under Main pattern. click . and spacing options. View the truncate pattern excess length fill option 19 On the Options Bar. select Angles Greater Than for Corner Posts At. click . Observe that the balusters that occur in the excess length fill area extend below the bottom rail. 32 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box.The railing layout reflects the assigned spread pattern to fit justification option. 33 Under Posts. and enter 150 mm for Spacing. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification and truncated excess length fill options. 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Main pattern. select Beginning for Justify. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification. 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Edit/New. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 182 | Chapter 6 Railings . custom baluster excess length fill. 34 Click OK three times. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 35 On the Toolbar. click Edit/New. click Edit for Baluster Placement. select M_Baluster . 26 In the Type Properties dialog box. 23 Click OK three times. click . You cannot assign base top and bottom offset parameters to excess length fill balusters. View post options 29 On the Options Bar.Custom3 : 25mm for Excess Length Fill. select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill.

Select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. select Each Segment End for Corner Posts At. 44 On the File menu. Creating Railings | 183 . Specify the final railing layout 36 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. In row 4. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. from previous. click . click Modify and select the railing. The railing layout reflects the assigned distance and justification options. under Elevations. under Construction. a corner post does not occur. enter 0 mm for Dist. 37 On the Options Bar. from previous. under Main pattern. 43 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. 42 Click OK three times.The railing layout reflects the assigned minimum angle limit for the corner post option. enter 380 mm for Dist. click Edit for Baluster Placement. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In row 2.rvt. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. 41 Under Posts. double-click East. Since the angle is less than 54 degrees.

184 | Chapter 6 Railings .

In addition. gutters.Roofs 7 In this tutorial. and soffits to the roofs that you create. you learn how to add fascia. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Autodesk Revit Building. 185 .

6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog box. You create roofs from footprints and by extrusion: the two roof creation methods in Revit Building. and click OK. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. gable. 186 | Chapter 7 Roofs . click the Training Files icon. expand Floor Plans. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. 5 In the Go To View dialog box. Before you can sketch the roof profile. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. 4 Click OK. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. you learn to create several different types of roofs. Open m_Roofs. click Open. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). shed. select Name. and mansard roofs. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Roofs In this lesson.rvt located in the Metric folder. including hip. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You do not need to create the work plane.

you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. Creating Roofs | 187 . click Ref Plane. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline.

14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. select Chain. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 188 | Chapter 7 Roofs . sketch the roof profile. click Lines.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.

19 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. 18 Select the edge of the roof. Creating Roofs | 189 . 17 On the Tools toolbar. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. and double-click Section 1. 21 In the Project Browser. and then select the exterior face of the wall. Next. and select the second wall. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. press TAB. expand Views (all). press CTRL. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. click . Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. click to display the model. expand Sections (Type 1). click . Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately.16 On the View toolbar. The roof should resemble the following illustration.

click Attach for Top/Base.24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 26 On the View toolbar. 190 | Chapter 7 Roofs .

and on the Options Bar. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. clear Defines slope. 12 On the Design Bar. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. verify that Defines slope is selected. sketch the roof footprint. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. 10 Press CTRL. 5 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. 13 When you see the informational dialog box. Next. click Modify. 6 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 In the Go To View dialog box. click . 7 On the Options Bar. and click Open View. m_Roofs. and enter 600 for Overhang. select both slope definition lines. verify that Floor Plan: Garage Roof is selected. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating Roofs | 191 . 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click Finish Roof. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 8 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. and click OK. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. 3 Next. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 4 On the Options Bar. By default. under Dimensions.

click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. press TAB. 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney.rvt. clear Defines slope. 192 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.14 On the View toolbar. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. expand Floor Plans. and enter 600 for Overhang. When you complete the roof. m_Roofs. and double-click Level 3. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step.

add new slope lines to the roof. select Defines Slope. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click . Next. Creating Roofs | 193 . 17 When you see the informational dialog box. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. sketch the chimney opening. click Modify. Next. 9 Using automatic snaps. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 15 On the Options bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 10 On the View menu. click Finish Roof. select Defines Slope. 13 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line.6 Click to select all the walls.

1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Pick Walls. click to view the new roof in the model. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Floor Plans.18 On the View toolbar. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 194 | Chapter 7 Roofs . m_Roofs. and double-click Level 2. select Defines slope.rvt. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.

Creating Roofs | 195 . The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. using the following illustration for guidance. clear Defines Slope. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. click . Next. 11 To trim the first line segment.Next. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. and click . select the left vertical slope definition line. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 9 On the Tools toolbar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. click Lines. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. close the roof sketch.

Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. click 17 Click to display the model. click Roof Properties. and click OK. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar.Next. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. click Finish Roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. join the two remaining walls to the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 18 On the Design Bar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 196 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 14 Under Constraints. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. click Modify. Next. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 16 On the View toolbar. to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house.

expand Floor Plans. m_Roofs. click . you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. and enter 300 for Overhang. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.rvt. expand Views (all). 4 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.23 On the Tools toolbar. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. and double-click Level 2. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Roofs | 197 . click Pick Walls. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Next. select the left vertical roof line. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 6 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click Roof Properties. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 16 Under Constraints. and press ENTER.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. select Defines slope. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 198 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 10 To trim the first line segment. 19 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. click . 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. enter 0 for Overhang. and click OK. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. you add a slope-defining line. press TAB. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click Modify.

you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. Before you can add slope arrows. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. and enter 600 for Offset. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. you add slope arrows to the shed roof.rvt. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof. click . 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 1 In the Project Browser. you need to add two reference planes. click Ref Plane. expand Views (all). and double-click 3D. m_Roofs. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2.20 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. 7 On the Options Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. expand Floor Plans. expand 3D Views. click to activate the roof footprint sketch. Creating Roofs | 199 . 3 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. To help locate the position of each split. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 9 On the Tools menu. expand Views (all).

21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope. select both slope arrows.Next. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. add two new slope arrows. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 11 On the Design Bar. enter 500 for Rise/1000. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 20 Under Dimensions. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 On the Options Bar. verify is selected. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. select Slope for Specify. and click 19 Under Constraints.15 to add the second slope arrow. Next. click Modify. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. and move the cursor to rotate the arrow. click Slope Arrow. 200 | Chapter 7 Roofs . The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. Aligning Roof Eaves. and then click OK. click Modify. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . . click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 18 Press CTRL. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. When you sketch a hip roof. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). on the Options Bar. The eave lines display with a dimension. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. the adjacent eave heights must align. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. click . 13 On the View toolbar.rvt. When eave heights differ. Next. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Defines Slope.Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. select a method to align the eaves. and click OK. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. under Dimensions. 5 On the Options Bar. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. expand Views (all). Creating Roofs | 201 . click . 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. expand Floor Plans. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. m_Roofs. 12 On the Design Bar. and double-click Garage Roof. click Align Eaves. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. When aligning eaves. click to display the model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Finish Roof.

click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Save As. click Modify. expand Views (all). you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. under Constraints. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. click . and double-click North. on the File menu. expand Elevations. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. on the Options Bar. 3 Select the roof and. Open m_Mansard_Roof.14 If you want to save your changes. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 202 | Chapter 7 Roofs .rvt located in the Metric folder. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. Creating a Mansard Roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. click . Creating Roofs | 203 . click Modify. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click Finish Roof. press TAB.6 On the View toolbar. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the remaining three lines. 7 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 10 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 3. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. and then select Defines slope. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. under Dimensions. 14 On the Options Bar. Next. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click Lines. click . click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. click to display the model. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar.

click Open. 5 On the Options Bar. After you create a roof. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 2 In the Open dialog box. open the Metric Library folder. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. Open c_Condominium. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 204 | Chapter 7 Roofs . you can easily create its fascia. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. under Construction. 8 In the Name dialog box.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click the Training Files icon. enter Built-up Fascia. open the Profiles folder. and click OK twice.rvt located in the Common folder.rfa. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Gutters. and click Open. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. gutters. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open the Roofs folder.18 If you want to save your changes. click Duplicate. on the File menu. click . 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. and Soffits In this lesson. you learn how to create roof fascia. and soffits in Revit Building. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 1 On the File menu. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating Fascia. 3 Press CTRL. click Save As. and soffits. gutters.

you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Creating Fascia. Gutters. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. and Soffits | 205 . Creating Gutters.

9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 206 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Construction. click in the Value field for Material. and click OK.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 8 In the Materials dialog box. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. click . and click OK three times. 10 Click to place the gutter. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 3 In the Properties dialog box. 2 On the Options Bar. c_Condominium. Creating Soffits In this exercise. click Edit/New.rvt. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. click Duplicate. Creating Soffits. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. you learn how to place a roof soffit. and then click . 6 In the Type Properties dialog box.

6 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. expand 3D Views. expand Views. and Soffits | 207 . c_Condominium. click Pick Roofs. Creating Fascia. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). and double-click 3D.rvt. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. click Finish Sketch. 4 Select the roof. 3 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Gutters.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. 8 Select the roof. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. 9 If you want to save your changes. and then select the soffit to join them.7 On the Tools menu. click Join Geometry. click Save As. 208 | Chapter 7 Roofs .

You learn to create special feature stairs. you learn how to create and modify straight. u-shaped. 209 . and semi-circular runs of stairs.Stairs 8 In this tutorial. add railings to your landings. and work with a stair calculator.

add. The outline of the level 2 floors and wall display as an underlay. 4 Click OK. use the Stair Calculator to add a straight run of stairs to your drawing. click Stairs. Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run In this exercise. The level where the stairs originate displays as your current working level. click the Training Files icon. 2 On the View menu. you create and align a straight run of stairs to provide access from the first level to the second level of the building model. expand Floor Plans. click View Properties. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. expand Views (all). you learn how to create runs of typical and special feature stairs with the stairs aligned correctly between the levels in your project. select Level 2 for Underlay. 7 Using the following illustration as a guide. Open the m_Stair_Exercise. specify the start point for the stair run.rvt file located in the Metric folder. and double-click Level 1. and then modify. 210 | Chapter 8 Stairs . Draw a straight stair run 5 Zoom in on the entry way. You learn to work with different stair components. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. railings from another project. under Graphics.Creating Stairs In this lesson. risers and stringers. such as treads. The level where the stairs end displays as a screened background after you select it as an underlay. View the first level lobby and second level underlay 1 In the Project Browser. If you add stairs to a drawing in plan view. you can display both of the levels that you are working with.

click Finish Sketch. 9 On the Design Bar.8 Specify the stair run endpoint as shown. Creating Stairs | 211 .

212 | Chapter 8 Stairs .Align the top edge of the stair run with the front edge of the second level 10 Zoom in on the top of the stair run. The top edge of the stair run is now aligned with the front edge of the second level. 13 Select the top edge of the stair run as the entity to align as shown. click . 12 Select the front edge of the second level as the alignment line as shown. 11 On the Toolbar.

Align the stair run centerline with the wall centerline
14 Select the wall centerline as the alignment line as shown. TIP On the Options Bar, click Wall centerlines on the Prefer menu.

15 Select the stair run centerline as the entity to align as shown.

The stair run centerline is now aligned with the wall centerline.

16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view.

Creating Stairs | 213

Specify new main lobby stair parameters
17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections, and double-click Stair Section. 18 On the View menu, click Thin Lines.

TIP Hold the cursor over the stairs to see the risers and treads. 19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 20 On the Options Bar, click .

21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 22 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 23 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Main Stairs for Name, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 8 Stairs

24 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Treads, enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. Under Treads, select Stair Nosing - Radius : 20 mm for Nosing Profile. Under Treads, enter 50 mm for Tread Thickness. Under Risers, clear End with Riser. Under Risers, select Straight for Riser Type. Under Risers, enter 20 mm for Riser Thickness. Under Risers, select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. Under Stringers, select Match Level for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, enter 305 mm for Stringer Height. Under Stringers, enter 65 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Stringers, enter 180 mm for Landing Carriage Height. .

25 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value box for Tread Material, and click

26 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 27 Click in the Value box for Riser Material, and click .

28 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 29 Click in the Value box for Stringer Material, and click .

30 In the Materials dialog box, select Wood - Cherry for Name, and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. Because you specified ending the stair run with a tread instead of a riser, a warning dialog box displays, telling you that the actual number of risers is different from the desired number of risers. 32 Click OK to ignore this warning message. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width. 34 Click OK.

The stair section reflects the new assigned parameters. 35 On the File menu, click Save As, and save this exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 36 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run.

Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run
In this exercise, you use design information about a railing from another project and create special feature stairs with concave stringers from the straight run of stairs you completed in the previous exercise.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Changing the railing type
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view. 2 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select both railings. 3 In the Type Selector, select Railing : Railing with Glass Panel.

Creating Stairs | 215

NOTE If the panels do not display in the railings, go to the Type Properties of the railing. Click Edit next to the Baluster Placement parameter. If selected, clear the check box for the User Baluster Per Tread on Stairs option. Notice that the railing start post is offset above the level of the floor.

Adjust the railing start post offset
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select one of the railings. 5 On the Options Bar, click .

6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 8 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 1, enter -200 mm for Base offset. 9 Click OK three times. 10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

The railing start post is now at floor level.

Change the stair shape in plan view
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 12 Zoom in on the stair run. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 15 Press and hold CTRL, select the left and right stair run boundary lines, and delete them.

216 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Draw the left boundary arc
16 On the Design Bar, click Boundary. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 Specify the intersection of the bottom riser and inside wall face as the arc start point as shown.

19 Specify the left end of the top riser as the arc endpoint.

Creating Stairs | 217

20 Specify a point to the left of the stair run for the arc midpoint approximately as shown.

Mirror the left boundary arc
21 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left boundary arc. 22 On the Toolbar, click .

23 Select the stair run centerline as the mirror axis.

Draw the new first riser
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the first riser and delete it.

218 | Chapter 8 Stairs

25 On the Design Bar, click Riser. 26 On the Options Bar, click .

27 Specify the lower end of the left boundary arc as the arc start point as shown.

28 Specify the lower end of the right boundary arc as the arc endpoint as shown.

29 Specify the intersection of the front wall edge and the stair run centerline as the arc midpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 219

30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

31 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click lobby stair view.

The stair run from the first floor main lobby is now complete. 32 On the File menu, click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs.

220 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs
In this exercise, you create and align runs of side stairs with railings.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Specify the lobby side stair run parameters
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

2 On the View menu, click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select Level 3 for Underlay, and click OK.

4 Zoom in on the upper left of the lobby area. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs, and then click Stairs Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Lobby Main Stairs for Type, and click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Side Stairs for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Risers, select End with Riser. Under Risers, select None for Riser Type. Under Construction, enter -300 mm for Extend Below Base. Under Stringers, select Do not trim for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, select None for Right Stringer. Under Stringers, select None for Left Stringer. Under Stringers, select 1 for Middle Stringers. Under Stringers, enter 100 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Treads, select Front, Left and Right for Apply Nosing Profile.

10 Click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width, and click OK.

Creating Stairs | 221

Place the lobby side stair run
12 Specify a point near the left edge of the landing for the stair run start point, and then specify a point to the left for the stair endpoint. NOTE The exact location of the stair run is not critical. You specify its final location in subsequent steps. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Move the stair run into the corner of the level 2 opening
14 Zoom in on the upper left side of the stair run. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, hold down CTRL, and select the stair run and both railings. 16 On the Toolbar, click .

17 Specify the upper left endpoint of the railing as the move start point as shown.

18 Specify the upper left corner of the level 2 opening as the move endpoint as shown.

The top of the stair run is now positioned in the corner of the level 2 opening.

222 | Chapter 8 Stairs

19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Specify a new side stair run railing type
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 21 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe. Notice that both railings are on the outside of the treads. This is because the original stairs that you duplicated, the main lobby stairs, have left and right stringers that hosted the railings. Because the lobby side stairs have only a center stringer, you need to flip the railings so they rest on the stair treads. 22 Select each railing, right-click, and click Flip Orientation.

Mirror the lobby side stair run
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the side stair run and both railings. 25 On the Toolbar, click .

26 Specify the main lobby stair run centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

Creating Stairs | 223

The lobby side stair run is mirrored to the right side of the lobby.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The lobby side stairs and railings are now complete. 28 On the File menu, click Save. 29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings.

Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings
In this exercise, you create and modify railings for a landing and then extend the railings from the side stairs in the previous exercise to the railing on the landing.

224 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Sketch the left side level 2 landing railing path
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom in on the level 2 landing. 3 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left main stair railing. 4 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 7 Click to specify the sketch line start point approximately as shown.

8 Move the cursor down and specify the next sketch point as shown.

9 Move the cursor to the right and specify the sketch endpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 225

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left railing sketch line of the main stairs. 11 Select the endpoint of the sketch line for the railing as shown.

12 Drag the arc sketch line endpoint up to the right end of the new horizontal sketch line as shown.

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click Level 2 Landing.

226 | Chapter 8 Stairs

15 Zoom in and on the View toolbar, click

to reorient the view to look as shown.

Create the right side level 2 landing railing
16 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 17 Select the right lobby main stair railing and delete it. 18 Select the left lobby main stair railing. 19 On the Toolbar, click .

20 Specify the lobby main stair centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

The new lobby main stair and level 2 landing railing layout is mirrored to the right side of the stair run.

21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Level 2 Landing.

Creating Stairs | 227

Extend the lobby side stair railing onto the landing
22 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 23 Zoom in on the left side of the level 2 landing. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper lobby side stair railing.

25 On Options Bar, click Edit. 26 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 27 Click to specify the right endpoint of the railing sketch line for the line start point as shown.

28 Move the cursor 440 mm to the right and specify the sketch line endpoint as shown.

228 | Chapter 8 Stairs

29 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} and zoom in on the railing extension.

The railing now extends onto the landing.

Modify the railing extension parameters
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

33 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select No Connector for Tangent Joins. 35 Click OK twice.

Creating Stairs | 229

36 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 37 On the Options Bar, click .

38 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Add Vertical/Horizontal Segments for Tangent Joins, and click Edit for Baluster Placement. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 2, select None for Baluster Family. 41 Click OK three times.

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 43 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 44 Select the 440 mm railing extension sketch line segment. 45 On the Options Bar, select Custom for Height Correction and enter 170 mm. 46 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

230 | Chapter 8 Stairs

47 On the File menu, click Save. 48 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run.

Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run
In this exercise, you create a u-shaped run of stairs in plan view, and then add a railing and extend the stairs to another level in a three-dimensional (3D) view. When you are adding stairs that turn corners in plan view, it is easier to align the stairs if you mark the edge of the landing with a reference plane first.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset from the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Draw a reference plane
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on the stairwell on the left side of the building.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options Bar, click and enter 528 mm for Offset.

5 Move your cursor over the left edge of the exterior wall and place a vertical reference plane to the left of the exterior wall face as shown.

Creating Stairs | 231

Specify the exit stairs parameters 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Paint Finish. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then click Stairs Properties. enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. 10 In the Name dialog box. select for Stringer Material Value. select Metal . 8 Under Dimensions. select Metal .The new reference plane. select for Tread Material Value. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 915 mm for Width. click Duplicate. click Stairs. and click OK. Dark Gray Matte for Name. 20 Move the cursor up 2040 mm and specify the stair run next point as shown. and click OK. and then click Edit/New. 18 Click OK three times. 232 | Chapter 8 Stairs .5 mm as indicated by the temporary dimension. 17 In the Materials dialog box.Paint Finish. select Finishes . Draw the exit stairs 19 Click to specify the midpoint of the landing edge as the stair run start point as shown. 14 Under Materials and Finishes.Exterior: Precast Concrete Panels for Name. measured from the exterior wall centerline. under Treads. select for Riser Material Value. 16 Under Materials and Finishes. is at 864. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. enter Exit Stairs for Name. Dark Gray Matte for Name. 13 In the Materials dialog box. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 In the Materials dialog box.

21 Move the cursor to the right and specify the intersection of the next-to-last riser line and the reference plane as the stair run next point as shown. 22 Drag the cursor down and specify the intersection of the landing edge and the reference plane as the stair run endpoint as shown. The exit stair run layout is complete. Creating Stairs | 233 .

25 Zoom in on the exit stairwell. and the exit door. 26 Hold CTRL and select two of the exterior walls of the exit stairwell.23 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). View the exit stairs 24 In the Project Browser. and double-click Exit Stairs. 234 | Chapter 8 Stairs . expand 3D Views. click Finish Sketch.

click Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Object. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. 31 On the Options Bar. Creating Stairs | 235 . click . click Modify.27 On the View Control Bar.Round1 : 25mm for Baluster Family. under Construction. 30 In the Type Selector. under Posts. 35 Click OK three times. click Edit/New. and the exit stairs are visible. The selected objects are hidden. in row 2. select M_Baluster . select Railing : 900mm Pipe. hold down CTRL. Specify a new railing type 28 Zoom in on the stair run. 34 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 29 On the Design Bar. click Edit for Baluster Placement. and select both railings. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box.

38 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . you create a semi-circular run of stairs and then modify the winders and the railing. 236 | Chapter 8 Stairs . click Modify. 37 On the Options Bar. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. under Constraints. and select the exit stairs. click Save. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run In this exercise. Turn on the display of the exit stairwell exterior walls and exit door 39 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run.Add another exit stairs flight 36 On the Design Bar. 40 On the File menu. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level.

select 9 In the Materials dialog box. Draw the semi-circular stair run 14 On the Design Bar. select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. 2 Zoom in on the exterior concrete pad above the north exterior wall of the building. 6 In the name dialog box. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 1 mm for Tread Thickness. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. Under Stringers. enter 0 mm for Nosing Length. click . and click OK.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. and click OK. select Concrete .rvt. enter 0 mm for Landing Overlap. TIP You can use the shortcut key SM to snap only to midpoints. 8 Under Materials and Finishes. expand Views (all). 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Stairs. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Concrete . Under Risers. Under Construction. Under Stringers. select Monolithic Stairs. and click OK. enter 200 mm for Maximum Riser Height. Creating Stairs | 237 . 11 In the Materials dialog box. Specify the semi-circular stair run parameters 1 In the Project Browser. enter 5 mm for Riser Thickness. enter 300 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. for Tread Material Value. 16 Click to specify the midpoint of the concrete slab edge as the stair run center point as shown. select for Monolithic Material Value. Under Risers. click Duplicate. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Treads. and click OK. enter 200 mm for Landing Carriage Height. Under Risers. and then click Stairs Properties. select 16 for Desired Number of Risers. and click Edit/New. click OK. click Run. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box under Dimensions. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Construction. enter Semicircular Stairs for Name. Under Treads. enter 1300 mm for Width. 15 On the Options Bar.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. Training_Stairs.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

238 | Chapter 8 Stairs . enter 1310 for Radius as shown. and click to specify the arc end point. 18 On the keyboard. The semi-circular stair run is complete. 19 Move the cursor counterclockwise until the display indicates that there are 0 risers remaining. as shown.17 Drag the cursor to the right along the slab edge. and press ENTER.

20 On the Design Bar. Creating Stairs | 239 . Modify the semi-circular stair run parameters 21 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. expand Views (all). expand 3D Views. and double-click Exterior Stairs. TIP You may need to select the outer railing and flip its orientation to align it to the pad.

The underside of winder parameter is smooth. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Stepped for Underside of Winder. 26 Click OK twice.

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with no overlap. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 28 On the Options Bar, click .

29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, enter 300 mm for Landing Overlap. 31 Click OK twice.

240 | Chapter 8 Stairs

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with a 300 mm overlap.

Specify new semi-circular stair run railing parameters
32 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 33 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe.

34 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save. 35 On the File menu, click Close.

Working with the Stair Calculator
In this exercise, you create two sets of stairs side by side within a new project. The first set of stairs uses the default settings to calculate the slope. The second set of stairs uses the stair calculator to calculate the slope of the stairs. After creating both stairs, you add dimensions to them to see how the tread depth and stair slope adjust based on the changes made in the stair calculator.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤  Project. In the New Project dialog box, under Template File, click Browse. Open the DefaultMetric.rte file located in the Metric Templates folder.

Creating Stairs | 241

Create a set of stairs using the default settings
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 2 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click OK. 4 In the center of the Level 1 Floor Plan, click to specify the stair run start point, move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete, and click to specify the end of the stair run.

5 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 6 On the View Toolbar, click .

When you created these stairs, the slope was calculated automatically. In the steps that follow, you create a set of stairs using the stair calculator to define the stair slope.

242 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Create a set of stairs using the stair calculator
7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 9 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog box, enter Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope, and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Calculation Rules. 14 In the Stair Calculator dialog box, select Use Stair Calculator for slope calculation. The Stair Calculator computes actual tread depth using the following Calculation Rule equation: X * Rise + Y * Depth = Z X is the value to multiply the actual riser height indicated by the stair properties; Y is the value to multiply the actual tread depth, and Z is the result that lies within threshold minimum and maximum values range based on either design standards or building codes. 15 Enter 680.0 mm for Z, enter 695.0 mm for Maximum Result for Stair Calculator, and enter 670.0 mm for Minimum Result for Stair Calculator. 16 Click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 19 To the right of the stairs you created previously, click to specify the stair run start point, and move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete. NOTE When specifying the stair run starting point, try to align it with the bottom of the stairs you created previously. This allows you to make a better comparison of the slope when you view the stairs together in a 3D view at the end of the exercise.

20 After all the risers have been created, click to specify the stair run end point. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Notice the stairs created using the stair calculator have a longer run than the first set of stairs you created. 22 On the View menu, click Zoom  ➤  Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around both sets of stairs. 23 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 24 On both sets of stairs, add dimensions to the bottom tread and the stair run as shown.

Creating Stairs | 243

25 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 26 Select the right stair run, Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog box, notice the Actual Tread Depth is 332.2 mm. Within this project, the project units are set to display length dimension values on screen rounded to the nearest 1 mm. Even more exact dimension values are displayed to the nearest .1 mm where appropriate in the Element Properties dialog box. In this case, the actual tread depth dimension is 332.2 mm; it becomes 332 mm when rounded to the nearest 1 mm in the drawing area. The actual tread depth is determined by using the following Calculation Rule equation derivation: Tread = (Z - X * Riser) / Y Substituting with the current values (X = 2, Y = 1, Z = 680 mm and Riser = 173.9 mm) yields: Tread = (680 - (2 * 173.9))/1 Tread = (680 - 347.8) Tread = 332.2 mm 29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 30 On the View Toolbar, click 31 On the View Toolbar, click . and spin the model as shown.

244 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Notice the difference between the slope of the two stairs. 32 On the File menu, click Close. You can close the project file without saving your changes. This completes the Working with the Stair Calculator exercise. This also completes the Stairs lesson.

Creating Stairs | 245

246 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Walls

9

247

Creating Walls
In this lesson, you learn about walls. Sketch wall segments, work with compound walls, and create new wall types. Create curtain and foundation walls, join walls to floors, and assign wall top and bottom attachments.

Sketching Walls
In this exercise, you use sketching tools to draw and modify straight and arc wall segments, and then add a floor with an opening.

Draw the first exterior wall segment
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
■ ■ ■ ■

In the New Project dialog box, under Template file, click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box, click the training files icon. Select the m_Tutorial_Default.rte file located in the Metric folder, and click Open. In the New Project dialog box, click OK.

2 Zoom in on the center of the viewing window. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 Specify the wall segment start point, and drag the cursor to the right 2900 mm.

5 Click to specify the wall segment endpoint and select the dimension. 6 Enter 3000 mm for the new horizontal dimension.

7 Press ENTER.

The wall segment length is updated with the new dimension.

Draw the second exterior wall segment
8 Specify the right endpoint of the first wall segment as the second wall segment start point.

9 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the wall segment endpoint.

Both vertical and horizontal dimensions display.

248 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the third and fourth exterior wall segments
10 Specify the lower end of the second wall segment as the third wall segment start point. 11 Press and hold SHIFT, drag the cursor to the right 2400 mm, and click to specify the third wall segment endpoint.

NOTE Hold down SHIFT as you drag the cursor to constrain your drawing direction orthogonally. 12 Specify the right end of the third wall segment as the fourth wall segment start point. 13 Hold down SHIFT, drag the cursor up 2100 mm, and click to specify the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Stretch the fourth exterior wall segment
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Select the fourth wall segment and select the upper drag control.

Observe that the first wall segment has an assigned lock icon that references the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint. 16 Drag the cursor up to 3600 mm.

Only the fourth wall segment is stretched. 17 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor down to 2100 mm. 18 Click the first wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Creating Walls | 249

19 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor up to 2900 mm.

Observe that the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint maintain their alignment. The second wall segment stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the first wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw the fifth and sixth exterior wall segments
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 21 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 22 Specify the upper end of the fourth wall segment as the fifth wall segment start point. 23 Drag the cursor to the right 5500 mm, and click to specify the fifth wall segment endpoint.

24 Drag the cursor down 5500 mm, and click to specify the sixth wall segment endpoint.

250 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the seventh, eighth, and ninth exterior wall segments
25 Drag the cursor to the left 7000 mm, and click to specify the seventh wall segment endpoint.

26 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the eighth wall segment endpoint.

27 Drag the cursor to the left 3900 mm, and click to specify the ninth wall segment endpoint.

Move the eighth wall segment
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the eighth wall segment. 29 Drag the cursor to the right until the centerline of the eighth wall segment aligns with the fourth wall segment centerline.

Creating Walls | 251

30 Click the eighth wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline. 31 Select the eighth wall segment, and drag the cursor to the right 2100 mm to specify the new wall segment location

Observe that the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline maintain their alignment. The third, fifth, seventh, and ninth wall segments are stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the eighth wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw an arc wall segment
32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 33 On the Options Bar, click .

34 Specify the left end of the ninth wall segment as the arc start point.

252 | Chapter 9 Walls

35 Specify the left end of the first wall segment as the arc endpoint. NOTE Do not snap the cursor to 180 degrees.

36 Move the cursor along the preview arc wall, and click to place the arc wall. 37 Select the radius value, and enter 4900 mm.

38 Press ENTER.

Creating Walls | 253

Move wall segments by modifying dimensions
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the fourth wall segment. 40 Select the 3200 mm dimension value, and enter 4000.

41 Press ENTER.

254 | Chapter 9 Walls

Both the fourth and eighth wall segments are shifted 800 mm to the right.

Draw a diagonal exterior wall segment
42 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 43 Specify the midpoint of the fifth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment start point.

44 Specify the midpoint of the sixth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment endpoint.

45 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 46 On the Toolbar, click .

47 Select the left side of the fifth wall segment as the first wall segment to trim.

48 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to. 49 Select the lower side of the sixth wall segment as the next wall segment to trim.

Creating Walls | 255

50 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to.

Draw a floor by picking walls
51 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor, and then click Pick Walls. 52 Place the cursor over one of the walls, press TAB, and click to select the entire chain of walls.

All of the wall segments are highlighted. 53 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch a rectangular floor cutout
54 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening. 55 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box, select the first option, and click OK. 56 Place the cursor over the edge of the floor until it highlights, and click.

256 | Chapter 9 Walls

57 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 Using the following illustration as a guide, specify an approximate location for the first corner of the rectangular floor opening.

60 Specify the second corner of the rectangular floor opening, creating a 1800 mm X 3000 mm floor opening.

TIP The cursor snaps to dimension values based on the zoom of the view. To get the rectangle to the exact dimensions, you may need to zoom in. 61 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 62 On the Toolbar, click .

63 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 64 On the Toolbar, click .

65 In the Dynamic View dialog box, select Spin, and then, while holding the left mouse button down, move the cursor in the viewing window to orient the view as shown.

Creating Walls | 257

This completes the Sketching Walls exercise.

Working with Compound Walls
In this exercise, you work with compound walls. Convert generic wall styles to new custom wall styles, add dimensions, edit fill patterns that display in section views, and apply surface patterns.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the m_Gallery.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Access wall properties
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 Zoom in on the upper part of the floor plan. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 4 Select the 200 mm exterior wall.

258 | Chapter 9 Walls

select Finishes . and select Finish 1 [4].Stud Layer. and select Finish 2 [5]. Add two layers to the new wall type 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. and in the Materials dialog box. and in the Materials dialog box. Click in the Material field. and click Down twice. ■ 14 In row 3. click . Enter 50 mm for Thickness. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. ■ Creating Walls | 259 .5 On the Options Bar.GRG (Glass Reinforced Gypsum). 12 Select row 3. select Finishes . click . and select Structure [1]. under Name. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. 11 Select row 2. and click Up. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 200 mm Stud Wall for Name. click Duplicate. under Name. . click . and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog box. 13 In row 1. ■ 15 In row 5. under Name. Click in the Material field.Interior . click Edit for Structure. click Insert twice. 10 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. Enter 15 mm for Thickness. Click OK. under Layers. and in the Materials dialog box. select Wood .Exterior .EIFS . click Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. click Edit/New. Click in the Material field. Enter 135 mm for Thickness.Exterior Insulation and Finish System.

and click Select All Instances. 25 On the Options Bar. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. select Basic Wall : 200 mm Stud Wall. click Dimension. 21 Select Generic . expand Families. Assign the new wall style to the remaining exterior walls 20 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 19 Zoom in on the left end of the new 200 mm Stud wall segment. 22 In the Type Selector.200mm. and expand Basic Wall. right-click. 260 | Chapter 9 Walls . The style of the selected walls is updated in the building model. Specify the view detail level 18 On the View Control Bar. 26 Select the upper horizontal wall segment centerline as the first dimension point. expand Walls. 17 Click OK three times. 24 On the Design Bar.16 Click Preview. Add a wall centerline dimension 23 Zoom in on the lower part of the floor plan.

27 Select the lower horizontal wall segment centerline as the second dimension point. The vertical wall centerline to centerline dimension displays. select Wall faces for Prefer. 28 Specify a point to the left as the dimension location point. Creating Walls | 261 . Add a wall face dimension 29 On the Options Bar. 30 Select the upper horizontal wall segment exterior face as the first dimension point.

262 | Chapter 9 Walls . The vertical wall exterior face to exterior face dimension displays. Add a wall core face dimension 33 On the Options Bar. select Faces of core for Prefer.31 Select the lower horizontal wall segment exterior face as the second dimension point. 32 Specify a point to the right as the dimension location point. 34 Select the left vertical wall segment exterior core face as the first dimension point.

The horizontal wall core face to core face dimension displays.35 Select the right vertical wall segment exterior core face as the second dimension point. Creating Walls | 263 . 36 Specify a point below as the dimension location point.

Enter 0.Interior . 50 On the View Control Bar. The new Gypsum pattern is assigned to the gypsum wall board representation in section view. 38 On the Settings menu. 264 | Chapter 9 Walls . and click Import.pat.Create a custom gypsum fill pattern 37 In the Project Browser.Glass Reinforced Gypsum. navigate to \Program Files\Autodesk Revit Building\Data. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. 48 Zoom in on the gypsum board representation in the wall section.25 for Import scale. Assign a masonry surface pattern in a 3D view 49 In the Project Browser. select Gypsum. click OK.Dense for Import. 45 In the Materials dialog box. click New. 40 In the New Pattern dialog box. and double-click Callout of Section 3. 47 In the Materials dialog box. 41 In the Import dialog box. click for Pattern. expand Sections (Callout 1). select Finishes . select Custom. and click OK. Enter Gypsum for Name. 46 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sand . click Fill Patterns. 39 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. and click Open. 42 In the New Pattern dialog box. and under Cut Pattern. click Materials. select revit.GRG . 43 Click OK twice. Assign the new gypsum fill pattern to a wall layer in section view 44 On the Settings menu.

51 On the Settings menu, click Materials. 52 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks, and under Surface Pattern, click 53 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, select Model for Pattern Type, select Block 8x16, and click OK. 54 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 55 Select the low circular wall segment. 56 On the Options Bar, click . for Pattern.

57 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Structure. 59 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, click 60 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks. 61 Click OK four times. 62 Zoom in on the low wall segment. for Material.

Align a masonry surface pattern in an elevation view
63 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click East.

64 Zoom in on the right retaining wall.

Creating Walls | 265

65 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the wall. 66 On the Toolbar, click .

67 Select the building wall edge as the alignment reference.

68 Select the CMU edge as the line to align.

The upper left corner of the CMU pattern is now aligned with the upper left corner of the retaining wall. This completes the Working with Compound Walls exercise.

Working with Vertically Compound Walls
In this exercise, you modify vertically compound walls and create and modify wall layers in sections view.

266 | Chapter 9 Walls

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Townhouse.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Access the exterior wall properties
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the right front exterior wall.

6 On the Options Bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 9 If the Preview pane is not displayed on the left side of the Edit Assembly dialog box, click Preview. 10 On the Preview pane, ensure that Section: Modify type attributes is selected for View.

The wall section displays at its default sample height of 6096 mm.

Creating Walls | 267

Assign split regions to the wall section
11 Right-click in the preview window and click Zoom In Region. 12 Zoom in on the bottom of the wall section. 13 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 14 Specify a point up 300 mm from the bottom of the wall on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the first split point.

15 Specify a point up 300 mm from the first split point on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the second split point.

Merge split regions in the wall section
16 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Merge Regions. 17 Select the upper split line as the region to merge.

268 | Chapter 9 Walls

The previously split regions are now merged.

Adjust the split line location
18 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 19 Select the split line, and click the 300 mm dimension value. 20 Enter 3680 mm.

Creating Walls | 269

21 Press ENTER. 22 Zoom out on the wall section.

The split line now occurs 3680 mm above the bottom of the wall.

Adjust the sample wall height
23 Scroll up to view the top of the wall. 24 Move your cursor over the top of the wall and press TAB until the outer boundary of the wall is highlighted (watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the interface to be sure you are highlighting the outer boundary), and then click to display the lock icon and the 6096 mm dimension value. 25 Click the 6096 mm dimension value, and enter 5500 mm.

270 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Press ENTER. The sample wall height is now 5500 mm.

Add another split line
27 Zoom in on the existing split line. 28 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 29 Specify a point up 240 mm from the existing split line on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the new split point.

The new split line now occurs 240 mm above the previous split line.

Creating Walls | 271

Add a new layer to the wall style
30 Under Layers, select row 1, and click Insert. 31 In row 1, select Finish 1 [4] for Function. 32 Select for Material.

33 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Masonry Brick - Soldier Course, and click OK. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, select row 1. 35 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Assign Layers. 36 On the Preview pane, select the 240 mm high region between the split lines as shown. Place the cursor at the bottom of the region to select it.

37 Click OK three times. 38 Zoom in on the front brick wall.

The soldier course displays in the exterior wall.

272 | Chapter 9 Walls

Specify allowance for layer extension
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the front brick wall. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 42 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 43 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, on the Preview pane, zoom in on the bottom of the wall. 44 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 45 Select the outer boundary of the wall at the masonry brick layer.

46 Click the lock icon to unlock the masonry brick layer for layer extension. 47 Click OK three times.

Modify extended layers
48 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Wall Detail. 49 Select the brick wall.

50 Using the drag control at the bottom of the brick wall, drag it down into the concrete wall approximately as shown.

Creating Walls | 273

51 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry. 52 Select the brick layer of the wall as the first layer to join.

53 Select the concrete foundation wall as the second layer to join.

The concrete foundation wall is cut away to accommodate the brick course.

54 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 55 On the Options Bar, click .

56 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter -150 mm for Base Extension Distance, and click OK.

274 | Chapter 9 Walls

Add a wall sweep
57 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 60 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Sweeps. 62 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box, click Add and do the following:
■ ■

Select Sill : Sill for Profile. In the Material field, click Concrete. Click OK. , and in the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place

■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 3860 mm for Distance. Select Base for From. Select Exterior for Side. Enter -90 mm for Offset.

63 Click OK. 64 On the Preview pane, zoom in on the applied wall sweep in the wall section.

65 Click OK three times. 66 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click 3D perspective. 67 Zoom in on the front wall, and view the sill.

Creating Walls | 275

This completes the Working with Vertically Compound Walls exercise.

Joining Walls to Floors
In this exercise, you work with joining walls and floors in section view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Floor_wall_joins.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Draw the level 2 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

6 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 7 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 8 For all four walls, select the outer edge of the wall core. Use the flip arrows to toggle the selection. TIP You can select each wall or use the TAB key to select the chain of walls.

276 | Chapter 9 Walls

9 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Wood Joist 255 mm for Type, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 12 When prompted to cut the geometry from the walls, click Yes. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 14 Zoom in on the wall at Level 2.

The level 2 floor extends into the wall structural layer.

Draw the level 1 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 18 Select all four walls on the centerline (click each wall while pressing Ctrl).

19 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box, verify that the Type is Wood Joist 255mm, and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 22 When prompted to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor, click Yes. 23 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 24 Zoom in on the wall at Level 1.

Creating Walls | 277

The foundation wall is trimmed by the level 1 floor. This completes the Joining Walls to Floors exercise.

Working with Foundation Walls
In this exercise, you create and modify concrete foundation walls and footings.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall_Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

6 On the View menu, click View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select T.O. Footing for Underlay, and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 9 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 10 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select T.O. Footing for Depth. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 305mm for Offset.

11 Specify the outside upper left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment start point, and then specify the outside lower left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment endpoint.

278 | Chapter 9 Walls

12 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five foundation wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each foundation wall segment endpoint. 13 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Create a new 610 mm concrete footing wall type
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Footing.

Creating Walls | 279

15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 16 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 20 In the Name dialog box, enter Foundation - 610mm Concrete for Name, and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 22 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, enter 610 mm for Thickness.

23 Click OK three times.

Draw the 610 mm concrete footing
24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Unconnected for Depth and enter 305 mm. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 460 mm for Offset.

25 Specify the outside upper left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment start point and then specify the outside lower left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment endpoint. If a warning about the objects not being visible in the current view is displayed, close the warning dialog.

280 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five footing wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each footing wall segment endpoint.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The concrete foundation walls and footings are now complete. This completes the Working with Foundation Walls exercise.

Working with Wall Wraps
In this exercise, you assign different wall wrap conditions to a window opening.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Creating Walls | 281

Assign window wall closure parameters
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on one of the level 1 windows.

Neither the interior nor the exterior wall components wrap around the window opening. 3 Select the window. 4 On the Options Bar, click .

5 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select By host for Wall Closure. 7 Click OK twice.

Assign an interior wall wrap parameter
8 Select the wall. 9 On the Options Bar, click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 12 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Interior for At Inserts. 13 Click OK three times.

The interior metal stud wall with gypsum board now wraps around the window opening.

Assign an exterior wall wrap parameter
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall. 15 On the Options Bar, click .

16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Exterior for At Inserts. Both would wrap gypsum and brick. Exterior wraps only the brick. 19 Click OK three times.

282 | Chapter 9 Walls

The exterior brick wall now wraps around the window opening. This completes the Working with Wall Wraps exercise.

Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments
In this exercise, you assign wall bottom attachments to a curved floor in 3D view and wall top attachments to reference planes in elevation view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Attach_Top_Bottom.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Attach wall bottoms to floor surface
1 Select all four wall segments.

2 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and select Base for Attach Wall. 3 Select the floor as the object to attach to.

The walls are projected down to attach to the floor.

Creating Walls | 283

5 Select the south wall. 6 On the Options Bar. and double-click South.Attach wall tops to reference planes 4 In the Project Browser. 284 | Chapter 9 Walls . expand Views (all). click Attach for Top/Base. 7 Select the first reference plane as the object to attach to. expand Elevations. and select Top for Attach Wall. The south wall is projected up to attach to the first reference plane.

under Elevations. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Select the second reference plane as the object to attach to. double-click North. The north wall is projected up to attach to the second reference plane. Creating Walls | 285 .8 In the Project Browser. click Attach for Top/Base. and select Top for Attach Wall. 9 Select the north wall.

12 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. This also completes the Walls lesson. 286 | Chapter 9 Walls . This completes the Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments exercise.

they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. Like walls. and mullions. To switch panel types. To change grids. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. This affects the entire curtain system. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. 287 . curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. Unlike windows. or you can use a specific curtain system command. grid lines. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. and they are not windows. you need to change the length of the wall. panel. you need to select a panel. and you can change these elements individually. For example. you select the grid. to resize the system. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. Like windows.Curtain Systems 10 Curtain systems are not walls.

rvt file located in the Metric folder. 2 Zoom in on Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. Open the m_Curtain_Walls. click Open. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a curtain system using the wall command. click Wall. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. click the Training Files icon. and double-click Ground Floor. 4 On the Type Selector. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. 288 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . expand Views (all). 5 Start the curtain system where shown.

7 Zoom in on the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. Flat Curtain System | 289 .

and room bounding. 290 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 13 Specify 1200 for Top Offset. specify Up to level: TOP OF ROOF for Top Constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. 10 Zoom in on the curtain system you just added. 9 On the View menu. click Orient ➤ Northeast. top constraint. 12 Under Constraints. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof.8 In the Project Browser. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. expand Views (all). and double-click Southeast Isometric. 11 Select the curtain system and click . and click OK. top and base attachments. expand 3D Views.

and click Rename. 20 In the drawing area. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. under Floor Plans.a. You are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. Flat Curtain System | 291 . click Elevation. 18 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation.Right now. right-click on the elevation name Elevation 1 . the curtain system is a single glazed panel. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. using curtain grids. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 22 Place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. and resize the crop boundary as shown. and click OK. double-click GROUND FLOOR.

SIXTH FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. click Modify. 26 Hold CTRL and select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 28 On the Edit menu. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. click Modify. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click to place another grid line. 25 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Edit menu. and click OK. THIRD FLOOR. click Copy to Clipboard. Click to create a vertical grid. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. FIFTH FLOOR. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. FOURTH FLOOR. and SEVENTH FLOOR. 292 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 33 On the Design Bar. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. hold CTRL and select SECOND FLOOR. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 29 In the Select Levels dialog box.23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. one larger than the other. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.

35 Select the left vertical grid line. and then select the segment above it. Flat Curtain System | 293 . Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line.Next. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. You do not use the Door command. and on the Options Bar. you add a doorway to the curtain system. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. The segment line style changes to dashed. click Add or Remove Segments. Instead. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. The two segments are removed. 38 Using the same method.

40 On the Options Bar. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 43 Delete the dimensions. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 42 Place dimensions as shown.39 On the Design Bar. Use the following picture as a guide. and lock them. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. select One Segment. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. click Curtain Grid. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 294 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. and click Open. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. They are part of the curtain panel category. The panel changes to a double door. Flat Curtain System | 295 . you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. on the new curtain system you added. click in any white space to exit the editor. 52 On the Type Selector. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. double-click Entrance Elevation. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. These panels schedule as doors. 49 On the File menu. Now. Next. 57 On the View Control Bar. Next. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 50 In the Doors folder. under Elevations. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. click . select M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 55 In the Project Browser. 56 In the Project Browser. not as curtain panels. click Modify. 54 On the Design Bar. This changes the graphics style of the view. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. under Floor Plans.TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them.rfa. and click Wireframe.

65 On the View Control Bar. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. The glazed panels display in blue. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise.59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 61 With the panel still selected. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 66 On the View Control Bar. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. Name the file m_rvt8_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. click Shading with Edges for Graphics Style. click Wireframe for Graphics Style. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. 62 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 60 On the Type Selector. and the solid panels display in white. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 296 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .rvt. click Save As. 63 Click OK twice to close the Type Properties and Element Properties dialog boxes. 68 On the File menu. click . Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. click System Panel : Solid.

6 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. there are a few that you do not want. You are going to change some mullion joins. select Grid Line Segment.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. however. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in on the set of doors. 2 On the Options Bar. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. so you remove them next. because they reduce the doors’ size by their widths. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. Flat Curtain System | 297 . 9 Delete the mullions below them. select Entire Grid Line. 4 On the Options Bar. select All Empty Segments.

13 Click the top mullion control.Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. Two mullion join controls display. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 298 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 12 Click the lower mullion join control. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.

Curved Curtain System | 299 . 4 On the Type Selector. you add a curtain system using the wall command. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Finally. under Floor Plans.TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR for Top Constraint. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Options Bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 9 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 6 Under Constraints. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. click Modify. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 10 Place the second point at the lower right side. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. double-click Ground Floor. you can also right-click and select Break at Join from the Join Conditions menu to break the mullion at both joins. click Wall. 7 Enter 1200 for Top Offset. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. double-click Southeast Isometric. 5 Click . You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 14 On the Design Bar. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. Finally. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. click . 2 Zoom in on the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 16 Save the file. 15 In the Project Browser.

eighths. 14 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. 15 In the Project Browser. and then sixteenths. click Curtain Grid. 13 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. double-click East. Divide the halves into quarters. under Elevations. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you place grids on the system. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level.11 Finish the arc by clicking at the top of the arc. Next. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 300 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 16 Zoom in on the cylinder. You are going to use one of these snaps points.

click Basic Wall: Generic . Using walls as panels 18 Using a selection box.300mm.17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Type Selector. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. click Modify. to filter out all other elements 20 Save the file. you change some panels in the system. Curved Curtain System | 301 . you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Remember to click from the selection except Curtain Walls. Next. select the bottom layer of panels.

1 On the File menu. click Model Lines. 3 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 302 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . and on the Options Bar. specify Glass for Subcategory. 8 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the extrusion.rft. 2 In the Metric templates folder. double-click Exterior. click Finish Sketch. click New ➤ Family. 10 Under Identity Data. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. . click . enter 100 for Depth. double-click Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 11 On the Design Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper lefthand reference line intersection and finish at the lower righthand reference line intersection. and click OK.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click . 6 On the Options Bar. click 12 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion.

right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu.13 On the Design Bar.Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.rfa. All the panels change to the solid panel. double-click FOURTH FLOOR.Pattern. Curved Curtain System | 303 . All fourth floor panels are selected. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 14 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. and save the family as Curtain Panel . and return to your project file. select Curtain Panel . 23 On the View toolbar. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. 18 In the Project Browser. 22 Right-click. 25 Highlight a panel in the arc. 20 On the Type Selector. . click System Panel . 15 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. Hold Shift and spin the model so that you can see the The curved curtain system’s structure now matches that of the main part of the building. click Save As. All fifth floor panels are selected. 26 On the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. click Modify.Solid. and click Flip Orientation. 17 Load the Curtain Panel . click curved curtain system. 21 Select the curved arc curtain wall.rfa family. 16 On the File menu. 24 In the Project Browser.Pattern. and then click . click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 19 Highlight a panel in the arc.

click Mullion. click New ➤ Family. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Metric Profile. and select Radius and specify 50 mm for the radius. 5 In the Metric Templates folder.rft. enter 8 for Sides. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. click . 27 Save the file. For vertical mullions. 9 On the Options Bar.The finished arc wall should look like the following picture. click Lines. 7 Specify Mullion for Profile Usage. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. under Elevations. double-click East. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 6 On the Settings menu. click Family Category and Parameters. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 8 On the Design Bar. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 On the File menu. and click OK. 304 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

15 On the File menu. Curved Curtain System | 305 . 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. click Modify. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. clear Fine.detail. click Visibility. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 11 On the Design Bar. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. and click OK. Click again to specify the ending point. 17 Open the m_Cylinder Mullion .10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. click the Training Files icon. click Detail Component.rfa file from the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Detail Components folder. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.

25 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. click Modify. under 3D Views. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Visibility. double-click Southeast Isometric. 31 Click . under Floor Plans. select All Empty Segments. click Mullion. and click OK. 38 On the Options Bar. 40 On the Design Bar. and return to the project file.rfa.20 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 29 Click . 306 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . and click OK. and click DELETE.rfa family. click Modify to exit placing mullions. right-click and use Select Mullions on gridline from the Select Mullions menu. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 41 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Project Browser. 33 Click Edit/New. click Save As. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. specify Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion for Profile. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box. 26 On the File menu. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. You have placed more mullions than you want. double-click GROUND FLOOR. it can be added as a mullion type. 21 Select the detail component. 23 On the File menu. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Circular Mullion for Family. 24 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. clear Coarse and Medium. 27 Load the Cylinder Mullion. so next you remove the unwanted ones. 36 Under Construction. 37 Click OK twice. 30 On the Modelling tab. After the new profile is loaded. 22 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box.

43 Save the file. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. and you can click to select them all. TIP To chain select all the walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and a ruled curtain system. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. All the inside faces highlight. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 2 Zoom in on the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. click Pick Walls. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Design Bar. select Defines slope. a storefront system. In this lesson. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 5 On the Options Bar. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. and then apply those custom elements to the system. Additional Curtain Systems | 307 . you learned to create a curved curtain system. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press TAB. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. make custom curtain panels and mullions.

you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 9 Under Constraints. 14 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 Zoom in on the skylight. select Entire Grid Line. 308 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . under 3D Views. 17 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click System Family: Sloped Glazing for Family. Storefront System In this exercise. click Roof Properties. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Mullion. click Modify. double-click Southeast Isometric. 19 Save the file. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 10 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 18 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Roof. 11 In the Project Browser.7 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. click Shaded with Edges for Graphics Style.

2 Zoom in on the wall at the eastern-most area of the model. This curtain wall cuts the original wall. select Unconnected for Height. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 5 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and enter 2400. 4 On the Type Selector. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. Additional Curtain Systems | 309 . You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. click Wall. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall.

click OK to close the Type Properties dialog box and return to the Element Properties dialog box that displays the instance parameters. enter 45 for Angle (Grid 1) and 15 for Angle (Grid 2). and the Spacing (Grid 2) is set to 2400 mm. and Offset (Grid 1). and press ENTER. 14 After you have looked at the Pattern parameters. This means that the panel heights will be exactly at a 2400 mm height. For this wall. 13 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties dialog box. The Layout (Grid 2) is set to Fixed Distance. 11 Zoom in on the new storefront wall. which is specified in the type. Click OK. or end. 9 On the Design Bar. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. 10 In the Project Browser. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 12 Select the storefront wall. To see how the grid layout is defined. Under the Pattern heading. and click . click Modify. see the Revit Building help. the Layout (Grid 1) is set to Maximum Spacing. double-click Southeast Isometric. you find Number (Grid 1). The Justification (Grid 1) specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. The Offset (Grid 1) is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. The Grid 2 counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. You see these same parameters for Grid 2. center. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. The type parameters under the Pattern heading create the predefined layout. 310 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. and the Spacing (Grid 1) is set to 1524 mm. even if the wall height changes. The Number (Grid 1) is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. By setting the Angle (Grid 1) value. enter 10200 mm. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. This specifies an exact length for the wall. Justification (Grid 1). Angle (Grid 1).8 Click the temporary dimension. under 3D Views. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout.

This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 18 Save the file. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. and select All Empty Segments on the Options Bar. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 3 On the View Control Bar. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. under 3D Views. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. double-click Southeast Isometric. In this exercise. Additional Curtain Systems | 311 . Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 17 Select a curtain grid. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model.16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Mullion.

8 Select the highlighted line. 312 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .5 Place the cursor at the bottom edge of the SECOND FLOOR. 6 Click the highlighted line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. A panel between the 2 lines is created. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the thin line. making sure Thin Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. and highlight the thin line.

Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. and click . 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Type Selector. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 9 Select the panel. embed a curtain system inside another wall. Finally. quarters. Next.A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. click Curtain Grid. right-click and use Select Panels along Grid 2 from the Select Panels menu. Additional Curtain Systems | 313 . and then eighths. and then eighths. quarters. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. 17 Save the file. 12 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. click System Panel : Solid. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 13 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 10 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog box. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and define a ruled curtain system. 16 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. 14 Highlight a top level glazed panel. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems.

314 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

you can add different views of the building model directly to the sheet. elevation. Sheets are defined by borders.Creating Drawings 11 In this tutorial. three-dimensional views. which are a type of view in a project. begin by first creating sheets. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. 315 . usually contain a title block. section. and schedules. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model in an Autodesk Revit Building project. and are accessible from the Project Browser. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your building model. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan.

The project used in the following exercises is a small office building model. adjust the view scale. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You also reorient the swing of one of the doors in the floor plan view on the sheet. click the Training Files icon. how to add views to the sheets. You then add the floor plan view to the sheet. you learn how to create sheets within an Revit Building project. you create a drawing sheet that includes a floor plan of the first level of the building model. click Open. and observe that the changes are made in the floor and furniture plan views of the building model. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. Open m_Drawing_Exercise located in the Metric folder. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 316 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. how to create new views from a building model. Next. and dimension the exterior walls of the building to complete the floor plan drawing sheet. You turn off the visibility of the furniture in the duplicated view to create a floor plan view and rename the original view as the furniture plan. You begin by duplicating an existing floor plan view that includes furniture. you enter the project information and create a drawing sheet with a title block that displays the project information.

right-click Level 1. click the Model Categories tab. and specialty equipment continue to display in the Level 1 Furniture plan. furniture. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 10 Click OK. Casework.Copy the Level 1 floor plan view to create a Level 1 Furniture plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Under Floor Plans. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. and expand Floor Plans. A copy of the Level 1 Floor plan view is displayed in the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click OK. furniture. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 317 . Turn off visibility for casework. 3 Right-click Copy of Level 1. 9 Under Visibility. and specialty equipment in the Level 1 Floor Plan view 6 On the View menu. Casework. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. lighting fixtures. click Project Information. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics. click Edit for Project Address. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 11 On the Settings menu. furniture. and click Duplicate. 5 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). The changes in visibility are applied to this view only. and specialty equipment are no longer displayed in the Level 1 floor plan view. 8 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. double-click Level 1 to redisplay the floor plan. enter Level 1 Furniture.

Enter Client Approved for Project Status. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. select A0 metric. 2005 for Project Issue Date. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. and click OK. 15 Continue to change the remaining type parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 31 March. Enter Residence for Project Name. 17 On View tab of the Design Bar. The text fields of the title block on the sheet automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered in step 14. Enter J.13 In the Edit Text dialog box. 18 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 318 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . MA 12345 14 Click OK. 16 Click OK. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. click Sheet. Smith for Client Name. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. right-click. and click View.

select Floor Plan: Level 1. under Identity Data. and click OK. on the Options Bar. but the scale of the view is too small for the drawing sheet. 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all).Unnamed. enter Ground Floor Plan for Sheet Name. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Add View to Sheet. 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 319 . 25 In the Views dialog box. and click to place the view in the center of the drawing sheet. The Level 1 floor plan view is displayed on the drawing sheet. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 When the title block highlights. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A101 . 26 Move the cursor to the center of the drawing sheet. 23 Ground Floor Plan is displayed in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. and select the title block. View scale is a property of the view. and you can modify it within the sheet by activating the Level 1 floor plan view and changing its scale. click Modify.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click Add View. click .

and click OK.27 With the view selected. click Deactivate View. and drag the grips that display on the scale to lengthen it. you would see that the scale of the Level 1 floor plan view is now 1:20. indicating the view is deactivated. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. The border and the title block are no longer grayed out. right-click. Any changes that you make to it on the sheet while it is active display when you open the Level 1 floor plan view. The border and title block are grayed out. click Activate View. 28 Right-click the view. Center the view on the sheet and reposition the drawing scale 30 On the View menu. 320 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and click View Properties. and click View Properties. under Graphics. 32 Select the viewport. on the View menu. 31 Select the viewport and from the Type Selector. select 1:20 for View Scale. 29 In the Element Properties dialog box. 33 Drag the viewport to the center of the drawing sheet. click Viewport : Title w Line. indicating that the Level 1 floor plan View is active and you can modify it. If you were to open the Level 1 floor plan view.

as shown in the following illustration. click Modify. and click Activate View. 36 On the Options Bar. and click to place the dimension.Dimension the exterior walls of the building 34 Right-click on the viewport on the drawing sheet. 40 Click the control arrows until the door swings open to the interior. This creates aligned dimensions that originate at the wall faces. and select Wall faces for Prefer. click Dimension. 35 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and then select the outer face of the east exterior vertical wall. ■ 38 Dimension the west exterior wall of the building by selecting the outer faces of the north and south exterior walls and placing the dimension to the left of the west wall. click . 37 Dimension the north wall of the building: ■ Select the outer face of the west exterior vertical wall. Reorient the door in the upper exterior wall 39 On the Design Bar. as shown in the following illustration. Move the cursor above the north exterior wall. and select the door on the north exterior wall (in the upper right corner). Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 321 .

are specific to the view in which they are created. When you change the geometry of the building model while the view is activated. the changes are made within the building model and not restricted to the current view. 43 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. but the door reflects the change you made to its orientation in the Level 1 floor plan.41 Select the view. however. and the door is updated. right-click. 42 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The dimensions that you added to the Level 1 floor plan view are not displayed. The two dimensions that you added to the view in the previous steps have been added to this view. Dimensions. 322 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . Adding a Sheet to the Project. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 1 Furniture. This means that when you reoriented the door swing in the Level 1 floor plan. the change is also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. and click Deactivate View.

4 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Furniture Plan Level 1 for Sheet Name. The sheet is incrementally named A102. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. select A0 metric. In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. and click OK. A102 . click . add the furniture plan view. and adjust the scale of the view to create a furniture plan drawing. click Sheet. Furniture Plan Level 1 is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. the new sheet. and click OK. is displayed. and on the Options Bar. 3 Select the title block. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 323 . under Identity Data. m_Drawing_Exercise.Furniture Plan Level 1. you add a new sheet to the project. under Sheets (all). Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise.

m_Drawing_Exercise. 2 Zoom in on the lower left corner of the building. 8 In the Project Browser. 5 Select M_Floor Lamp 1 : 100watt Halogen in the Type Selector to change the lamp type. click and drag Level 1 Furniture onto the sheet. and select the lamp next to the lounge chair. You change a lamp type and the length of an interior wall in the furniture plan view on Sheet A102.rvt. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture. verify that M_Floor Lamp 2 : 150 watt Incandescent is displayed. and click Activate View. under Sheets (all).Furniture Plan Level 1. click Modify. click the scale value. under Floor Plans. 9 Center the cursor in the drawing area of the sheet. under Floor Plans. 324 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and click to place the view. double-click A102 . right-click on the view on sheet A102. Change the lamp type in the furniture plan 1 In the drawing area.Change the scale of the view before you add it to the sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet In this exercise. and select 1:20. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. and then observe that the changes are also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan.

select Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture. and the wall position in Sheet A102 are reflected in the Level 1 Furniture plan view. The changes made to the lamp. chair. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets. 7 On the Design Bar. and notice that Moves with Nearby Elements is selected in the Options Bar. 8 Select the wall as shown in the following illustration. and file cabinet adjacent to the wall move when the wall is resized. 9 Click the temporary dimension value of the distance between the wall and the centerline of the exterior horizontal wall. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 325 . The desk. furniture. 10 On the Window menu. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and press ENTER. enter 5200 mm. 11 Select the same wall you selected in step 8 to view the change in dimension. click Modify.6 Select one of the furniture components.

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. and select the dashed callout view border. m_Drawing_Exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the blue border grip adjacent to the view tag.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and move it to the position shown in the following illustration. double-click Level 1 Furniture. under Floor Plans. click Callout. 326 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . A callout tag is placed inside the walls of the building model. you learn how to create new elevation. and section views of the building model and add them to a single drawing sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Draw a rectangle around the room in the lower left corner of the drawing to define the boundaries of the room. Create a callout view 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. callout.

select A0 Metric. click the scale value. click Modify. 10 On the View tab of the Design Bar. A103 .Unnamed. and select 1:20. click Add View. and double-click the callout tag to display the callout view. select Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture. 11 In the Views dialog box. 12 Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the sheet. and click OK. position the view. and add the callout view to a new sheet 7 On the View Control Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 327 . 9 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. Change the callout view scale.6 On the Design Bar. The new sheet. is displayed under Sheets (all) in the Project Browser. TIP You can also drag the Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture view from the Project Browser to place it on the sheet. and click to place the view. and click Add View to Sheet.

click Elevation. click Modify. center it in the room so that it points north. the elevation symbol points to the closest wall. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 Move the cursor to the lower left room. The tag now displays the drawing sheet and detail number. 14 Zoom in around the view tag of the callout. and place it on the sheet 15 Adjust your zoom to display the lower left corner of the view. double-click Level 1 Furniture. and click to place the elevation symbol. Create a new elevation view. select the elevation symbol arrow.13 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 18 On the Design Bar. and zoom out to view the elevation extents. As you move the cursor. 328 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor in the drawing area. The elevation extents do not display when you select the body of the elevation symbol.

24 In the Views dialog box. 23 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Elevations.Unnamed.a. 20 Select the box under the elevation symbol to create a new elevation view 180 degrees from the first elevation view you created when you placed the elevation symbol. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 329 . double-click A103 . and click Add View to Sheet. 21 In the Project Browser under Views (all). click Add View. and notice that two new elevation views display: Elevation 1 .a and Elevation 1 . 25 Click to place the elevation next to the callout view on the drawing sheet. Add the new elevation views to sheet A103 22 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all).c. The symbol is displayed as in the following illustration.19 Select the body of the elevation symbol. select Elevation: Elevation 1 .

28 Zoom in on the elevation tag in the lower left room. under Sheets (all).Furniture Plan Level 1. double-click Level 1 Furniture. Create a section view.26 Add Elevation 1 . 330 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and add it to the sheet 29 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click A102 .c to the sheet either with the Add View command or by dragging it from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 30 Zoom in on the right side of the building. 27 In the Project Browser. The sheet (drawing) number and detail IDs of the views are displayed in the symbol.

33 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click outside the north exterior wall of the building to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). 32 In the Options Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 331 .31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ 34 Click the arrows at the head of the section line to flip the section so it points to the west. select 1:50 for Scale. Move the cursor down and click outside of the south exterior wall of the building to place the section tail and complete the section line. click Section.

click Custom for View Scale. modify the building model from your sheets. By completing the exercises in this lesson. 45 Close the exercise file. under Graphics. select Section: Section 1. click Add View. The drawing sheet is now complete. and to create new views of your building model.35 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). 42 Right-click on the view.Unnamed. 39 Right-click on the view. double-click A103 . 43 Place the section view on the drawing sheet as shown in the following illustration. and click Add View to Sheet. click Save As. and click OK. on the File menu. and click Activate View. 44 If you want to save your changes. add views to your sheets. elevations. 37 In the Views dialog box. and click View Properties. 41 Enter 25 for Scale Value. 38 Right-click on the viewport. and sections. 332 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 36 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Deactivate View. you learned how to create new drawing sheets. such as callouts.

and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or noteblock. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Finally. windows. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Building building model. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. On construction documents. click the Training Files icon. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. door frame schedule. click New ➤ Legend. expand Legends. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. you add the completed symbol legend to a cover sheet for the construction documents. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and door frames. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. and click OK.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Symbol. Open m_Legends. click Open. 4 In the Rename View dialog box.Upgrade : 6 mm M_Wall Tag : 12mm Door Tag metric Window Tag metric Using Legends | 333 . 3 Right-click Legend 1.Filled Level Head . doors. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. and click Rename.Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. 2 In the Project Browser. and so on). enter Symbol Legend for Name. On construction documents. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise.

334 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 On the Design Bar. and double-click A100 . You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. click Duplicate. expand Sheets (all). click Symbol Legend. and click OK twice. and click to place it. 17 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Options bar. you create a text type with the necessary size. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Marker (Level name/Elevation in mm) Wall Tag (Wall Type #) Door Tag (Door #) Window Tag (Window Type #) Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. and click OK. On the Design Bar. 14 Enter Detail Callout (detail #/sheet #) for the text note. 8 In the Type Selector. 15 Working from the top down. click . drag it to the lower-right corner of the cover sheet. click Text. click Edit/New. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. click Modify to end the command.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. enter 3mm for Text Size. enter 3mm for Name. select Text : 6mm. 12 Under Text.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area.

The symbol legend is added to the project cover sheet. 6 On the Options Bar. Add components to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. and click Rename. and click Save. click Legend Component. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. 8 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 3 Right-click Legend 1. 2 In the Project Browser. Creating a Wall Type Legend In this exercise. Creating a Wall Type Legend. expand Legends. 7 Select Section for View. enter Wall Type Legend for Name.rvt. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. click Save As. click New ➤ Legend. 20 Navigate to your preferred directory. select Walls: Basic Wall: Exterior .Brick on CMU for Family.rvt. Using Legends | 335 . and click OK. name the file m_Legends_in progress. 9 Repeat the procedure to place a wall of type Interior . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. You then add the completed legend to a project cover sheet. m_Legends_in progress. 19 On the File menu.138mm Partition (1-hr) directly below the first wall. 21 Proceed to the next exercise.

15 Enter (1) Layer 16mm GWB. 17 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. 16 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the remaining text annotations on the upper wall component. click to add a single-segment leader. 12 On the Options bar. click Text. 336 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 13 Click in the far left portion of the Brick on CMU wall to specify the leader start point. 14 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.Add text to the legend 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Modify on the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. The text note with leader is added to the legend.

click Wall Type Legend. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Place the legend on a sheet 25 Using extension reference lines. you use the Match Type tool to convert a wall in the floor plan to the component type used in the Wall Type Legend. add an identical detail line below the lower component. double-click A100 . click Detail Lines. You capture the wall type properties in the tool. draw a detail line that extends as far as the longest component callout. click Save. click Modify to end the command. and then select the wall to which you want to apply the same properties. The wall type legend is added to the project cover sheet. 22 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Selector. 19 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Project Browser. Using a Legend View to Match Types In this exercise. Using a Legend View to Match Types. select Medium Lines. 21 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2.Add titles to the legend components 18 In the Type Selector. click to add text without a leader. drag it onto the sheet.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. 29 On the File menu. 27 In the Project Browser. 24 Below the title text of the upper component. 28 On the Design Bar. Using Legends | 337 . 20 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. and enter Wall Type 1. select Text : 6mm. and click to place it above the symbol legend.

allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. The open drawings are both visible. m_Legends_in_progress. 7 Click on the wall at the top of the view. 6 Draw a rectangle around the upper-left corner of the floor plan. select Medium for Detail Level. Match a component type 3 On the Tools toolbar. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 338 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .rvt. so that you are zoomed in to the walls. 2 On the Window menu. Tile views in the drawing window 1 Close all project view drawings except Floor Plan: Level 1 and Wall Type Legend. 5 In the floor plan view. select the wall type 1 component. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. click . 8 On the View Control Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Tile. 4 In the Wall Type Legend view.

the revision is locked and issued to the field. When Issued is selected. contractor inquiries. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. If you select By Sheet. When you use this option. Using Revision Tracking. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. 4 Click on the value for Description. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. and enter a date. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. 2 In the Revisions dialog box. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. In general. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog box. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. and enter Moved window and added second window to Living Room. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. You can create a sequence of revisions. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Using the table. 9 On the File menu. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. Open m_Revisions. Using Revision Tracking Revit Building provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. click Close. if the active revision is number 1. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. In this exercise. or changes in building material availability. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. For example. click the Training Files icon. yet as concise as possible. Add a revision to the project 3 Click on the value for Release Date. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. These changes can be due to owner requests.rvt located in the Metric folder.The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 1 from the Wall Type Legend. Using Revision Tracking | 339 . you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. click Revisions. 10 Proceed to the next lesson.

rvt. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. Modify a window 1 In the Project Browser. including revision number and revision date. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. In most instances. expand Views. name the file m_Revisions-in progress. 2 Double-click Level 1 to open it in the drawing area. select the window. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 340 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .If Visible is not selected. enter 1200 mm. 3 In the small empty room.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click Save. and press ENTER. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. The selected window is moved to the left 900 mm. you make changes to the project floor plan. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 4 Select the dimension value to the left of the window. 8 On the File menu. 9 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Save As. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Revision clouds have read-only properties. and expand Floor Plans. m_Revisions-in progress. 7 Click OK. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Sketching Revision Clouds.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. m_Revisions-in progress. 11 In the drawing area. you load a revision tag into the project. click Save.rvt. 8 Click to place the second window. Tagging Revision Clouds. 12 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 9 On the Design Bar. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. Using Revision Tracking | 341 . 14 On the Design Bar.Add a window 5 Verify that the modified window is still selected in the drawing area. 13 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Revit Building is now in sketch mode. 7 Move the cursor to the right until the distance from the midpoint is 1800 mm. on the Edit toolbar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified windows. Add a revision cloud 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click 6 Select the midpoint of the casement window as the start point. click near the windows you have changed. 15 On the File menu. click Revision Cloud. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Modify to end the command.

browse to Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 9 Click to place the tag. and click Open. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 3 In the Tags dialog box. dialog box. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud. click Save. 5 In the Open dialog box. click Tags. Working with Revisions. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 4 Click Load. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. the cloud is tagged as number 1. 4 In the drawing area. you create a sheet view in your project. Tag a revision cloud 7 On the Options Bar. Add a revised view to a sheet 3 In the Project Browser. click to place the floor plan. verify that A0 Metric is selected. and drag it onto the sheet view. click OK. You then issue a revision. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 2 On the Options Bar. 342 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .rfa. m_Revisions-in progress. clear Leader. on which you place a revised view. under Floor Plans.Load a revision tag 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. scroll down to Revision Clouds. click New ➤ Sheet. select Level 1. and click OK. 8 In the drawing area. you need to add one. and because the revision is the first in the project. Because you chose to number by project. If the cursor is just inside the cloud.rvt. click Tag. A new sheet view is created in the project. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 10 On the File menu. Create a sheet view 1 On the View menu. 5 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. In the Tags dialog box. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 6 In the Tags. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 6 Draw a rectangle around the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the tag is displayed inside the cloud.

The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. On the Settings menu. Using Revision Tracking | 343 . enter a name for Issued to. click Revisions. 13 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. clear Visible for each issued revision. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. 9 Select Issued. you prevent further changes to the revision. You do this by issuing the revision. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. You can continue to add revisions. Issue a revision 7 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 8 In the Revisions dialog box. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. and click OK. click Revisions. click Close. 11 In the Revisions dialog box. Create additional revisions 10 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. click New. On the Settings menu. you can no longer modify it. 12 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. 14 Click OK. under Add. 15 On the File menu. NOTE After you issue a revision.

344 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

Detailing 12 In this tutorial. and metal studs. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you learn how to create details in Autodesk Revit Building. 345 . plywood. like a standard detail that you want to add to a library. In this tutorial. These components scale with the building model. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you also learn how to change the detail component display order and visibility settings in a detail to create depth and show varying levels of detail. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail.

You create the callout view by adding a callout to the section view. expand Floor Plans. you detail the foundation sill of a small house. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. click Open. expand Views (all). Creating a Callout View In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. you create a callout view that references the foundation sill of the house. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. Modify the section view 1 In the Project Browser. add detail components. and double-click First Floor. you trace over the building model geometry. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The callout defines the extents of the callout view. In order to detail from the building model. The callout view is a larger view of the area that you define in the section view with the callout. 346 | Chapter 12 Detailing . The section line that you see in the floor plan indicates that a section view has been added to the project. In the callout view. Open m_Cape_House. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes.rvt located in the Metric folder.

4 Select and move the blue grips of the interior end points of the section line so the section line is displayed as in the following illustration.2 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 347 . 3 Click the break symbol to create a gap in the section line. Blue grips and a break symbol display on the section line. click Modify and select the section line.

7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Click in the section view where the lower right corner displays. click Callout. select 1:5 for Scale. ■ Reposition the callout head 10 On the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. 11 Select the grip near the callout head and move it to the bottom left side of the view as shown in the following illustration. click Modify. 348 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 8 On the Options Bar. The callout border and tag highlight and display blue grips.Add a callout to the section view to specify the callout view 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 9 Add the callout by drawing a rectangle around the left side of the foundation: ■ Click in the section view where the upper left corner of the callout rectangle displays in the following illustration. 6 Double-click the head of the section line to display the section view. right-click in the Design Bar. and select the callout border.

Display and modify the callout view 12 On the Design Bar. Select Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify and double-click the callout head. click View Properties. select the First Floor level line. Notice that the alignment of the level is locked to the site level. 15 Click OK. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 349 . 13 On the View menu. The callout view is displayed. 16 In the view. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ Enter Section Detail @ Foundation Sill for View Name.

which means that any detail components. You start by adding a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside of the foundation wall. select Wide Lines. 3 In the Type Selector. Detailing the View. select Chain and click . They are also view specific. siding. click Lines. as well as detail lines. TIP If you do not see the Filled Region command. 350 | Chapter 12 Detailing . The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and an anchor bolt. turn off the display of some of the Design Bar tabs.17 Proceed to the next exercise. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. Detailing the View In this exercise.rvt. and insulation objects. 5 Trace the region representing the sloped grade using the following illustration for reference. m_Cape_House. region objects. Exact dimensions are not important. 4 On the Options Bar. Create a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside the foundation wall 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. Notice that the Design Bar is now in Sketch mode and the model geometry is grayed out. you detail the view of the foundation sill. TIP Enter SO on your keyboard to turn off snapping as you sketch. click Filled Region. and then add detail components to the detail that represent lumber. sub-flooring. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 351 . enter Earth for Name. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 Click OK three times. 14 In the Type Selector. click Region Properties. click Duplicate. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. NOTE You may have to zoom out to view the earth fill pattern in the filled region. select <Invisible lines>. the pattern does not display. click Edit/New. click in the Fill Pattern type parameter Value field. 9 In the Name dialog box. The earth fill pattern is displayed in the filled region. 15 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to complete the filled region. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. select EARTH.6 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the two lines shown in the following illustration. If you are zoomed in too far. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 11 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. under Name and Pattern.

22 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber Section counter-clockwise.rfa. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section. 17 On the Options Bar. select the following lumber components: ■ ■ ■ 38X140 38X235 38X286 20 Click Open. 352 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click . 19 At the bottom of the dialog box. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section 38X235. navigate to Detail Components\Structural\Wood in the Metric Library. 18 In the Open dialog box.Add lumber detail components 16 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 21 In the Type Selector. 23 Place the 38X235 Lumber component in the detail view as shown in the following illustration.

select M_Dimension Lumber. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 353 . 25 In the Type Selector. and place it in the detail view.24 Place a 38X235 lumber component as shown in the following illustration.Section: 38x140.

TIP You may need to use the Align tool to place the plywood component. Add a plywood detail component to the exterior wall face 29 Place another plywood component on the exterior face of the wall as shown in the following illustration. 27 In the Type Selector. 354 | Chapter 12 Detailing .Add a plywood detail component to represent the sub-flooring 26 On the Design Bar. select M_Plywood : 25mm. 28 Place the plywood component above the last 38X235 that you added as shown in the following illustration. click Detail Component.

click Edit/New. and click to place the lap siding. . Move the cursor up along the plywood component. until enough lap siding displays to cover it. enter 19 mm for Thickness. Verify Fill Available Space is selected for Layout. click Repeating Detail. click Detail Component. and click OK. Verify Detail Rotation is set to None. and click OK. select the plywood on the exterior face of the wall. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. Add a lap siding to the exterior wall as a repeating detail component 34 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. Select Inside. ■ ■ 40 Click OK twice. Add an anchor bolt detail component 32 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 355 . click . 38 In the Name dialog box. change the following type parameters: ■ ■ Select m_lap siding for Detail. and click 31 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Lap Siding for Name. this parameter determines the appropriate spacing between the repeated components so that they fill the space that you select evenly. 41 Add the lap siding to the plywood on the exterior face: ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the plywood detail component. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. 35 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate.30 On the Design Bar. When you place the repeating detail component. click Modify. 33 In the Type Selector. select m_anchorbolt and place it in the detail view as shown in the following illustration.

Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. Select and move the blue grips on the repeating detail line to shorten or lengthen the lap siding. m_Cape_House.rvt. Adding Detail Lines. 356 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 42 Proceed to the next exercise. The lap siding is displayed along the plywood. click Modify and select the repeating lap siding detail component. click Wide Lines. on the Design Bar. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 3 Sketch detail lines to enclose the bottom end of the lap siding as shown in the following illustration. If you need to make modifications to the lap siding after you place it. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add lines to your detail. click Detail Lines. they are view specific.NOTE You may need to move your cursor above the crop region of the detail view to place the lap siding along the entire length of the plywood. meaning they display only in this view. 2 In the Type Selector. Like detail components.

12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Medium Lines. sketch a 20 x 100 mm baseboard. select Medium lines. click Detail Lines. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Filled Region. 9 Add two more detail lines as shown in the following illustration. 13 Trace over the interior wall face as shown in the following illustration. select Chain. 11 In the Type Selector. select . 7 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Design Bar.4 On the View menu. Create a filled region that represents the15 mm gypsum board 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click . click View Properties. select As underlay for the Display Model instance parameter. 8 Using the underlay inside wall face and floor as references. The model geometry that displays underneath the detail components and lines is grayed out. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 357 .

click Duplicate. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Gypsum-Plaster. click Edit/New. under Name and Pattern. 21 On the Design Bar.14 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Finish Sketch to view the gypsum board. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 In the Type Properties dialog box. 20 Click OK three times. enter Plasterboard for Name. 358 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. 17 In the Name dialog box. click Region Properties.

enter Concrete for Name. enter Vapor Barrier for Name. 3 In the New Subcategory dialog box. 26 On the Design Bar. 32 Click OK three times. 31 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. you turn off the display of the model geometry. and click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. you add a vapor barrier and insulation to the detail. click New. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 359 . 29 In the Name dialog box. click Line Styles. click Finish Sketch to view the concrete filled region. click Edit/New. under Name and Pattern. and click OK. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation. click Duplicate. m_Cape_House. 23 In the Type Selector. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box. 24 On the Options Bar. under Modify Subcategories. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 In the Type Properties dialog box. Near the end of this lesson. select Concrete. select Medium Lines. If there were no filled region to represent the foundation walls. 33 On the Design Bar. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation In this exercise. select . Add a vapor barrier 1 On the Settings menu. 2 In the Line Styles dialog box. 25 Trace a rectangle over the foundation wall. click Region Properties. click Filled Region. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the region would be blank.Create a filled region that represents the foundation wall 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt.

click Detail Lines. 360 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 5 Click OK to complete the new line style.4 Under Lines Styles. 11 On the Options Bar. select Vapor Barrier. click Insulation. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 120 mm for Width and 65 mm for Offset to center. Adding Break Lines. 7 In the Type Selector. click and enter 28mm for Offset. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. Move your cursor down to the top of the 38x140 and click to specify the endpoint. make the following changes to Vapor Barrier: ■ ■ ■ Select 3 for Line Weight/Projection. Add insulation 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you add break lines to the detail. Adding Break Lines In this exercise. Select Dash for Line Pattern. Select Black for Line Color. 12 Sketch the insulation: ■ ■ Click at the top and to the right of the exterior wall face underlay of the wall to specify the start point. 9 Click the right face of the interior wall to create a line as shown in the following illustration.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. Add a break line to the top of the wall section 1 On the Design Bar.rvt. 8 Place the break line approximately in the center of the floor as shown in the following illustration. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 361 . 7 In the Type Selector. and select the crop boundary of the detail view. select M_Break Line. verify that M_Break Line is selected. 5 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the view displays as in the following illustration. m_Cape_House. click Modify. click Detail Component. Add a break line to the floor 6 On the Design Bar. 3 Place the break line at the top of the wall section as shown in the following image. 4 On the Design Bar.

as shown in the following illustration. Turn off the visibility of model components to view detail components only 11 On the View menu. click Modify. and click OK. click View Properties.9 On the Design Bar. NOTE You may need to drag the shape handles of the break line to resize it to the illustration. select Do not display for Display model. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 362 | Chapter 12 Detailing . the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. When you turn the display model off. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added previously. and select the break line. click and rotate the break line until it displays as shown in the following illustration. 10 On the Tools toolbar.

click Text. Enter the text. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 6 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 5 If you want to save your changes. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 363 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.13 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Cape_House. select 4 mm text for Text size. on the File menu. 2 On the Type Selector.rvt. Click again to set the elbow position of the leader. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 4 Add the leaders and notes shown in the following illustration: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to set the location of the arrow. click to create a leader with two segments. click Save As. you add text notes to complete the detail. 3 On the Options Bar. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click again to set the location of the text box. Adding Text Notes.

you learn to modify the display of detail components in your detail views. The filled regions in the detail section view do not overlap properly.Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views In this lesson. A detail component can display in front or in back of all other components. For example. The section line that you see in the top right corner of the floor plan indicates that a section view that cuts through the kitchen sink and cabinet has been added to the project. such as walls and windows. click the Training Files icon. you change the order in which detail components in a detail view of a kitchen sink and cabinet display. while other model elements. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. or can display in front of or in back of specific components.rvt located in the Common folder. 364 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Open c_Office_Building. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open the detail view 1 In the Project Browser. you can arrange the order in which detail components display. you can set only doors in a detail view to display in fine detail. Within a detail view. expand Views (all). display in coarse detail. You also learn how to override line styles and detail level settings for each model element. expand Floor Plans. Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View In this exercise. and double-click Basement. click Open. 2 Double-click the section line head to display the section view.

Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 365 . click .Display the sink in front of the cabinet 3 Move your cursor over the kitchen sink detail component. Display the sink behind the cabinet 5 Select the sink and. on the Options Bar. 4 With the sink selected. and when it highlights. The sink is now sent to the back of the drawing. behind the cabinet. on the Options Bar. select it. The sink now displays as if it was in front of the cabinet detail component. click .

5 Click in the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view and draw a zoom box around the furniture as shown in the following illustration. a cabinet. Display the furniture in the basement view in halftone 4 On the View menu. 3 On the View menu. select Zoom ➤ Zoom In Region.rvt. 2 On the Window menu. c_Office_Building.There are three stacked detail components in this detail: a sink. select Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. using halftone. Open four different views 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. and overriding detail level settings. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Select the base cabinet and try the various depth options on the Options Bar. and a simple fill pattern. 366 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select Tile. you change the visibility settings of several views by overriding line styles. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View In this exercise. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View.

13 On the View menu. 10 Click OK. select Visibility/Graphics. and click Apply. select Visibility/Graphics. 12 On the View menu. scroll down to Furniture. click the Annotation Categories tab. and select Halftone. The door tags are not displayed. 7 On the View menu. expand Views (all).6 Maximize the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. select Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 367 . 16 Move the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box so you can view the floor plan. expand Floor Plans. 14 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. 9 Under Visibility. and double-click Level 1. click the Model Categories tab. The furniture within this view is displayed in halftone. 15 Clear the Visibility for Door tags. Turn off door tags in the Level 1 Floor Plan 11 In the Project Browser.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Override. click Override under Line Style Cut for Walls. Change the cut line style for walls in the view 19 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. Select Solid for Line Pattern. select Coarse for Detail Level. Select 8 for Line Weight. 20 In the Select Line Style dialog box. 18 For Walls. click the Model Categories tab. The cut line style of the walls is now significantly heavier.Display walls in coarse detail in the Level 1 Floor Plan 17 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. 368 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and click Apply. The walls in this view display in a coarse level of detail while the rest of the floor plan is displayed in a fine level of detail. 21 Click OK twice. Select Black for Line Color. All the walls in this view are displayed as coarse regardless of the settings in the View Properties dialog box.

click New ➤ Drafting View. you create a door detail in this new drafting view. After you create a drafting view. you create a drafting view that is not associated with a building model. 23 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Open m_Drafting_views. The new drafting view. and expand Drafting Views. The building model is no longer displayed in the drawing window because you have created a drafting view that is not associated with the building model. enter the following: ■ ■ Enter Door Detail for Name. you create a door detail in the new drafting view. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. Select 1:5 for Scale. Creating a Drafting View In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson.22 If you want to save your changes. is displayed in the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 3 Click OK to create the new drafting view. 5 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn how to create a drafted detail. click the Training Files icon. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Building or by importing details from an existing detail library. click Save As. Create the new drafting view 1 On View menu. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. These details do not update with changes to the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View In this exercise. click Open. In the next exercise.rvt located in the Metric folder. named Door Detail. on the File menu. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. Creating a Drafted Detail | 369 . you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet.

click Dimension. m_Drafting_views. you can change its value by clicking Modify on the Design Bar and selecting one of the lines the dimension references. you can change it. click Detail Lines. 370 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 5 Permanently dimension the door jamb sketch so that the dimension values match those in the following illustration.rvt. You can also use the Rectangles sketching tool to create the basic shapes. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click the tab in the context menu. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 Sketch the door jamb shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. TIP You may want to use the Chain option when you sketch the door jamb. and then use the Split and Trim tools to complete the sketch. 2 In the Type Selector. select Wide Lines. When the dimension value displays in blue. After you create a dimension. Create a drafted door detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

10 Sketch two 15 mm thick rectangles as shown. click Lines. click Duplicate. 18 On the Design Bar. On the Design Bar. Creating a Drafted Detail | 371 . select Wide Lines. 16 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click Snaps. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. select Sand. 11 On the Design Bar. Under Dimension Snaps. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. clear Length dimension snap increments. 17 Under Pattern Type. verify Drafting is selected. click for the Fill pattern type parameter. 9 Turn off automatic snapping to facilitate sketching in close detail: ■ ■ On the Settings menu. enter Sand. click Finish Sketch. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 20 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Create filled regions 6 You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 21 Sketch the 50 mm x 15 mm door trim as shown. 14 In the Name dialog box. The detail with filled regions (the gypsum wall board with the sand drafting pattern) is displayed. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Name. click . click Region Properties. click Detail Lines. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK 3 times.

and add 2 dimensions to the door trim.22 On the Design Bar. Adjust witness lines 23 Select each door jamb dimension. 24 Drag the door jamb dimension controls to pull the dimensions away from the detail. click Dimension. 372 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 25 Add an overall dimension of the door jamb.

select M_Dimension Lumber 38X140. click Duplicate. 34 In the Name dialog box. 36 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber counter-clockwise. 37 Place the lumber component in the detail. select Medium Lines. and click Hide Object from the context menu. and click OK twice. Select the desired dimensions. and on the View Control Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Detail Component. enter 125 for the Width type parameter. click Detail Lines. 30 In the Type Selector. Creating a Drafted Detail | 373 . 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. click the Hide/Isolate command. 28 Draw lines that represent the door as shown. 31 On the Options Bar. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. TIP You may find it helpful to temporarily hide the dimensions in the view when sketching the door.Sketch a door 26 On the Design Bar. enter 38 x 125. 27 In the Type Selector. Add the dimensional lumber for the header 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . click Edit/New. and click OK. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box.

374 | Chapter 12 Detailing .38 Stack another 38 x 125 directly above the one that you placed in the previous step to complete the header. click Detail Component. 41 Add two break lines as shown. Add two break lines 39 On the Design Bar. TIP Rotate and move the bottom break line to adjust its masking element. 40 In the Type Selector. select Break Line.

Creating a Drafted Detail | 375 . and expand Drafting Views. 43 In the Options Bar. 50 On the Design Bar. 47 In the Project Browser. click New ➤ Sheet. 46 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and drag it onto the sheet. click to create a leader with two segments. and click OK. 48 Select Door Detail. expand Views. verify that A0 metric is selected. click Text. 44 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Place the drafting view on a new sheet 45 On the View menu. click Modify to end the command. 49 Click to specify an insertion point.Add text notes to complete the detail 42 On the Design Bar.

select Preserve colors. The detail is imported as an import symbol.rvt. 7 On the View menu. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. After you explode it. Import a complete detail in DWG format 4 On the File menu. Create a new drafting view 1 On the View menu. 3 Click OK. 6 At the bottom of the Import/Link dialog box.51 Proceed to the next exercise.dwg from the Metric folder in the Training Files. under Layer/Level Colors. 376 | Chapter 12 Detailing . the DWG entities are converted into Revit Building elements. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. DGN. 5 In the Import/Link dialog box. select New ➤ Drafting View. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. m_Drafting_views. Select Custom for Scale. Enter 5 for the Scale value. select m_Rail_detail. In order to modify it. The detail that you import is in DWG format. and then click Open. DXF. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Rail Detail for Name. you must explode it.

13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . Change the text color to black and add text leaders 11 On the Design Bar. select black. The text retains the DWG layer color. 15 In the Color dialog box. click Edit/New. 10 If an error dialog box displays. click Delete Element(s). Creating a Drafted Detail | 377 . and the text within the detail is converted to Revit Building text. click Modify. press and hold CTRL. click the button in the Color type parameter Value field. click Modify. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. and select all of the text blocks in the detail. The lines of the detail are converted to detail lines. and click Full Explode. and click OK 3 times. 9 Right-click. and then select the detail. The text is displayed as black after you click in the drawing area.Explode the imported detail 8 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar.

MET STUD FRAMING. click Modify. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. and select the bottom text note. A leader is added to the text note. 378 | Chapter 12 Detailing .Add leaders to the text notes 16 On the Design Bar. 18 Select and move the leader grips to position the leader as shown. click . 17 On the Options Bar. Creating a Reference Callout. 19 Add leaders to the remaining text notes to complete the detail as shown.

Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble over the upper left door corner. m_Drafting_views. 6 Select the callout. it appears in the Reference other view list with the detail number and sheet number displayed after the view name. Display the reference view 7 On the Design Bar. The door detail that you drafted previously is displayed. select Reference other view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 3 On the Options Bar. expand Sections. click Modify. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. and select Drafting View: Door Detail (1/A101).rvt. and double-click Section 1. Creating a Drafted Detail | 379 . you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the door detail that you previously created. 4 Zoom in on the Level 1 doors. and double-click the callout. The callout head displays the detail and sheet information (1/A101) because the referenced drafting view is already placed on this sheet. NOTE When a view has been placed on a sheet view. The section view is displayed. click Callout.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu.8 If you want to save your changes. 380 | Chapter 12 Detailing . close the exercise file without saving your changes. Otherwise. click Save As.

Scheduling 13 In this tutorial. you learn how to create different types of schedules in your Autodesk Revit Building projects. 381 .

or you can group components of the same type into a single line item. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. you learn how to create type and instance schedules. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise.Creating Type and Instance Schedules In this lesson. 382 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . When you schedule building components in Revit Building. creating an instance schedule. You begin by creating an instance schedule. creating a type schedule. or a schedule that lists every window in the building. you can list each component as a separate line item. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

click the Fields tab. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. under Category. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you change the window instance schedule to a window type schedule. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 5 Using the same process. right-click in the Design Bar. and click OK. click the Training Files icon. Finally. 4 Under Available fields. click Open. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Windows. or a schedule that lists the windows by window type. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 6 Under Scheduled fields. select Comments and click Add. click Schedule/Quantities.Next. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. Creating Type and Instance Schedules | 383 . and click View.rvt located in the Metric folder. 7 Click OK. Open m_Schedules. Create a new window schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.

and click View Properties. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. NOTE By clicking Show. 11 In the Project Browser. 9 In the warning dialog box that is displayed. 384 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 8 Select any cell in the first row of the window schedule and. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. under Other. sorted by type mark. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. The window schedule is displayed. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. and double-click Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 12 Right-click on the schedule. However. click Show. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. click Close. 10 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog box. 15 Select Type Mark for Sort by. expand Schedules/Quantities. this can be a time-consuming process. on the Options Bar. in large building models with many views. 16 Click OK twice.

Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 17 Right-click on the schedule. and save the exercise file with a unique name. clear Itemize every instance. click Edit for the Sorting/Grouping instance parameter. 20 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. you create a room schedule from the floor plan of a large building model. click Save As. on the File menu. and click View Properties. you learn to add schedules and schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. 19 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. 22 Close the exercise file. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 385 . 21 If you want to save your changes.

and click OK. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. click Open. click the Training Files icon. and click View. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select Number and click Add. select Rooms.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. under Category.rvt located in the Metric folder. Several rooms and room tags exist in the floor plan. 5 Under Available fields. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and double-click flr 3 to make it the active view. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the New Schedule dialog box. 386 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Open m_Schedules. expand Floor Plans. click the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities. right-click in the Design Bar.

Add new rooms to the schedule 11 On the Options Bar. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 387 . A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. click New. next to Rows:.6 Using the same process. 9 To the right of Header text. Next. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Tagged. The room Number is 1. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 7 Under Scheduled fields. because the room is not tagged with a room tag. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 8 Click the Appearance tab. 10 Click OK. you define the font for the schedule headers.

and enter Conference to change the room name. 13 Select Room in the Name column for Room 29. The second room is displayed at the bottom of the list and is numbered sequentially. and enter 30. 14 Select Room in the Name column for Room 1. double-click flr 3. 17 Zoom in on the right side of the building.12 Using the same process. add a second room. 15 Select 1 in the Number column for Room 1. and select Conference from the list. 388 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . None of the rooms have tags placed on them. Add two room tags to the floor plan 16 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

right-click in the Design Bar. 20 Move your cursor into the large room in the upper right corner of the floor plan. 22 Place the room tag in the small room across from the large conference room. and double-click Room Schedule to view the updated room rows. select 30 Conference for Room. 19 On the Options Bar. The boundaries of the room highlight before you place the room tag. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 389 . and click to place the room tag.18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and verify that Horizontal is selected. and click Drafting. click Room Tag. 21 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. select 29 Conference for Room. expand Schedules/Quantities.

click Room Tag. 28 In the Project Browser. select Auto for Room. 26 On the Options Bar. 390 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . double-click Room Schedule to view the 11 rooms that you added to the schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. 27 Place the room tags as shown in the following illustration.Add eleven additional room tags 24 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 25 On the Design Bar. double-click flr 3.

34 On the Design Bar. locate the room with an area of 92. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify.11 square meters. click . and click OK. and select the seven room tags shown in the following illustration.Modify room tags 29 In the schedule. 32 With the room tags selected. double-click flr 3. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 391 . under Floor Plans. 31 On the Design Bar. click . click Modify. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Identity Data. and select Circulation for Name. The name in the room tag is now Circulation. select Services for Name. 30 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and zoom in on the room. press and hold CTRL. select Office for Name. press and hold CTRL. 35 With the room tags selected. and select the tags in the three remaining rooms named Room.

39 Select Schedule keys. press and hold CTRL. and enter Std Office. 45 On the Options Bar. and Wall Finish. click New twice to add two rows to the schedule. Enter Paint for Wall Finish. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. select Rooms.Add a schedule key 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 392 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Floor Finish. 46 Add information to the rows so that the schedule displays as shown in the following illustration. click the Key Name field. 40 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click Add. 44 Using the same process. Define three new room styles 42 On the Options Bar. click New to add a row to the schedule. under Category. enter the following information in the row: ■ ■ ■ Enter Vinyl for Base Finish. 43 In the new row. under Available fields. select Base Finish. 38 In the New Schedule dialog box. 41 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. Enter Carpet 1 for Floor Finish.

38. under Schedules/Quantities. under Other. 49 On the Options Bar. 52 On the Options Bar. and select the room tags in the three offices (37. 59 Click OK twice to update the schedule. 55 On the View menu. 39) in the lower right corner of the floor plan. and click OK. press and hold CTRL.Apply the new room styles to the room schedule 47 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. select Room Style. 56 Under Other. select Exec Offices for Room Style. and click OK. and select the room tag in the large conference room (29) in the upper right corner of the floor plan. 50 In the Element Properties dialog box. 53 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Available fields. click . double-click Room Schedule. 51 On the Design Bar. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 393 . View the room schedule 54 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. under Other. select Exec Offices for Room Style. click Modify. double-click flr 3. 58 Change the order of the schedule as shown in the dialog box below. click Edit for Fields. 48 On the Design Bar. 57 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click Modify. and click Add. click .

394 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. select Services from the list in the Room Style column. you create a room color diagram based on the names of the rooms in the floor plan.60 For the rooms in the schedule that are named Services. Creating a Room Color Diagram. 61 Proceed to the next exercise.

scroll all the way to the left. 5 In the alert dialog box. 2 Zoom out so you can view the entire building model. 11 Click OK three times. The rooms in the floor plan automatically change color. click Edit Color Scheme. A legend displays at the tip of your cursor.rvt. 9 In the Color dialog box. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 395 . under Views (all). and click the color green. Change the fill colors that are applied to the conference rooms 6 On the Design Bar. click Color Fill. click OK. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 7 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. click PANTONE. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog box.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click the color button for Conference. and double-click flr 3. Create a room color diagram 1 In the Project Browser. The fill color in the rooms named Conference are displayed as green. and select the color legend. click Modify. 10 In the PANTONE® Color Picker. m_schedules.

click Save As. and click OK. under Categories.rvt located in the Common folder. Open c_Schedules_2. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. you learn how to schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Building components. on the File menu. NOTE Because the next two lessons use common files. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select the following fields and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Schedules/Quantities. select Services for Room (10) in the Name column. right-click in the Design Bar. 2 In the New Schedules dialog box. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. number. To display graphics with metric values. You also learn how to create a furniture schedule that includes room name. and level. click Open. click the Fields tab. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Walls. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. Create a new wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Room Schedule. Room no longer displays in the key/legend. double-click Room Schedule. 396 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . select Project Units from the Settings menu and change the appropriate formats to metric. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. double-click flr 3. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click View. graphics are displayed with imperial values. click Schedule/Quantities. 16 Close the exercise file. 15 If you want to save your changes. 4 Under Available fields.Change the name of the single room named Room 12 In the Project Browser. The color diagram and legend reflect the changes that you made. click the Training Files icon.

8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 Click OK twice. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 397 . expand Schedules/Quantities. click Edit for Fields. under Other. 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 7 Right-click Wall Schedule. The Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields display in the schedule. add Assembly Code and Assembly Description to the schedule. and click Properties to view the element properties of the wall schedule that you created.Schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes 6 In the Project Browser.

under Views (all). 13 Click OK. expand C1010 . 12 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. expand C1010100 . 14 Click OK in the dialog box that explains that the change will be applied to all elements of the chosen type. and double-click Level 1. and click . and select C1010115 . All of the walls of this wall type are updated. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project from the building model 15 In the Project Browser.Interior Construction.Interiors.Brick Veneer w/ Stud.Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project within the schedule 11 In the wall schedule. expand C .Partitions. click in the Assembly code column in the first row of the schedule. and then click in the schedule. expand Floor Plans.Fixed Partitions.Partitions . expand C10 . 398 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .

click Edit/New. click in the Assembly Code field. and then click . double-click Wall Schedule. 17 On the Options Bar.5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Furniture Schedule. 22 In the Project Browser.16 Select one of the Interior . 21 Click OK three times. 20 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. expand C1010. under Identity Data. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 399 . expand C10. expand C. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog box.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Partitions . under Schedules/Quantities. and select C1010145 . expand C1010100. Schedule building model components by level and room 23 In the Project Browser.

click Sheet. 34 Adjust the row length in the schedule by selecting and moving the blue grips that are displayed on the top of the schedule. and click to place it. and click OK. 29 Click OK twice.24 In the Project Browser. click Edit for Fields. 400 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . select Room for Select available fields from. right-click Furniture Schedule. Change the appearance of the schedule 33 Zoom in on the schedule on the sheet. and then add Level and Manufacturer to the schedule. 31 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click Properties. Place the Furniture Schedule on a new drawing sheet 30 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 32 Drag the furniture schedule from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 28 Select Furniture for Select available fields from. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Other. 27 Add Room: Name and Room: Number to the schedule. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : 30 x 42 Horizontal.

adding the shared parameters to a family. ensuring consistency across families and projects. 37 If you want to save your changes. The new schedule segments are automatically placed to the right of the original schedule and are top aligned.35 Split the schedule into multiple segments by clicking the blue break line that is displayed on the right border of the schedule. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 401 . These shared parameters can be added to any family. 36 Select the blue crosses that are displayed in the center of each schedule segment to reposition the schedule segments as shown. you create a multi-category schedule. on the File menu. and creating a multi-category schedule. regardless of category. click Save As. and are defined and stored in an external file. Creating a Multi-Category Schedule In this exercise. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Building multi-category schedules. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in pre-defined instance and type parameters either within family components or within the project template. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. 38 Close the exercise file.

You store all of your hardware-related parameters within this group for use in the project. 10 After you add the parameters. 7 Under Parameters. Create parameters in the Hardware group 6 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. Hinge. and Lock Set. click New. under Groups. create a multi-category tag that you use to tag a simple floor plan. and then generate the multi-category schedule. select Text for Type. click New. Shared parameters are saved to an external file. Create a new parameter group to store individual parameters 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. ID. 5 In the New Parameter Group dialog box. enter a file name. enter Closure for Name. If you are working on a network. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. add them to a door family. verify that Hardware is selected for Parameter group. enter Hardware. Create a shared parameter file 1 On the File menu. The shared parameter file (TXT) is created. 3 In the Save As dialog box. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. and click OK. 402 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Create. make sure you save your shared parameter files in a location where other users can access it. Click OK if the alert box indicates that the shared parameter file does not exist. and click OK. and click Save. and assign Text for Type. click Shared Parameters. 9 Add three additional parameters.You create shared parameters. click OK.

18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and click Select. 14 On the Design Bar. setting them as Type parameters. ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Yale for Lock Set. click Family Types. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. The parameters are displayed in the Family Types dialog box. click Add.rfa located in the Common folder. Enter N/A for Closure. click Close to close the file.Add the shared parameters to a family 11 On the File menu. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Instance. 19 Repeat the steps for the other parameters. 20 Assign the new parameters the following values by entering them in the corresponding Value field. 15 In the Family Types dialog box. 22 Save the file as NewDoor in an appropriate location. under Parameters. so that you can use it later in this exercise. You are now working in the Family Editor. and click OK. Enter Chrome for Hinge. 23 On the File menu. The Family Types dialog box displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. click Open. 13 Open c_ Door. select ID. 21 Click OK. select Shared parameter. 12 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 403 . 17 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. Enter 1 for ID. under Parameters.

39 On the File menu. click Close to close the file. 32 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Hardware. 28 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select c_Hardware_Plan. under Parameter Group. 33 Click OK. 31 Under Parameters.e. 26 On Design Bar.. Use the multi-category tag in a project 40 On the File menu. 404 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and click Open. 30 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. select Filter parameter.rvt located in the Common folder. 27 Click at the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog box. 37 Draw a rectangle around the tag. select Multi-Category Tag. ID). click Add. click Lines. 34 Zoom in to the tag at the intersection of the reference planes. as shown.rft in the Annotations folder. A multi-category tag must have at least one label with an external parameter set as a filter parameter. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. This option ensures that this tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter (i. select ID. 35 On the Design Bar. click Label. click Select.Create a multi-category tag 24 On the File menu. and click Open. click . 36 On the Options Bar. 41 In the Open dialog box. the tag cannot attach to any component. 38 Save the file as HardwareTag in an appropriate location. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. NOTE If you do not specify a filter parameter for the tag. Open. 25 In the New dialog box. and click OK twice.

48 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 52 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 43 Replace any existing doors by selecting them and changing their type to the NewDoor type that you just loaded. Create a multi-category schedule 50 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities.42 On the File menu. click Tag. Notice that the HardwareTag is reading the shared parameter that you created earlier and attached to the Door family. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ID Mark Type Family Closure Lock Set NOTE Do not be concerned with duplicate ID and Lock Set fields. 49 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. click Tag All Not Tagged to quickly tag all the components with the filter parameter. 44 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 51 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Multi-Category from the list. 53 Click OK. and load into the project the multi-category tag files HardwareTag. and click OK.rfa that you just created. select the multi-category HardwareTag that you just loaded. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 46 Move your cursor into the drawing window.rfa and NewDoor. 45 In the Type Selector. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 405 . Notice that you can highlight only those components that have the filter parameter that you set earlier to ID. select Multi-Category Tags for Category. 47 Click to place the tag.

55 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise.M_Single-Flush Vision: 864 x 2032 mm 3 . all of the doors in the project would be scheduled. The first schedule that you create is a level-based door schedule that uses a filter to exclude all of the doors that are not on floor three of the building model. The second schedule that you create is a wall schedule that calculates the cost of the walls in the project. View the third floor of the building 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Save As.The multi-category schedule is displayed. expand Views (all). click Schedule/Quantities. Open m_First_Project-West_Wing. However. click Open. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules In this lesson. you want to filter out all doors that are not on level 3 to include only the 11 doors listed above. click the Training Files icon. and double-click Level 3. There are 11 doors of the following types on this level of the building model: ■ ■ ■ 5 . 54 If you want to save your changes. The floor plan is displayed.UK_Single-Flush: SO 1010 x 2410 mm If you created a standard door schedule. You use both filters and a formula to create the second schedule. you create two schedules. on the File menu. based on wall area. Create a new door schedule for level flr 3 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a level based door schedule. 406 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .M_Single-Flush Vision: 915 x 2134 mm 3 .rvt located in the Metric folder. and save the exercise file with a unique name. expand Floor Plans.

Under Name. and it causes the schedule to include only the doors on Level 3. select Hidden Field. select the following fields. select Doors. 15 Click OK twice. The schedule includes the count and type for only doors on floor 3. Verify Schedule building components is selected. The counts for the door types represent the door schedule for the entire model. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. This filter checks each door in the project to see which level it is associated with. 11 Under Field formatting. 10 Under Fields. 12 Right-click the schedule.3 In the New Schedule dialog box. enter Doors . and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Level in the first menu. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules | 407 . under Other. Verify New Construction is selected for Phase. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Level. Select Level 3 in the third menu. click Edit for Filter. Select equals in the second menu. 4 Click OK. click the Fields tab. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Sill Height Head Height Width Level 7 Click the Filter tab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.Level 3. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. click the Filter tab. and specify the following options: ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort by. Hide the Level field in the schedule so it is used only to filter the doors that are not on level 3 and not included as a column in the schedule 9 Click the Formatting tab. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Clear Itemize every instance to group the like door types into one row. 6 Under Available fields. and click View Properties. and select (none) for Filter.

Use the cost values in the following illustration. enter a cost value for each type in the schedule. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 10 Under Fields. 14 Since no cost has been assigned to these wall types. The schedule is displayed. select Cost. 9 Click the Formatting tab. The wall type information for each wall is updated when you enter this data.16 On the Standard toolbar. Create a new schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the following fields. Verify New Construction is selected under Phase. 13 Click OK. 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. click the Fields tab. 8 Clear Itemize every instance to group the like wall types into one row. select Area. 3 Click OK. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula.rvt. click once so the schedule represents only the doors on Flr 3. and then under Field Formatting. you create a wall schedule that provides a total cost of all of the walls in the project based on the total square footage of each wall type. 11 Under Heading. click Schedule/Quantities. enter Cost/Sq. 12 Under Fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Cost Area 6 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Verify Schedule building components is selected. select Walls. 5 Under Available fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 7 Select Family and Type for Sort by. select Calculate totals so that the total area of the each type is calculated. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 408 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . m_First_Project-West_Wing. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula In this exercise. m to more accurately represent the data.

select Total Cost. 23 Click Field Format. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. This is because you did not select to calculate the totals for that field. Scheduling Project Parameters In this lesson. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. 24 In the Format dialog box. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog box. 19 Click OK. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 21 Under Fields. 20 Click the Formatting tab. NOTE The /(1 m^2) in the formula is required to make the resulting value unitless. The schedule is displayed. you learn how to schedule project parameters. and click View Properties. 27 Select Grand totals to have the schedule display the sum of any row for which you selected Calculate totals on the Formatting tab. Scheduling Project Parameters | 409 . Select Fixed for Units. 29 Close the exercise file. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. They cannot be shared with other projects and. under Other. and click OK twice. m column. you cannot use them to tag objects. without the value it would have a unit of area. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box.Determine the total cost for each wall type by multiplying the total area of the wall by the cost per square foot 15 Right-click the schedule. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Project parameters are instance or type parameters that you can use to schedule information specific to the project that you are working with. on the File menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Notice that there is no grand total displayed for the Cost/Sq. click Save As. 25 Click OK. Select 2 decimal places for Rounding. Verify that Number is selected for Type. click Calculated Value. click Edit for Fields. Enter Area * Cost/(1 m^2) for Formula. select Calculate totals to ensure that a total of all the walls is returned. unlike shared parameters. 28 If you want to save your changes. 22 Under Field formatting.

410 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . you create a room schedule for the following office floor plan that includes the project parameter. click Open. The new project parameter Occupant is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog box. 7 Tag the rooms as shown in the following illustration. Under Categories. 5 Click OK. you can add information to the Occupant column in the schedule. and click Drafting. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Occupant. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. Assign the new Occupant parameter to the project and create the room schedule 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Create a project parameter 1 On the Settings menu. After you create the schedule. Enter Occupant for Name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. either by entering it directly. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Rooms to associate the Occupant parameter with the Room category. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Project Parameter. You begin by adding the Occupant parameter to the project and creating the room schedule to include the Occupant parameter as a column in the schedule. click the Training Files icon. click Project Parameters.Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters In this exercise. click Room Tag. or by entering it in the properties of the room tag. click Add to create the new parameter. Open m_Office_2. 4 Click OK.

9 In the New Schedule dialog box. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. on the File menu. click Save As. 13 Add names to the occupant field by entering them directly in the schedule or by entering them in the room tag properties. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson.8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 Close the exercise file. select the following fields. select Rooms to create a room schedule. 11 Under Available fields. Exporting Project Information with ODBC | 411 . and click OK. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Area Department Occupant 12 Click OK to generate the schedule. under Categories. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 14 If you want to save your changes. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. The Occupant field is displayed in the schedule. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.

and open the database in Microsoft Access. click the File Data Source tab. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box. 9 Under Directories. These parameters are exported as well and contain the ID of the key element. under Database. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. enter Revit_Project. and click Next. Additionally.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Building exports. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. click Open. 6 Click Finish. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. Revit Building creates two tables for the following categories of elements: one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). click Create. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description.mdb for Database Name. 1 On the File menu. 13 Close the exercise file. 3 Click New. and click OK to create the database. Open c_Schedules_2. 412 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 12 Click OK in the remaining dialog boxes. instance tables include a “TypeId” column containing the ID of the instance’s type. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. click OK in the dialog box. For example. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. click the Training Files icon. 8 In the New Database dialog box. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog box. click OK. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. and click Next. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. so that each table of elements includes an “Id” column. and some instance tables include a “RoomId” column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. in addition to the Id column. under Database Name. select a location for the database file.rvt located in the Common folder. 10 When the confirmation displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables.

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 413 .Annotating and Dimensioning 14 In this tutorial. and how to annotate and dimension your Autodesk Revit Building projects.

if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 m and Level 2 is 4 m above the base elevation. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and not 1504 m. After you define the levels as shared and relocate the project. while Level 2 reads 4 m. Shared levels report an elevation value relative to an origin that you establish when you relocate the project. For example. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 meters and Level 2 is 4 meters above the base elevation. Project levels report elevation as it relates to other levels in the project. and Level 2 reads 1504 m. Setting the Base Elevation of a House In this exercise. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. Open m_simple_house. the elevation value of the second level of the house (4000 mm above Level 1) reports an elevation of 14000 mm. you relocate the base elevation of a small house from 0 m to 10000 m. You accomplish this in Revit Building by defining levels as either project or shared levels. Level 1 reads 1500 m. expand Views (all). expand Elevations. and double-click South. For example.Setting the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.rvt located in the Metric folder. you can relocate the project at a base elevation of 1500 m and define the levels as shared so that Level 1 reads 1500 m. click the Training Files icon. 414 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. and not 4 m. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at sea level. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. click Open. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

select Shared for Elevation Base. If you did that now. and press ENTER. click . The elevation of the other levels remains the same. you specify the new location of the project. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. By entering 10000 mm in this step. 6 In the Name dialog box. 11 Move the cursor above the elevation line. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.2 Select the Level 1 line. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 Select the Level 2 line. However. and click OK. The south elevation is displayed. 10 Select the Level 1 line. 14 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. Relocate the project 9 On the Tools menu. By selecting the Level 1 line.Shared. 3 On the Options Bar. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. Setting the Base Elevation of a Project | 415 . In order for Level 1 to report the global elevation after the project is relocated.Shared. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. and you must create a new level type. The reported value of Level 2 changes to take the value of the global elevation into consideration. 8 Click OK twice. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. you would change the parameter for all the levels in the Project. you specify the point from which you want to relocate the project. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. enter Level . 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Level : Level . 12 On the View menu. enter 10000 mm. under Constraints. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. Dimensioning In this lesson. In Revit Building. under Elevations. except when you sketch profiles to create families. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. 16 Using the same method. so it reports an elevation of 18000 mm. 416 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . double-click North. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. define the roof level as shared. click Save As. 18 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. there are two types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. on the File menu. as well as other views of the building model. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components.15 In the Project Browser. In this case. 17 If you want to save your changes. permanent dimensions are created automatically. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view.

The different types of dimensions that you can add include aligned. 3 When the centerline of the wall highlights. multi-segmented. select it. Open m_Dimensions. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions. linear. click Dimension. 2 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. 4 Move the cursor over the wall at the very bottom of the view. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. Dimensioning | 417 . By default. that you can add to your drawings. Create permanent dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating Dimensions In this exercise. radial. select it. and when the centerline of the wall highlights. move the cursor over the top straight wall on the floor plan. click the Training Files icon. and angular dimensions.

6 Click the lock. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. click Dimension. Move the cursor below the lowest horizontal wall. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. 418 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . outside of the wall. 8 Dimension the four vertical walls: ■ ■ Select the four vertical wall segments sequentially. An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. In addition.5 Move the cursor to the left. and click to set the location of the dimension. indicating that the dimension can be modified. The dimension displays in the drawing. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. Create multi-segmented dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. The lock displays as locked.

9 Click the equal symbol to make all dimension segment lengths equal. Dimensioning | 419 . 11 On the Options Bar. and the are dimensions permanent and constrained to each other. The slash no longer displays through the equal symbol. click 12 Dimension the curved wall: ■ ■ . Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. indicating that the segments are now equal. Create a radial dimension 10 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Select the curved corner wall to display the radial dimension. and click to place the dimension.

The dimension is snapped to the wall center. and press DELETE. click and select Wall faces for Prefer. click Dimension. Select the inside face of the wall. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Dimension the curved wall again: ■ ■ Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. and place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. 420 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .13 On the View menu. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. 16 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing window. and zoom in around the curved wall. the default dimension option. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

and click to place the dimension. 22 Dimension the vertical wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the top point on the exterior face of the wall. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. click . and click to place the dimension. Dimensioning | 421 . Move your cursor to the right. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. 20 Dimension the slanted wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the inside face of the slanted wall. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. click and verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer.You can now view the radial dimension within the floor plan. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall above it. Create a linear dimension 21 On the Options Bar. You can override the cursor tracking by toggling with the spacebar. as shown in the following illustration. and then select the bottom point of the exterior face. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. Create an angular dimension 19 On the Options Bar. Move your cursor to the left to size the dimension arc.

for a multi-segmented dimension. 3 Move the cursor over the bottom wall. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. m_Dimensions. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. delete. 4 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer bottom wall face. you learn to add. 2 On the Options Bar. a different wall selection choice highlights. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. in some cases. 5 Hover the cursor near the center of the bottom wall. For example. click Modify. When you place dimensions. select it. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. but do not select anything.rvt. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. because the Prefer wall face option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. and press TAB repeatedly.23 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Controlling Witness Line Location. including the wall centerline. click Dimension. However. Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. Override dimension defaults 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 422 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 24 Proceed to the next exercise. Each time you press TAB. 6 When the outside face of the wall highlights.

11 Select the dimension line shown in the following illustration. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. click Modify. The dimension highlights and control boxes display on each witness line. and select it. 8 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall and select the exterior face. Edit dimension witness lines 10 On the Design Bar. Dimensioning | 423 . 9 Place the dimension as shown in the following illustration.7 Move the cursor over the middle horizontal wall.

14 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line at the top wall. 13 Click the control box again.12 Click once on the control box on the lowest witness line. 424 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . The witness line moves to the inside wall face. but do not select it. The witness line moves to the wall centerline.

you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. m_Dimensions. Modifying Dimension Properties. The witness line is deleted. click Modify and select the dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dimensioning | 425 . 19 Proceed to the next exercise. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. If you right-click the control box. 17 Select the outside face of the top wall.rvt. The full dimension string is displayed again. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. a shortcut menu with different options is displayed. and click Delete Witness Line. 18 To end the editing command.15 Right-click the control box. 16 Right-click the remaining dimension line and click Edit Witness Lines.

you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. As you create components. 6 On the Design Bar. Working with Alignments and Constraints. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. if two or more walls are colinear. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. The dimensions update as shown in the following illustration. 426 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. then Up for Read Convention. click . A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the components is moved or modified. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. a lock symbol immediately displays. when sketching walls. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. 5 Click OK twice. select Right. Under Text. on the File menu. For example. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. click Save As. enter 5 mm for the Text Size. 7 If you want to save your changes.2 On the Options Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

The lock symbol displays as unlocked. click the Training Files icon. Open m_Alignment. The short horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. When you align two components.rvt located in the Metric folder. indicating that the alignment of the two walls is now locked. indicating that the Align command is active. 6 Select the lower center wall to define it as the fixed wall to which the other walls will align. The cursor displays two arrows at its tip. indicating the two walls are not constrained to each other.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. Align the three short horizontal walls below the two walls that you aligned 4 On the Tools toolbar. click . Dimensioning | 427 . The symbol changes to a closed lock. 5 On the Options Bar. click Open. Align the two uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Tools toolbar. the first component that you select remains fixed in position. select Multiple Alignment. Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. click 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ . 3 Click the lock. Select the exterior face of the short horizontal wall on the left. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. while the second component moves to complete the alignment.

7 Select the short wall to the left. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the two walls is not constrained (locked). click Modify. 428 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 11 Select the middle wall and drag it downward. 8 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. Do not lock this segment of the alignment.

and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. 16 Select the centerline of Door 4 on the upper right side of the model. click . select Multiple Alignment. NOTE Because you are not aligning walls.12 On the toolbar. the Prefer wall faces or centerline option on the Options Bar does not apply to the doors. Align doors in the floor plan 14 On the Tools toolbar. Dimensioning | 429 . click once to undo the move. 13 Click the right wall. 15 On the Options bar. Move the walls to verify the alignment.

22 Slide the door up or down the wall and notice how the other doors move with it. 20 Select Door 1 and lock it to constrain it to the other doors. Door 3 aligns with Door 4. 18 Click the lock to constrain the movement of the doors.17 Select the centerline of Door 3 to the left. 19 Select Door 2 and lock it to constrain it Doors 3 and 4. click Modify and select one of the aligned doors. 21 On the Design Bar. 430 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

clear Multiple Alignment. 26 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. A lock is displayed. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. click Modify. click . 30 Click the lock to unlock it. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension.Align the windows in the floor plan 23 On the Tools toolbar. indicating the constraint. 29 To view the constraint. on the Design Bar. 28 Select the far right window in the top wall. click and repeat steps 27 .28 to align the windows. The two windows align. 31 On the Tools toolbar. 27 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. Dimensioning | 431 . 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan.

Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. as shown in the following illustration. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. 432 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .rvt.32 Align the remaining windows. 1 View the lower horizontal wall and notice that it includes five windows. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each window displays in the dimension string. m_Alignment.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. 5 Click OK. the windows). indicating the start and end of the dimension string. and save the exercise file with a unique name. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. click Save As. and then Widths. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. 6 Select the lower horizontal wall. click Dimension. Click Options. select Openings. Select Entire Walls for Pick. 7 Move your cursor below the lower horizontal wall and click to add the dimension. Verify Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. Dimensioning | 433 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . The two vertical walls highlight. 3 On the Options Bar.2 On the Design Bar. 8 If you want to save your changes. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

click Dimension. You learn how to create angular dimensions and how to use an equality constraint to space the windows equally.Annotating In this lesson.rvt located in the Common folder. rotate tags with building components. click the Training Files icon. Create angular dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ create angular dimensions. 4 Dimension the three windows near the east entrance by selecting the centerline of each window and placing the dimensions as shown in the following illustration. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating Angular Dimensions In this exercise. you dimension the three windows on a floor plan. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Building. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click . tag doors and windows. 434 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan. Open c_Area.

click Room Tag.rvt. Sequentially Tagging Rooms In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. Tag rooms sequentially 1 On the View menu. The enclosed area that represents the room highlights to indicate that it will be tagged. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. Annotating | 435 .5 Click the equal sign associated with the angular dimension string to equally space the windows. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the room tag. 3 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. c_Area. you sequentially tag the rooms on the floor plan. Sequentially Tagging Rooms.

436 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 6 Place another room tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor into the room below the one previously tagged. Click to place the new tag. click it. and press ENTER. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor.4 On the Design Bar. click Room tag. indicating that it can be edited. click Modify. 5 Zoom in on the tag number. and select the room tag. enter 101. The room tag number displays in blue. Sequential letters are also supported. ■ The second tag that you place displays the sequential number 102. 7 Continue to place room tags.

7 Place the door as shown in the following illustration. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. verify that Tag on placement is selected. You learn how to add a door to the floor plan that includes a tag.rvt. to add a tag with a leader. click Door. 4 Place the door with the tag in the room at the bottom left. Annotating | 437 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Add a door and tag 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place door and window tags. select Tag on Placement to add a tag when you place the door in the floor plan. Tagging Doors and Windows. Place a door with a door tag and leader 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. as shown in the following illustration. and to tag doors and windows that are not tagged. and select Leader. click Door.8 Proceed to the next exercise. c_Area. select a door type that you want to add to the floor plan. and clear Leader. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar.

clear Create. Tag a door after placing it 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Place a door without a tag 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. All of the windows that were not tagged are now tagged. 12 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. select Window Tags. Tag the windows in the floor plan 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Category. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 Under Leader. click Door. click Tag All Not Tagged. select Create. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. 16 Under Leader. 438 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . clear Tag on placement. and click OK. and then click OK. Notice that the door is placed without a tag. verify that Door Tags is selected for Category. The door is tagged with a tag and leader. 10 Place the door below Door 6.

and save the exercise file with a unique name.17 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. click Save As. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. Annotating | 439 .

440 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Viewing 15 In this tutorial. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. how to control fill pattern colors. More specifically. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotation within views. 441 . and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans.

you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. 442 | Chapter 15 Viewing .rvt located in the Metric folder. click Open. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. expand Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Elevations. 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotation within them. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. click . You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotation within building model views. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. Open m_Viewing_Exercise. including elevation and three-dimensional views. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. on the Standard toolbar. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. sections. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. locate the Project Browser. You create elevations. you learn how to access different views of the building model. and double-click East. and three-dimensional (3D) views. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area.

the east elevation. This change is applied only to the active view. click Model Graphics Style. This change is applied only in this elevation view. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. The default name of the view is {3D}. Viewing a Building Model | 443 .Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. scroll down and clear Window Tags. 6 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. click the Annotation Categories tab. and click Hidden Line. Create a 3D view of the building model 9 On the View toolbar. 8 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. 7 Under Visibility. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog box. click .

you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog box. 16 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. 444 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click to reorient the view. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button while moving the mouse.10 On the View toolbar. 12 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. You can pan. under 3D Views. 13 Press and hold CTRL. and click Rename. 19 In the Project Browser. click X to close the view. double-click My 3D View. 11 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. expand Views (all). zoom. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. Save the current 3D view 15 In the Project Browser. . . 18 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 In the Rename View dialog box. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. 14 View the Dynamic View dialog box in the lower left corner of the screen. and expand 3D Views. enter My 3D View. and click OK. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera. The view follows the movement of the cursor. right-click {3D}.

Viewing a Building Model | 445 . expand Floor Plans. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. as shown in the following illustration. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). click Camera. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. and double-click Level 1. and distance from the target.Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. eye height. Cameras define the eye point. and click View. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. outside of the dimension lines.rvt. After you specify the second point (the view target). right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. m_Viewing_Exercise.

down. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. click Dynamically Modify View. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog box. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog box to move the camera position and change the view. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. Press and hold the left mouse button.4 Select the blue grips that display on the crop region of the view and move them to resize the view so the view includes the entire building model. 446 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 7 In the Dynamic View dialog box. Press and hold the left mouse button. Move the cursor up. and sideways to see how the view changes. 5 On the View menu.

Four views of the model display in the drawing area.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. Press and hold the left mouse button. click Tile. Change the camera position. height. and target 12 On the Window menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 13 On the View menu. Viewing a Building Model | 447 . 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view.

The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. 16 Right-click. click 3D View 1. 448 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 15 In the Project Browser.14 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. and move it to another location. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. under Floor Plans. 17 In My 3D View. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). under 3D Views. and click Show Camera.

20 On the View Control Bar. right-click. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. click Model Graphics Style. Click OK. Viewing a Building Model | 449 . enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation.3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. click to create a new 3D view. and click Properties. and click Shading. In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. under Camera. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. 21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration.

450 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click View Properties. 24 Click the section box. as shown in the following illustration. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. select Section Box. A section box is displayed around the model. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box.22 On the View menu. and click OK. A rotation tool is also displayed. under Extents. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model.

double-click Level 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Section View. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Section View In this exercise.26 Click and hold the rotation tool and rotate the section box around the model. m_Viewing_Exercise. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. and maximize this view. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Viewing a Building Model | 451 .rvt.

right-click. double-click the section head. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. and double-click Section 1. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. 3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. click Modify.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Sections (Callout 1). click Section. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. 6 Select the section view. 452 | Chapter 15 Viewing . or in the Project Browser. 8 Select the section line. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. and click Open View. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. select Floor Plan: Level 1. and click Find Referring Views. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. View the section 5 To view the section. 4 On the Design Bar.

under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. Viewing a Building Model | 453 . 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view.rvt. click Elevation.9 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. click Modify. click Modify. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the change in section depth. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. m_Viewing_Exercise. 14 On the Design Bar. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Creating Elevation Views. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. 12 Select the section line. Notice the change in the view direction.

a by default. double-click Level 1. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view.3 Without clicking in the drawing area. Elevation 1 . and click. 5 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . move the cursor around the building model. 454 | Chapter 15 Viewing .b. Do not select the arrow. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. Elevation 1 . 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. under Floor Plans.a. 10 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes.b. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. 4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. double-click Elevation 1 . Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. click Modify. double-click the elevation symbol arrow. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view.

Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. on the File menu. roofs. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. click Save As. In addition. such as Brick on CMU. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 455 . You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model.11 If you want to save your changes. in this case. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. and the insulation color to pink. where each layer is assigned a different material. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. For example. a shade of gray. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. such as the one below. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. and other families. This includes walls. floors. in a compound wall. and applies to phasing override materials as well.

and double-click 3D. 5 In the Color dialog box. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog box. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. 4 Under Cut Pattern. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . select red.rvt located in the Common folder.Filled). click Open. 456 | Chapter 15 Viewing . select Masonry . scroll down and click the Training Files icon.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Sections (Section Head . Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. click Color. 3 In the Materials dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Brick for Name. 2 On the Settings menu. click Materials. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. The surface pattern of the brick is black. expand Views (all). Open c_Showroom. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser under Views. and click OK twice. The brick cut pattern is displayed as red.Level 3. expand 3D Views.

You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. click Materials. 9 In the Materials dialog box. expand Floor Plans. The floor plan in the view is displayed in the Coarse level of detail as indicated by the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. click Color. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. c_Showroom. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail.rvt. 10 Under Surface Pattern. and click OK twice. select Masonry . you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 457 . 11 In the Color dialog box. expand Views (all).Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu.Brick for Name. and double-click Level 1. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type. select white. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.

13 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. By default. click the button in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. 458 | Chapter 15 Viewing . select a shade of gray. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. right-click. and click Fine. click Detail Level. click Modify. under Graphics. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. the Coarse Scale Fill Color parameter (under Graphics) is set to black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. select Solid fill. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Graphics. 11 Zoom in on the arced wall. View the arced wall in fine detail 9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 7 In the Fill Patterns dialog box under Name. double-click Level 2. click Edit/New. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field. 12 If you want to save your changes. and click . and click OK. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 On the View Control Bar. click Save As.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 2 Select the south arced wall. including the current view. 5 In the Color dialog box. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK three times. 8 On the Design Bar. and click Properties.

By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Building. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. or pattern. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. line color. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. and you cannot control their visibility. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. Creating a View Plan Region | 459 . Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Building files. although they may have coincident edges. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only.Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. If you create more than one plan region in a file. line type. refer to the online Help for more information.

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Open. click Plan Region.rvt located in the Metric folder.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. the south elevation is also displayed. 460 | Chapter 15 Viewing . The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. and click View. and double-click Level 1. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. right-click in the Design Bar. View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). In the following illustration. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. expand Floor Plans. Open m_Plan_Region.

you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut plane. and click Properties. As the cursor moves across it. 3 In the Level 1 view.Plan regions have a single property. view range. under Extents. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. and the view depth plane. Press ESC to end the command. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. the top and bottom clip planes. as it is displayed with hidden lines in this view. right-click. click Modify. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. 4 Move the cursor across the area where you sketched the plan region. By selecting Parent View’s Level. click Edit for View Range. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. 8 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. click Finish Sketch. 7 In the View Range dialog box. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. 9 Click Apply. and enter 2800 for the Cut plane Offset. that is similar to the view range for plan views. click Lines. You use the view range property to control cut plane. 5 Select the red dashed line. click . the plan region is displayed as a red dashed rectangle. The plan region is no longer visible. top and bottom clip planes. and then click OK twice. 10 On the Design Bar. Creating a View Plan Region | 461 . Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right.

The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. click Save As. 462 | Chapter 15 Viewing . on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 11 If you want to save your changes.

AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Building that is used to produce rendered views. to place and render decals to create signs. billboards. and posters. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 16 In this tutorial. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Autodesk Revit Building to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. 463 .

After you create the perspective view. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. In this exercise. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. you select a scene that defines the model environment. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. and create the perspective view that you want to render. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. 464 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . the floor. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. When you complete these changes.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model.

4 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit for Structure. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. and click Edit/New. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click the tab in the context menu.Cavity Wall . 3 On the Options Bar.Brick.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Construction. click Open. right-click in the Design Bar. Rendering an Exterior View | 465 . click Wall. verify that Co-house . click . Open m_Cohouse. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry .rvt located in the Metric folder.

click Modify. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. click Edit/New. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. 466 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click . press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. under _accurender. 21 In the Materials dialog box. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog box. 14 On the Options Bar. expand Masonry and click Brick. enter Aluminum.Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. under Name. for Layer 2. 22 In the New Material dialog box. 26 Click OK twice. select Polished. TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. select Site . select Carib.Asphalt. click Materials. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. Polished and click OK. 24 In the Material Library. 19 Click OK four times. 18 In the Materials dialog box. 12 Click OK twice.Running. 27 On the Design Bar. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. 9 Under AccuRender. 23 Under AccuRender. select the curtain wall mullion again. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Name.Brick. click Edit for Structure. and click Aluminum. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. under Name. select Masonry . 8 In the Materials dialog box. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. click Materials. under _accurender.200mm. expand Metals. click Duplicate. under Construction.Plain. . 25 Under Name. 11 Under Name.

floor. select Exterior under Type. click Region Raytrace. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. click No. Rendering an Exterior View | 467 . under Name. click Edit/New. and click OK.29 On the Options Bar. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog box. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. Polished. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. floor. under Materials and Finishes. click . verify that New is selected. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Aluminum. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. . and then click 32 In the Materials dialog box. producing a photorealistic effect. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 33 Click OK three times. click in the Material field.

you place two different types of trees on the building site. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse. expand Views (all). Cnst. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1st Flr.38 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.rvt. Adding Trees to the Site. when you render an exterior view of the model. In a later exercise. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. 468 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. select M_Tree . Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. click Site Component.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. and click to place a tree. Rendering an Exterior View | 469 . right-click in the Design Bar.9 Meters. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Site.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model.

as shown in the following illustration. 13 Under Name. select Black Oak for Type Comments. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. and place two black oak trees. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Other.Create a new type of tree. and click OK. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. and click Site Component. to . click Edit/New. Black. Creating a Perspective View. and click Deciduous. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. enter Black Oak. under Identity Data. 470 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under accurender. select any of the deciduous trees. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. and click OK twice. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. select Oak. 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify. and then click display the Plant Library. click in the Value field for Plant Name.rvt. 15 Under Other. 7 In the Type Selector. expand Trees and Shrubs. 12 In the Plant Library. and click OK. m_Cohouse. 10 In the Name dialog box. click Duplicate.

view open. Rendering an Exterior View | 471 .Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. The new perspective view is displayed. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. Cnst. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. click Camera.

and click Show Camera. expand 3D Views. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. view. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. Cnst. double-click 1st Flr.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Cnst. 472 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.

and click Rename.7 In the Project Browser. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. m_Cohouse. date. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View. place. 8 In the Rename View dialog box. double-click Exterior. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Rendering an Exterior View | 473 . under 3D Views.rvt. you select a scene and specify time. enter Exterior. and click OK. and environment settings that you use to render the view. right-click 3D View 1. lighting. You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

474 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 6 Select By Date. 8 Under Time. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). and click Sun. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. 7 Under Date. Time. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. click Settings. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. under Scene Settings. click the Solar Angles tab.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. under _accurender. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. 26 On the Design Bar. The Ground Plane tab displays. and enter bo. 17 Under Advanced. MA. click Image Size. select Good for Quality. select Grass. under Scene Settings. 16 In the Environment dialog box. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. click No. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. under Scene Settings. select Ground Plane.20 for Cloudiness. 12 Click the Settings Tab. Rye. 20 In the Name list. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar.00 (many clouds. 19 In the Material Library. 13 Enter . Rendering an Exterior View | 475 . select Autumn for Plant Season. click Site. 21 Click OK twice. 18 Click Material. and select Boston. Dark. click Environment. click Raytrace.) 14 Click OK. 11 Scroll down. and click OK. 10 Click in the Cities list. USA.9 Click the Place tab. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. under Background Color. click . The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution.

RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. 32 If you want to save this exercise. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. and finally. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 476 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. on the File menu. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. click Capture Rendering. Adding RPC People In this exercise. Rendering an Interior View. To create the rendered scene. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. define the view and render scene settings. expand Renderings. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. 30 On the Design Bar.Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar.

6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). click Component.rvt. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. Cnst. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. m_Cohouse. 5 On the Options Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). select Rotate after placement. 4 In the Type Selector. and double-click 2nd Flr. 7 Repeat steps 4 . Rendering an Interior View | 477 . 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 478 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. m_Cohouse. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table.8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.rvt. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View.

Rendering an Interior View | 479 . but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. Cnst.The interior perspective is displayed. double-click 2nd Flr. 4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

click Modify.Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and select the section box. 11 On the View menu. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter Interior. and click Rename. and click OK. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. enter 229 mm for Width. and click OK. select Section Box. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. 9 In the Rename View dialog box. click to display the 3D view of the building model. click the dimensions for Size. right-click 3D View 1. Grips are displayed on the section box. 480 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 12 On the View menu. click View Properties. under Size. under Extents. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 178 mm for Height. A section box is displayed around the building model.

By limiting the geometry. and environment settings used to render the view.rvt. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. under 3D Views. date. you reduce the rendering time. This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. you create a render scene to specify the time. Creating a New Render Scene. Rendering an Interior View | 481 . place. m_Cohouse. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.

Time. such as windows and doors. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. under Background Color. click the Solar Angles tab. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View. select Grass. under accurender. 11 Click in the Cities list. 4 Under Type. click OK. 21 In the Name list. and click OK. 482 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 7 Select By Date. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 Click OK twice. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. click Environment. 24 Under Scene Settings. 9 Under Time. on the Main tab. and select Boston. m_Cohouse. 20 In the Material Library. select Ground Plane. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. select Summer for Plant Season. Dark. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 12 Scroll down. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 18 Under Advanced. 17 In the Environment dialog box. select Interior. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. click Site. 19 Click Material. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. select {3D}. MA. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. double-click {3D}. under Scene Settings. under Scene Settings. and enter bo. under Use View’s Section Box. USA. You can select families with transparent materials. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. select New. 13 Click the Settings tab. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. and click Save.rvt. 14 Click Save. and click Sun. and click OK. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. The Ground Plane tab displays. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 10 Click the Place tab. click Settings. as daylight sources. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. Rye. and enter Interior Scene for Name. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 8 Under Date. under 3D Views.

click Radiate. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps.2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog box. begins. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. which can take several minutes. the following rendered view is displayed. click Daylights. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. The radiosity process. 7 On the Design Bar. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click Interior. click Raytrace. Curtain Wall 1). 8 On the Options Bar. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. 5 On the Design Bar. click OK. . Rendering an Interior View | 483 . Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. When radiate completes.

You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building model in Autodesk Revit Building. 484 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Building software. click Save As. on the File menu. The walkthrough path is a spline. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. In a plan view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. elevation. but you can also define it in a 3D. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path.9 If you want to save your changes. or section view. 10 Close the exercise file. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. you must select or define a scene. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough.

and click to specify the start point. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. proceeds through the dining room. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and double-click 1st Floor. expand Floor Plans. of the walkthrough. and click the tab in the context menu. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Walkthrough. and ends in the far corner of the living room. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. click Open. or the first key frame. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Open c_Townhouse. and change unit formats as desired.You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Common folder. right-click in the Design Bar. click Settings ➤ Project Units. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. If you prefer to use Metric values. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. click the Training Files icon. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 485 . 3 On the Options Bar.

10 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 486 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 12 On the View menu. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. expand Walkthroughs. verify Field of view is selected. select the crop boundary. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. If it is not. on the Options Bar. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. click .6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). and double-click Walkthrough 1. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. and select the crop boundary. 11 Under Change. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same.

click Edit Walkthrough. 16 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar.rvt. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 487 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. and click OK. 14 Click . 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog box. c_Townhouse. proceed to the next exercise. The walkthrough plays. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame).13 On the Options Bar. enter 1 for Frame. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 17 Click . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. press ESC. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing.

You can move any camera target or key frame position. under Extents. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. double-click 1st Floor. 6 On the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. 2 On the Options Bar. clear Far Clip Active. 488 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Path for Controls. click . Blue grips are displayed at each key frame.Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip).

Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. select <Shading> for Display mode. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. under Walkthroughs. and click OK. When you export the walkthrough. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.rvt. 1 On the File menu. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. on the File menu. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. or with AccuRender raytracing. 9 On the Options Bar. 2 In the Save As dialog box. c_Townhouse. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. without opening Autodesk Revit Building. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. hidden line. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. double-click Walkthrough 1. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds.7 Click the third key frame position. click Edit Walkthrough. 4 Under Format. The AVI is recorded. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. 3 Under Output Length. and click Save. click Export ➤ AVI. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 489 . 8 If you want to save this exercise. If you are unsure of what option to use. to play the walkthrough. shaded. 5 In the Video Compression dialog box. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. specifying the number of frames. click Save As. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. reducing the size of the image. Recording the Walkthrough. and save the exercise file with a unique name. shaded with edges. specify 10 for Frames per Second. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. It produces files that are larger than compressed files.

490 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. or the client." In Revit Building. and details. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. you explore the stylistic approach. length. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. 491 . a consultant. and Section Boxes. Co-house. elevations. Whether the audience is the general contractor.Presentation Views 17 In this tutorial. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. type. the Linework Tool. In this series of exercises. there are several options for expressing the architecture. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. In this tutorial. A majority of tools in Autodesk Revit Building are intended to describe number. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Building can be found under Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs. an outside reviewer. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. For the realistic approach. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. Using the pre-built building model. sections. To express texture beyond material specifics. Advanced Model Graphics.

you create a presentation floor plan. click Open. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. right-click 2nd Flr. and click Duplicate. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.rvt located in the Metric folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Views (all). A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 492 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . you create a copy of the plan.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. click the Training Files icon. Cnst. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. expand Floor Plans. Open m_Cohouse.

6 Click the Model Categories tab. Down Arrow. click Visibility/Graphics. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the frame.2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. under Floor Plans. click Save As. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. Notice that no annotations display in this view. and clear DOWN Text. navigate to the folder of your choice. and so on in this view. expand the Stairs category. 10 On the File menu. elevations. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. click the Scale control and select 1: 100. and click Save. and click Rename. UP Text. 11 In the Save As directory. sections. dimensions. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Using Advanced Model Graphics. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click OK. this represents the view getting smaller. Cnst. and Up Arrow. 7 Under Visibility.rvt. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 493 . 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. 8 Click OK. This turns off the visibility of all tags. click the Annotation Categories tab.

494 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Under Intensity. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. the darker the shadows. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. ■ ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Within a Project. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. The higher the number. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. specify 35 for Shadow. 2 On the View Control Bar. Under Shadows Properties. you can create. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. click . USA for City. MA. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Time and Place. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. select By Date. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. modify. click the Place tab. At that place. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Sunlight Settings. click the Advanced Model Graphics control.Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box. 5 Under Sunlight Settings. double-click it in the Project Browser.rvt. click for Place. 7 Select Boston. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype.

10 Click OK. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Turn off the ground plane shadows 12 On the View Control Bar. specify 10/27/2004 for Date and 1:00:00 PM for Time. you can enter any city you wish. clear Ground Plane. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Cnst. . 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. click OK. be aware that if you enter a different city. however. select Ground Plane and select 1st Flr. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. for At Level. click OK. 16 On the File menu. and click OK.NOTE For this step. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. click Save. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. click This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. under Sunlight Settings. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 495 . 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 9 Under Sunlight Settings. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view.

6 On the Design Bar. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and notice a view title displays. and click to place it. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. 4 In the Views dialog box. Notice the blank sheet is portrait oriented. 496 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . TIP If the View tab is not available. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. and click View. right-click the Design Bar. click Sheet. click Modify. click Add View. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click OK. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Arch Portrait. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. and click OK. click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 9 On the Options Bar. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 497 . under Graphics. and click OK. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. enter Presentation. For this analytique. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 12 In the Name dialog box. select No for Show Title. click . Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. To accomplish this.

use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. 20 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. 19 On the Options Bar.Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click Filled Region. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. and select Chain. and draw a rectangle around the view as shown. fill properties. and click Activate View. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 498 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click . 18 On the Options Bar. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. and the boundary of the region. click . 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Invisible Lines. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 17 In the Type Selector. If necessary. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant.

When you are finished drawing the chain. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. scroll down. click the Fill Pattern value and the arrow that displays within it. select the entire chain (use TAB ) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 499 . under Identity Data. 30 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 23 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. 29 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. you create an elevation and add it to the Presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. and click OK.TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. and click OK. 33 On the File menu. enter Solid Black. 24 In the Name dialog box. 21 On the Design Bar. click OK. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. Name the sheet 31 Right-click the edge of the sheet. under Graphics. click Duplicate. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. 34 Proceed with the next lesson. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. and click Deactivate View. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. click Save. click Finish Sketch. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click Edit/New. under Name. 27 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Solid Fill.

under Views (all).rvt. 500 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. and click Duplicate. expand Elevations. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique In this exercise. right-click South. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.

specify 35 for Shadow. under Sunlight Settings. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 501 . click . expand the Walls category. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. specify 2:30:00 PM for Time. 8 Click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click Duplicate. and click OK. 6 Under Visibility. scroll up. right-click Copy of South. and clear Elevation Swing. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. 12 Under Intensity. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. enter Presentation South Elevation. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 13 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and clear Surface Pattern. select Cast Shadows. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. and click OK. on the Model Categories tab. expand the Doors category. under Visibility. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. By changing the angle of the sun. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename. scroll down. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 15 In the Name dialog box. 11 Under Shadow Properties. Apply advanced model graphics 9 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click OK.2 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 7 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.

19 Proceed with the next exercise. under Views (all). click Save. 502 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .rvt. Add view to sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. 3 In the Views dialog box. and click Add View to Sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet.18 On the File menu. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise.Presentation. expand Sheets. and double-click A105 . click Add View.

5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. Notice the view title no longer displays. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 503 .Notice the viewport displays a view title.

click Save. 9 Proceed with the next lesson.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 504 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 8 On the File menu. Adding Section Views to the Analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views.

Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and use the flip arrows if necessary. 4 Add the section shown below. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). click Section. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 505 . TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. double-click 1st Flr. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Cnst. select 1: 100 for Scale. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. Adjust the controls to modify the extents.

Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. 7 On the Options Bar. 506 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . expand Sections (Callout 1). you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. To accomplish this. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. click Callout. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 2. select 1: 100 for Scale. To fit correctly in the analytique.Section 2 is added to the building model. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees.

14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. 10 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. 15 Under Visibility. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 16 Under Visibility. and clear Elevation Swing. and click OK. expand the Walls category. scroll up. 12 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Presentation Section 2. enter Presentation Section 2. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 507 . expand the Doors category. and clear Surface Pattern. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). right-click Callout of Section 2. and click Rename. scroll down. 11 In the Rename View dialog box. click the Model Categories tab.

under Extents. 23 On the File menu. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box.17 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 18 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Save. clear Crop Region Visible. Notice the crop region no longer displays. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. click . Hide the crop boundary 20 Select the crop boundary. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View. 508 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 19 Click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.

3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 2 On the View Control Bar. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. Under Shadows Properties. under Sunlight Settings. 5 In the Name dialog box. In the steps that follow. Click Apply. double-click Presentation Section 2. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify 35 for Shadow. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. In addition. click Apply.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. Under Intensity. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click .rvt. under Sections (Callout 1). Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. select Relative to View. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click Duplicate. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. select Cast Shadows. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. select Directly. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 509 . 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. open the Project Browser and. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. TIP You may need to move the dialog box off to the side in order to see the view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK.

under Silhouette Edges.TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. click Save. was added to this dataset for training purposes. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click OK. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Apply silhouette edges 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. 10 On the File menu. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. 510 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select Override Silhouettes. Silhouette Edges. NOTE The line style. 11 Proceed with the next exercise. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model.

click Modify.rvt. 6 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Section 2. under Sheets (all). Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 511 . double-click A105 . and click to place the selected view. 5 In the Type Selector. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. 3 In the Views dialog box. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Add View to Sheet. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. The view title no longer displays. click Add View.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Viewport: Presentation.Presentation.

under Sections (Callout 1). In the steps that follow. double-click Section 2. you click to specify the start radius. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. click . To rotate an object. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and press ENTER. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. Using a clock as a reference.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 512 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise.

Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. Notice the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. the callout rotates 180 degrees. double-click A105 . 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 513 . under Sheets (all). Notice that the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.Presentation.

Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. After applying the view template to a new section view. click Modify. 514 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 15 On the Design Bar. 16 On the File menu. click Save. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. and drag it up and to the left as shown. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport.

click OK. Now. click Apply View Template. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Section 1. you can simply apply the presentation view template. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. 3 In the New View Template dialog box. 2 On the View menu. enter Presentation. under Sections (Type 1).Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Section 1. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. 7 In the Rename View dialog box. and click OK. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 515 . double-click Presentation Section 2. and click Duplicate. under Sections (Callout 1). 4 In the View Templates dialog box. right-click Copy of Section 1.rvt. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. click Save as View Template.

12 In the Views dialog box. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. and elevation swings no longer display. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. select Viewport: Presentation. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for View Rotation on Sheet. select Presentation. lighting fixtures.9 In the Select View Template dialog box. 15 Right-click the viewport. and click OK. click Add View. 14 In the Type Selector. annotations. Notice the furniture. double-click A105 .Presentation. under Graphics. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select Section: Presentation Section 1. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and click Activate View. 516 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 18 Right-click the viewport. under Sheets (all). click View Properties. and click Deactivate View. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 On the View menu.

Working in a Callout Analytique. click Save. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. such as a tracery window or column capital. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.20 On the File menu. In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique Traditional analytiques typically contain a detail. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 517 .

rvt. right-click Callout of Section 1. and click Rename. After you add the callout. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Callout 1). and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. 4 In the Project Browser. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. select the callout. double-click Section 1. and click OK. enter Presentation Callout. 518 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Callout. 5 In the Rename View dialog box.

under Sections (Callout 1).6 In the Project Browser. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 519 . This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. and click OK. 8 Right-click. and click View Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Presentation Callout. under Extents. clear Crop Region Visible.

Presentation. and move it into the position shown below. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. select Custom for View Scale. click View Properties. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 In the Views dialog box. and click Deactivate View. 15 On the Design Bar. 520 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. and click OK. select Viewport: Presentation. click Modify. under Sheets (all). 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. double-click A105 . select Section: Presentation Callout. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 17 On the View menu.

You do not have to replicate the image exactly. double-click Presentation Callout.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. select Solid Black for Type. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 521 . Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. activate the viewport. under Sections (Callout 1). You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog box. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. and make adjustments as necessary. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. 23 On the Design Bar. When finished. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. click Region Properties. click Filled Region. In the steps that follow. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box.

28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all).26 On the Project Browser. click Filled Region. double-click A105 .Presentation. and sketch the rectangle shown below. Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. click . and click Activate View. 522 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 29 On the Options Bar.

under Extents. click View Properties. select Crop Region Visible. click Finish Sketch. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. 31 On the View menu. 33 Select the crop region. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 523 . and click OK. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box.30 On the Design Bar.

you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes. clear Crop Region Visible. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. and click OK. click Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 35 In the Element Properties dialog box.34 On the View menu. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. under Extents. click View Properties. and click Deactivate View. 524 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 37 On the File menu.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. double-click Isometric.s and apply shadows to the views. 3 On the View Control Bar. click the Scale control. and click 1: 200.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 2 On the View menu. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaway. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 525 . click Orient ➤ Southwest. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. You then add each view to the presentation sheet.

10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Override Silhouettes. under Sunlight Settings. right-click Isometric 1. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. 16 In the Rename View dialog box. Select Ground Plane. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. click . 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK. 13 In the Rename View dialog box. Select Relative to View. under 3D Views. and click OK. under Silhouette Edges. 7 In the Name dialog box. Under Intensity. under 3D Views. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. click View Properties. Cnst. double-click Isometric 2. 9 Click OK. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. and click Rename. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. and click Rename. right-click Isometric. enter Isometric 1.5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. 526 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click OK. click Duplicate. 14 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 2. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. and click OK. and click Duplicate. Under Shadows Properties. for At Level. under Extents. 18 On the View menu. under 3D Views. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select 1st Flr. under 3D Views. and click OK. specify 35 for Shadow. select Section Box. 15 In the Project Browser. select Cast Shadows. Under Sun and Shadows Settings.

You can use this to rotate the section box.20 Select the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 527 . These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. When you are finished. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol.

double-click Isometric 3. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. When you are finished. under Extents. click View Properties. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. click Modify on the Design Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. select Crop Region. under 3D Views. 528 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Before turning off the visibility of the section box. under 3D Views. select Crop Region. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. 25 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. clear Crop Region Visible. and click Rename. 24 In the Rename View dialog box. right-click Isometric 2. and click Duplicate. enter Isometric 3. under 3D Views. 26 On the View menu. Notice the section box no longer displays. either adjust the plane location. 29 Select the section box. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. under 3D Views. double-click Isometric 2. and click OK. and click OK. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. clear Crop Region Visible. make a copy of the view. click View Properties. 31 On the View menu. the stairs and railings may display. 22 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Extents. In such a case.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 529 . Notice the filled region partially covers the view. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. in the Type Selector. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. double-click A105 .Next. under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). in the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation.Presentation. in the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. under 3D Views. 36 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. 35 In the Project Browser. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. 34 In the Project Browser.

select Transparent for Background. 39 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 43 On the Design Bar. The image below shows the lines redrawn. This will make it easier to draw lines.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Edit. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 44 Using the drawing tools. and then click Edit/New. 42 Click OK twice. click Region Properties. under Graphics. 38 Select the poche filled region. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. and click Activate View. click Lines. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. 41 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Concrete for Type. 530 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

and click OK. click Save. a cutaway perspective view. 46 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 531 . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. you create the final view for the analytique. you add it to the presentation sheet. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. and click Deactivate View. click Finish Sketch. 47 On the Design Bar. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. select Solid Black for Type. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views.45 On the Design Bar. 49 On the File menu. click Region Properties. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view.

Cnst. 532 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Camera.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. double-click 1st Flr. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. The view opens immediately. under Floor Plans. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. then you specify the eye direction and range.

9 Under Silhouette Edges.4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. 5 On the View Control Bar. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Under Intensity. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Under Shadows Properties. specify 35 for Shadow. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 533 . click . click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click OK. under Silhouette Edges. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. select Override Silhouettes.

You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. and click OK. Notice the controls that display on each plane. select Section Box. 534 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Add a section box 10 On the View menu. A section box now cuts through the building model. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Extents. 12 Select the section box. click View Properties.

Because scale does not apply to perspective views. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport: Presentation. under Change. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).Presentation. 17 Under Size. you must specify the actual size of the image. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. 18 On the View menu. click Size. and click OK. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. click View Properties. select Scale (locked proportions). Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 535 . 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click A105 . clear Crop Region Visible. 21 In the Project Browser. under Extents. enter 165 mm for Width. drag 3D View 2 onto the presentation sheet. under 3D Views.14 Select the crop boundary. and click OK. After placing it.

3 In the Element Properties dialog box. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. specify a text size of 6 mm. Annotating the Analytique. and click OK. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. and click OK. and click OK. enter Description.rvt. 5 In the Name dialog box. click . under Text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Text. click Edit/New. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Title. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. click Edit/New. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. select the same font as the title. click Duplicate. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. specify a text size of 40 mm. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. click Save. 9 In the Name dialog box. click OK. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Title. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 536 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click Text. click Duplicate.22 On the File menu. select a font.

17 On the Design Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 537 . 15 In the Type Selector. click Save. click Modify. select Description. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 18 On the File menu.

538 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

About Families and the Family Editor 18 All elements in Autodesk Revit Building are “family based.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Building to help you manage your data and make changes easily. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. they are still related and come from a single source. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. each with a different size. thus the term family. shape. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. In this tutorial. material set. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. 539 .

exterior. for example. You also learn about the Family Editor. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. The basic walls system family. and roofs are examples of these types of families. and roofs. and when and how to use it. For example. Using the Family Editor. This makes file management much easier. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . while many more are stored in component libraries. In addition. but you cannot create new system families. Walls. generic. has wall types that define interior. exceptions to this rule. there is another type of family that allows you create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Building recognize it as a particular component type. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. such as a dome roof. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. In this lesson. foundation. and partition wall styles. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Building and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. There are. floors. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Building is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. 540 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor .rfa extension. Revit Building has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Building and comprise principle building components such as walls. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. because there is only one file to track. however. floors. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components.

The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. You can load them into projects. Using Families and the Family Editor | 541 . and furniture. You create in-place families only within the current project. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project.Family templates are either host-based or standalone. Host-based families have components that require hosts. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. and also a standalone furniture family component. so they are useful for objects unique to that project.rfa extension. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. custom wall treatments. Standalone families include columns. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. trees. for example. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. transfer them from one project to another.

This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. such as plan. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. If you find a close match.Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. you can click File ➤ Open. you can double-click any file with an . or 3D. 542 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. However. elevation. Within the Windows® environment. consider checking the web library and other web resources. how to access it. it opens within the Family Editor. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. 3 Next. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. presume it is a bay window that you require. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. modify it as needed. or you can load it using the Load From Library. In this exercise. To add a family to your project. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. if you have exhausted your external resources. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. and when to use it. if you change the original family. open it in the Family Editor. and click Open. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. With Revit Building open. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. you learned about the different types of Revit Building families and when to use them. In this section. such as newsgroups. how to access it. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. In the final exercise. you can drag it into the document window. you learn about the Family Editor. and then load it into the project. navigate to a family file. After the family has been loaded in the project. In this case. select the appropriate template. and click Open. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction.rfa extension and it will open Revit Building in the Family Editor. you learn when to use the Family Editor. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. it should be available within the Type Selector. When the family opens. 2 On the File menu. To start a new family. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. Load Family command on the File menu. it is saved with the project. 5 Finally.

5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. Using Families and the Family Editor | 543 . 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 9 Save the newly-defined family.General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry.

544 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor .

you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. In each lesson.Creating Components in the Family Editor 19 In this tutorial. Using the installed templates. not within the Family Editor. you learn how to create specific Autodesk Revit Building families. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. When you create an in-place family. a lighting fixture. You create a furniture family. you create an in-place family. In addition. and several annotation families. you create it within the project file. 545 . you learn how to create a different type of component.

The door type has a variable height and width. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. 546 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Creating a Door Family In this lesson. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. height. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. and thickness.

part of the door properties. Creating a Door Family | 547 . Floor Plan: Ref. 5 On the Window menu. select Doors [projection]. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. click . and represent the door opening profile. 4 On the View menu. click Symbolic Lines. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. 9 In the Type Selector. 7 Enter ZF. click Tile.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. Notice the four tiled views. are also displayed. Select Metric Door. 10 On the Options Bar. Labelled dimensions. click New ➤ Family. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit.rft. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. 6 Maximize the window. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. and click Open. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. Level. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. 2 On the File menu. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar.

click Dimension. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 548 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

19 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. select Thickness for Label. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. Creating a Door Family | 549 . a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. select Width for Label. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. click Modify.

then you specify each end point.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. 23 On the Options Bar. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. you first specify the arc center. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. When drawing an arc from center and end points. In the image below. 22 In the Type selector. along with the witness line controls. and select the command from the menu. 24 Enter SI. select Plan Swing [cut]. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Symbolic Lines. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. as shown. click . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry. 550 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 On the Design Bar. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. click the down arrow button.

enter 50 mm for Depth.1 In the Project Browser. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. click Finish Sketch. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 3 On the Design Bar. double-click Left. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click . under Specify a new Work Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click Exterior. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating a Door Family | 551 . and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. 8 On the Design Bar. click Lines. under Elevations. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations.

10 On the Design Bar. 552 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify and select the dimension. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. select Thickness for Label. 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Level. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. double-click Ref. then click to specify the dimension witness line. click Dimension. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion.

under Materials and Finishes. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. and When cut in Plan/RCP. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. 7 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. for Material. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. and Fine are selected. 2 In the Materials dialog box.Dark.No Gloss. 3 In the New Material dialog box.16 Select the door leaf extrusion. under AccuRender. 4 In the Materials dialog box. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. Left/Right. select Panel for Subcategory. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. Medium. under Name. and click OK. select Oak Door. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. Assigning Materials to the Door Components. under View Specific Display. click Modify.Red/Stained. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. select Front/Back. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. Creating a Door Family | 553 . It also defines its appearance when rendered. click for Texture. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. click OK. 20 On the Options Bar. click . you assign a material to the door leaf. and click OK. 6 Click OK. enter Oak Door for Name. click . 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. verify that Coarse. click Duplicate. click Visibility. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. and clear Plan/RCP. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 Under Detail Levels. click Materials. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. The solid geometry of the door is now complete.

for Material. The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click View 1. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser.15 On the Options Bar. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. and select Shading with Edges. click the Model Graphics Style control. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. 554 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click OK. select Oak Door for Name. under 3D Views. under Views (all). click . 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 On the View Control Bar. click 17 In the Materials dialog box.

enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. enter 2500 mm for Height. By flexing the new component. click Family Types. Click Apply. enter 2000 mm for Height. Under Other. 24 On the Design Bar. In the Family Types dialog box.The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. Click Apply. 27 Click OK. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Enter 1000 mm for Width. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Under Other. Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. Defining New Door Types Creating a Door Family | 555 . 25 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project.

7 In the Family Types dialog box.Defining New Door Types In this exercise. Click Apply. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rte is the Template file. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. click New ➤ Project. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. 12 On the File menu. 18 In the Open dialog box. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 20 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long.rfa. click Family Types. click New. and click OK. 5 Under Family Types. click Save. click Wall. enter 2000 mm for Height.rfa. Training Door. 8 Under Family Types. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. and click OK. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. select it. 3 In the Name dialog box. click New. Enter 925 mm for Width. and click Open. under Template file. enter 2100 mm for Height. Click Apply. 6 In the Name dialog box. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. Under Create new. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. 15 In the New Project dialog box. click Load. select Project. and click OK. Define the third new door type. Place new door types in the project 19 On the Design Bar. click Door. 556 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click New. verify that DefaultMetric. Enter 1220 mm for Width. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2134 mm for Height. 11 Click OK. Define the second new door type. under Family Types. 9 In the Name dialog box. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. Training Door. Enter 750 mm for Width. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 17 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

click the Model Graphics Style control. click . 25 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. 26 In the Type Selector. 22 On the View Control Bar. 24 In the Type Selector. Creating a Door Family | 557 . select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm.21 On the View toolbar. and select Shading with Edges. 23 On the Design Bar. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 27 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. click Door.

30 You can close all files without saving. glazing and mullions as extrusions. and create the window sash as a sweep. 29 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. height. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. Finally.28 In the Type Selector. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. and specify values for the window width. Creating a Door Family. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. 558 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . default sill height. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. You create the window frame. and mullion offset. This completes the lesson.

5 On the View menu. click New ➤ Family 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. you specify the parameters for the new window family. Labelled dimensions. are also displayed. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. Four views are tiled on your display. and click Open. click Tile. Select Metric Window. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. The window type has a variable height and width. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. 4 On the Window menu.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. equally spaced vertical mullions. 2 On the File menu. part of the window properties.rft. Creating a Window Family | 559 . and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 7 Enter ZF.

then sketching the sweep profile. and click Apply. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. Click Apply. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. is one of the type parameters. enter 1300 mm for Height. The label name. This is the starting point for the new window. When you add labels to dimensions. click Family Types. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1800 mm for Width. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. and click Apply. 560 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Change the height and width values again. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry. Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. 12 Click OK. Height and Default Sill Height. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. also one of the window properties. This process is called “flexing the model. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Sketch Profile. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. click Finish Path. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. Snap the cursor to each corner. 11 On the Design Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm. click . click Ref Plane.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. click . 9 On the View Control Bar. and click Open View. 3 On the Design Bar. select Elevation: Right. 4 On the Options Bar. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 561 . 12 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click the Scale control. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. click Sketch 2D Path. and select 1:10. 2 On the Design Bar. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall.

14 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Sash for the Name. click Lines. click Dimension. 17 On the Design Bar. 24 Below the red dot. 20 On the Options Bar. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. and click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. select Chain and click . and select the dimension. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. select Prefer: Wall faces. click Modify. click Modify. 562 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. and select the reference plane. click . sketch the frame profile approximately as shown.

NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. When the lock displays. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. However. When the lock displays. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. 25 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section. click Modify. 26 Select the right edge of the frame section. the exact dimensions are not critical. Creating a Window Family | 563 .

28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays. select the line you want to move. click Modify. 564 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and specify the dimension value. click Dimension. TIP After adding the dimension. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. 29 On the Design Bar. as shown. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. click it to lock the line to the reference plane.

33 On the Tools toolbar. 37 In the Project Browser. 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. 35 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. Creating a Window Family | 565 . click the lock to constrain the present value. Next. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. under Views (all).Modify each dimension if necessary. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. zoom out until it displays. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. click . If necessary. this is the top of the window opening. and double-click View 1. click Finish Sweep. 36 On the Design Bar. click Finish Profile. When the lock displays. When the lock displays. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. click the lock to constrain the present value.

Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Lines. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box.38 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and select Lock. 2 On the Design Bar. 566 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. click . press TAB to cycle through the selection options. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. click Set Work Plane. 5 On the Options Bar. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry. under Elevations. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 On the Design Bar. Chain of walls or lines. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion.45 mm for Depth. and select the option. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. and enter .

and lock icons display on each line. Enter . Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. set the following options: ■ ■ Click . Creating a Window Family | 567 . ■ Click . You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame.The entire sash outline is selected.50 mm for Offset.

Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. The window sash extrusion is now complete. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. 568 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Right. under Elevations. click Finish Sketch. 11 In the Project Browser. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. under 3D Views.9 On the Design Bar. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry.

Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating a Window Family | 569 . you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. and enter 30 mm for Offset. as shown. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. 2 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. under Elevations. click . 3 On the Options Bar.

570 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. click Dimension.5 On the Design Bar.

double-click Exterior. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. and select Lock. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. 9 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. and click to create the glass boundary. 13 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. under Identity Data. under Elevations. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the reference plane. and click OK. and click OK. click . enter 12 mm for Depth. click . 15 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box.7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 In the Project Browser. click Set Work Plane. Creating a Window Family | 571 . click Lines.

Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 572 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. under 3D Views. double-click View 1. under Elevations. 20 Select the glass extrusion. 24 In the Project Browser. sash. 23 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. and click OK.18 On the Design Bar. After the family is loaded into a project. double-click Right. 21 On the Options Bar. click . View the window model with frame. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. click Modify.

Click OK. 27 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. click Family Types. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 1000 mm for Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Under Other. For example. Click Apply. enter 1500 mm for Height. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Enter 2000 mm for Width. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry. NOTE After flexing the model. Click Apply. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Creating a Window Family | 573 .Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar.

2 On the Design Bar. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. the exact location is not critical. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. 574 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. click Dimension. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. After adding the dimension.Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior. under Elevations. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. click Ref Plane.

Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. select <Add parameter. as shown. Creating a Window Family | 575 . 9 On the Options Bar... Do not be concerned with dimension values.> for Label. Do not be concerned with dimension values. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. click Modify. as shown.5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it.

enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. Under Parameter Data. enter Mullion Offset for Name. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. 14 Click the dimension value. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. Under Group parameter under. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. select Family parameter. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. 576 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. under Dimensions. 15 On the Design Bar. Click OK. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar. and enter 350 mm as the new value. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. Select Instance. click Family Types. select Dimensions. and click OK.10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

click Modify. move the dimension value as shown. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. and click OK. As you did before. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 22 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. enter 14 mm for Depth. However. 21 In the Work Plane dialog box. 20 On the Design Bar. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. After you complete the sketch. and click . click Set Work Plane. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions.17 On the Options Bar. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. 18 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. Creating a Window Family | 577 . select Mullion Offset for Label. under Specify a new Work Plane.

click Modify. click Dimension. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. 29 On the Design Bar.26 On the Design Bar. 578 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 30 On the Options Bar. 28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. Move the dimension values as shown. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. select <Add parameter> for Label. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion.

Select Type. Under Parameter Data. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. ■ ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. click Finish Sketch. This is changed in later steps.31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 33 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 579 . Click OK. and on the Options Bar. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. Select the dimension. Remember. select Family parameter. select Mullion Width for Label. Under Group parameter under. enter Mullion Width for Name. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. select Dimensions. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. 32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown.

Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. NOTE After flexing the model. and aligned with the sash edge. click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Click Apply. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. enter 1500 mm for Height. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. 580 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . In this case. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. and click Apply. or undoing the same. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. evenly spaced. Under Other. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. 41 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. click Set Work Plane. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. 39 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Design Bar.37 In the Family Types dialog box. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. click Lines. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Click OK. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. 42 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. click Dimension. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. click Dimension. click . enter 1000 mm for Height. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. Under Other. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. and click OK. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. as shown. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. Creating a Window Family | 581 . Enter 2000 mm for Width. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar.

Remember. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. ■ ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar.48 On the Design Bar. Select the dimension. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. click Modify. 49 On the Options Bar. 582 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Move the dimension value as shown. select Mullion Width for Label. select Mullion Width for Label.

Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. 54 In the Project Browser. click Family Types. 56 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. and select the vertical mullions. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. so when you open the Family Types dialog box.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. double-click View 1. Creating a Window Family | 583 . you can still see the window. If necessary. click Join Geometry. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area.

enter 1500 mm for Height. enter 1000 mm for Height. 584 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click Apply. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. Click Apply. Enter 2000 mm for Width. Under Other. Click OK. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. sash. Enter 1500 mm for Width.57 In the Family Types dialog box. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. you assign materials to the frame. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Under Other. 58 In the Family Types dialog box. Assigning Materials to the Window Components.

under Elevations. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. 9 Select the window frame sweep. 4 In the Materials dialog box. select Stained. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. click the Model Graphics Style control. 8 On the View Control Bar. click OK. and click OK. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. click Materials. and select Shading with Edges. click Duplicate. and click OK.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter Pine Frame for Name. 2 In the Materials dialog box. sash. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. No Gloss. Dark. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. 6 In the Materials dialog box. Creating a Window Family | 585 . 3 In the New Material dialog box. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. under AccuRender. double-click Exterior. Yellow/. and the mullions. click for Texture. the sash.

13 In the Materials dialog box. select Pine Frame for Name. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. 24 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 23 Under Detail Levels. under Graphics. 21 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. click for Material. 18 On the Design Bar. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). clear the other view options. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. click . under View Specific Display. 16 Under Detail Levels. and click OK. and Fine are selected. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Edit for Visibility. 586 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and Fine are selected. under 3D Views. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. under View Specific Display. and click OK. verify that Coarse.10 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. click Modify. double-click View 1. 20 Select the glass extrusion. Medium. Medium. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. click Visibility. verify that Coarse. double-click Right. click OK.

mullions. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. sash.25 Zoom in on a window corner. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. Creating a Window Family | 587 . You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. Defining New Window Types. The window frame. and glass display their assigned materials. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.

Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. and click OK. 3 In the Family Types dialog box. In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. 2 On the Design Bar. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. enter 2000 mm for Height. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. 588 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

click New.The window height is doubled. enter 1000 mm for Height. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. Enter 1250 mm for Height. Creating a Window Family | 589 . enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. 9 Under Family Types. under Family Types. and click OK. click New. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. Click Apply. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. 10 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. and click Apply. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. 7 In the Name dialog box. 5 In the Family Types dialog box.

click Save. 20 In the Open dialog box. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 32 On the View menu. click Wall. Enter 1500 mm for Height. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. 13 In the Name dialog box. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. click Window. click Modify. click Load. click Window. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. 590 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. 31 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. 29 In the Type Selector. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. 23 On the Design Bar. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. select it. 15 On the File menu. Training Window. 24 On the Options Bar. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall.rfa. Enter 1300 mm for Height. Notice the detail that displays. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 33 Zoom in on the center window. click Thin Lines. 19 On the Options Bar. navigate to the location of your Training Window. click to start a new project based on your default template. Click Apply.11 In the Family Types dialog box. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. 25 In the Type Selector. clear Tag on Placement. and click Open. click New. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h.rfa file. 27 In the Type Selector.

drawer base. click the Model Graphics Style control.34 On the View toolbar. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. 35 On the View Control Bar. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. rolltop. and drawers as extrusions. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. Creating a Furniture Family | 591 . You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. Finally. and select Shading with Edges. You begin by creating the desktop. click .

9 On the Design Bar. 4 Maximize the view. their exact location is not critical. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. click Ref Plane. 6 On the Design Bar. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. 2 On the File menu. 592 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Open. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Level. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes.Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. Select Metric Furniture. click New ➤ Family.rft. click Dimension. they represent the furniture centerline axes. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. Floor Plan: Ref. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. 5 On the View menu. NOTE When you draw the reference planes.

Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal.10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. as shown. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. Creating a Furniture Family | 593 . add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the left reference plane. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. and ending at the right reference plane. click Modify.

594 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. as shown. and ending at the lower reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. as shown. click Dimension. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal.15 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. click Modify. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. horizontal reference plane. 19 Select the upper.18 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 595 . TIP To do this. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. Afterwards.

Under Parameter Data.23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. Click OK. select Dimensions. For Group parameter under. Click OK.. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension.. select Dimensions. Select Type. enter Length for Name. Under Parameter Data. select Family parameter. select <Add parameter.. select Family parameter.> for Label. 27 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. For Group parameter under.> for Label. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 596 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .. enter Depth for Name. 24 On the Options Bar. Select Type. select <Add parameter.

click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 30 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. Click Apply.These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 3000 mm for Length. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Therefore. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating a Furniture Family | 597 . you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. you can still see the model. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry. enter 2000 mm for Length. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. Click Apply. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. it will also adapt to the same changes. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise.

select Level: Ref. and click to select all four symbolic lines. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. double-click Front. click Finish Sketch. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. and enter 100 mm for Depth. click . click . 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. Your lines may have a lighter weight.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. 2 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 8 On the Options Bar. Level for Name. and click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Symbolic Lines. under Elevations. click Set Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. 11 In the Project Browser. 598 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. NOTE In the image below. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. 5 On the Design Bar. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar.

Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. click Modify. 22 On the Options Bar. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating a Furniture Family | 599 . and select the top edge. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar.> for Label. select <Add parameter. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. and select the bottom edge. click Dimension. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. as shown.. 12 On the Design Bar..The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level.

Click OK. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. click Family Types. enter Thickness for Name. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 600 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click Apply. Click OK. enter 2000 mm for Length. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. select Dimensions. Select Type. click Modify.. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. For Group parameter under. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. select Dimensions. Under Parameter Data. and click Apply.> for Label. you can still see the model. 29 On the Design Bar. enter Height for Name. select Family parameter. Click OK. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. Enter 750 mm for Height. For Group parameter under. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. select Family parameter.23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select <Add parameter.. 27 On the Design Bar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry. enter 4000 mm for Length. 25 On the Options Bar. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. and click Apply. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension.

3 On the Options Bar. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. 2 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 100 mm for Offset. click . click Ref Plane. under Floor Plans. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Ref. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Click the lock icon as shown. Level. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. Creating a Furniture Family | 601 .

under Specify a new Work Plane. Lock the dimension as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Lines. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. click . click Set Work Plane.8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. as shown. Level for Name. 13 On the Options Bar. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. and click OK. select Level: Ref. 10 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 602 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

16 On the Design Bar. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base.After you complete the rectangle. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. two lock icons display. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. Creating a Furniture Family | 603 . click Dimension.

18 On the Design Bar. click . A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. using the TAB key. 22 On the Tools toolbar. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. click Modify. 23 For the align-to reference. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. You can also highlight the entire line chain. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. click the Mirror tool. as shown below at the cursor. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 19 Select the four sketched lines. 604 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . .

Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. ■ Creating a Furniture Family | 605 . 26 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. click Dimension. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. A lock icon displays. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base.24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown.

Under Parameter Data. select Family parameter. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. select Dimensions.28 Add two final dimensions.. 33 On the Options Bar. 34 On the Design Bar. For Group parameter under. Click OK. as shown. select <Add parameter. Select Type. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. select Drawer Base Width for Label. 30 On the Options Bar. 32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. 606 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .> for Label. click Modify. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base.

a lock icon displays. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. Creating a Furniture Family | 607 . click . After the alignment.35 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. 37 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. click it to lock the alignment. click Finish Sketch. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference.

49 In the Family Types dialog box. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. click Modify. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. and click OK. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 45 On the View Control Bar. Click Apply. and click Apply. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. click the Scale control and select 1:20. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. and click Apply. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click Apply. 608 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you can still see the model. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry. notice that annotations display in this view. Enter 750 mm for Height. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. click .40 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 42 On the View menu. However. 47 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. Click OK. 41 On the View toolbar. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 2000 mm for Length. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters.

7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. 2 On the Design Bar. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. and click OK. click . Creating a Furniture Family | 609 . 3 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click to specify the upper left corner. under Elevations. under Specify a new Work Plane. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane. as shown. 5 On the Design Bar.Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box.

Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. then the lower horizontal sketch line. then select the right parallel sketch line. 610 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and lock it. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. 9 Select the desk top.8 On the Tools toolbar. and lock it. click . and lock the alignment. click Dimension. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 11 On the Design Bar.

the upper sketch line. click Lines.13 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. Creating a Furniture Family | 611 . click Finish Sketch. . TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. 14 On the Options Bar. click the Fillet arc tool.

double-click Front.Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. select the right edge of the rolltop. click . select the left edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. 612 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 18 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock icon. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base.

and click Apply. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 23 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click . and click Apply. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. If not. The desk should adapt to all the changes. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. you can still see the model.21 On the View toolbar. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Height. Creating a Furniture Family | 613 . The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. click Family Types. enter 4000 mm for Length. You can also use dimension constraints. and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. Enter 1500 mm for Depth.

25 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the desk drawer extrusions
1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a Plane, and click OK. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base.

5 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar, click .

8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.

614 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.

NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions, zoom the view until you do.

11 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

12 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers, select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first, and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. After selecting the line of an upper drawer, click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 14 On the Tools toolbar, click set on the left. 15 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the drawer

, and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.

These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 20mm for Extrusion End, and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 20 On the View toolbar, click .

Creating a Furniture Family | 615

Apply material to the desk
21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 22 On the Options Bar, click . for Material.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click 24 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate. 25 In the New Material dialog box, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.

27 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished. 28 Click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

Flex the design
32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box, you can still see the model. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

616 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

34 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints. 35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, Defining New Furniture Types.

Defining New Furniture Types
In this exercise, you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Creating a Furniture Family | 617

Define new furniture types with various widths and depths
1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New. 3 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name, and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box, verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm, and click Apply. 5 Under Family Types, click New. 6 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth, and click Apply. 8 Under Family Types, click New. 9 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name, and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth, click Apply, and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 11 On the File menu, click Save. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name, Training Furniture.rfa.

Load the new window family into a new project

13 On the Standard toolbar, click 14 On the View toolbar, click .

to start a new project based on your default template.

15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component. 17 On the Options Bar, click Load. 18 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 200 x 100mm. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.

21 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk, and add the second desk.

618 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

23 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks, and click to add the third desk.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.

Creating a Baluster Family
In this lesson, you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select Metric Baluster.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 Expand the left elevation view. 2 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

Creating a Baluster Family | 619

The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.

Draw the baluster plan profile
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.

4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Ref. Level for Name, and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Front.

620 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

By default, the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 11 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 14 Click the lock icon.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa. The new custom baluster is now complete.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
In this exercise, you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.

Load the new baluster family into a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rtefile, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a straight stair run
3 On the Design Bar, click the Modelling tab. 4 On the Design Bar, click Stairs. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.

Creating a Baluster Family | 621

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 7 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Baluster.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 9 On the View toolbar, click .

10 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southwest. 11 On the View menu, click Shading with Edges.

Apply the custom baluster to the stair run
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing. 13 On the Options Bar, click .

14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Baluster Family, select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster.

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 19 Click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.

622 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson.

Creating Profile Families
A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings, balusters, soffits, cornices, and other sweep-defined objects. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. In this lesson, you create five different profiles: a sweep, a railing, a stair nosing, a reveal, and a host sweep. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.

Drawing a Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you draw a sweep profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.

3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa. The new sweep profile is now complete.

Creating Profile Families | 623

Drawing a Rail Profile
In this exercise, you create a rail profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Rail.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default rail profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top.

Draw the rail profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa. The new rail profile is now complete.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
In this exercise, you create a stair nosing profile.

624 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.

Draw the stair nosing profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.

Drawing a Reveal Profile
In this exercise, you create a reveal profile. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Reveal.rft, and click Open.

Creating Profile Families | 625

Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face, and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal.

Draw the reveal profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa. The new reveal profile is now complete.

Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you create a host sweep profile. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface, which may be any vertical surface.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Hosted.rft, and click Open.

626 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.

Draw the host sweep profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa. The new host sweep profile is now complete.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
In this exercise, you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Creating Profile Families | 627

Specify the family category
3 On the Modelling menu, click Create. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Generic Models for Family Category, and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box, enter Sweep for Name, and click OK.

Sketch the 2D sweep path
6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Sweep. 7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Path.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path
10 On the Options Bar, click Load Profiles. 11 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 12 In the Type Selector, beside Load Profiles, select Profile - Sweep. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family. 15 On the View toolbar, click .

Modify the sweep profile configuration
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.

628 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.

18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown.

20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit. 21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

.

Under Constraints, enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. Under Other, select Profile Is Flipped.

23 Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

25 On the View toolbar, click

.

The sweep profile application is now complete.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
In this exercise, you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.

Creating Profile Families | 629

2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a wall group
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical. 4 Draw four walls as shown.

5 On the View toolbar, click

.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.

630 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
11 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 13 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Profile - Host Sweep : Profile - Host Sweep for Profile, and click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 17 On the View toolbar, click . .

18 In the Dynamic View dialog box, click Spin [Shift]. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.

The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.

Creating a Room Tag
In this lesson, you create a room tag which displays room name, floor and ceiling finish, and area with labels added to extract project data.

Specifying Room Tag Parameters
In this exercise, you specify the room tag parameters.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select M_Room Tag.rft, and click Open.

Creating a Room Tag | 631

Create a new tag based on the default room tag template
1 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.

Edit the 3mm label
2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Label. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box, select Underline, and click OK.

Add a 2mm label
6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter 2mm for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, enter 2 for the Text Size parameter, clear Underline, and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.

Combine labels into a room tag
11 On the Design Bar, click Label. 12 In the Type Selector, verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 13 On the Options Bar, verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label.

The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 17 In the Type Selector, select Label : 2mm. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Floor Finish, and click OK.

632 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

rft. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. The new room tag is now ready for use. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box.20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. notice that there is only one view available. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Select Generic Annotation. and click OK. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 633 . Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. select Training Files. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser.rfa. and click Open. select Ceiling Finish. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. and click OK. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. select Area.

7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. 6 On the Options Bar. click . 3 On the Options Bar.Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. 5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. click Lines.

in the North Line row. click New. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. select 3 for Line Weight. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. 10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the upper vertical line. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 17 On the Design Bar. enter North Line for Name. click Modify. click Object Styles. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box.9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. under Modify Subcategories. select North Line. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 635 . 16 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. and click OK.

This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. Select the DefaultMetric. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 8 In the Open dialog box. click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog box. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. and click Open. click Modify. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. select Training Files. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. select it. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. Training North Arrow. click Symbol. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. click Sheet. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click Open. 10 In the Type Selector. select Training North Arrow. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson.rte file. 7 On the File menu. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . navigate to the location of Training North Arrow.rfa. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. 5 Click OK. click New ➤ Project. and in the left pane of the New dialog box.18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. select A1 metric. In the New Project Dialog box. click Browse. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project.rfa.

The titleblock has linework. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar.rft. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. click . and click Open. and labels. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. Select A0 metric. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. click New ➤ Titleblock. and your project data. and enter -25 for Offset. Creating a Titleblock Family | 637 . click Lines. graphics. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. text. 3 On the Options Bar.

7 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new vertical line.Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. and click . 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. and enter 140 for Offset. click . . 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

select Wide Lines. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. select Title Blocks. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. Creating a Titleblock Family | 639 . and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 21 On the Options Bar. and enter 20 for Offset. enter 30 for Offset. 15 On the Design Bar. press CTRL.12 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 16 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 13 In the Type Selector. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. click . click Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line.

3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .25 On the Design Bar. navigate to Training Files/Common. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 2 In the Open dialog box. text notes. and labels to your titleblock. select Company Logo.jpg. click Modify. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. and click Open. you add a company logo. The titleblock linework is now complete. click Import/Link ➤ Image. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet.

enter 10 for Text Size. 6 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. click Text. Creating a Titleblock Family | 641 . and select Bold. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box.4 Zoom in on the logo. and click OK. in the text box. click . 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. 9 In the Name dialog box. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. click Duplicate. enter 10mm Bold for Name. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK twice. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown.

and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. and select the last text note. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. 18 Select the drag handle. address. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. Add consultant name. and add an address and phone number as shown.Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. select Text : 8mm. 17 On the Design Bar. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. click Text. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and drag the text note down as shown.

22 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. select Constrain and Multiple. 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. 24 On the Options Bar. click . and select the consultant text note. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. Creating a Titleblock Family | 643 .

644 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.

and enter Sheet Number:. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. and enter Date:. 32 In the Name dialog box.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. and enter Drawn By:. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. and click OK. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. select Project Issue Date. select Text : 5mm. and click to specify the label location. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 34 Click OK twice. click . enter 5 for Text Size. Creating a Titleblock Family | 645 . click Label. and click OK. enter 5mm for Name. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. and enter Checked By:. under Text. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Text. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Edit/New. 29 On the Options Bar. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 41 On the Options Bar.

and click to specify the label location. 45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. and click to specify the label location. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. and click OK. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. select Drawn By. select Checked By and click OK. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.44 Select the left drag handle on the label.

51 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Label : 15mm Label. 59 On the Options Bar. click . enter 15 for Text Size. click Center and Middle.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. select Project Number. click Duplicate. and click OK. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. and click OK. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click OK. click Label. 50 On the Options Bar. under Text. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Sheet Number. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. click Edit/New. Creating a Titleblock Family | 647 . 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click to specify the label location. 55 Click OK twice. and click to specify the label location. 53 In the Name dialog box. enter 15mm Label for Name.

select Client Name. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. 648 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Project Name. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. 70 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 4mm Label. enter 4 for Text Size. click Edit/New. and click OK. click Label. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 75 Click OK twice. and click to specify the label location. under Text. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. click Duplicate. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click to specify the label location.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. click . 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 73 In the Name dialog box.

rte file.Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 5 In the Open dialog box. and click Open. select it. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 80 On the Design Bar. select 4mm Label. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Left and Middle. click Browse. text. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. In the New Project Dialog box. select File Path. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. click Sheet. 2 In the New Project dialog box. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field.rfa. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.rfa file. click Modify. The titleblock graphics. click OK. click Load. select Training Files. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 7 Click OK. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 77 On the Options Bar. Creating a Titleblock Family | 649 . 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click Open. click New ➤ Project. Select the DefaultMetric. and labels are now complete.

enter Name for Drawn By. 650 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. 2005 for Project Issue Date. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor.Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. 14 Click OK. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. 9 On the Options Bar. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. Enter Office Building for Project Name. Enter In Progress for Project Status. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. click Modify and select the titleblock. click . Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. 12 On the Settings menu. under Other. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Project Information. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.

Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. Creating In-Place Families | 651 . Next. 2 In the Project Browser. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. click Project Units.rvt. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Orient ➤ Southeast. To change the units of measurement to meters. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. on the Settings menu. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. Set the Length units to millimeters. and set the suffix to None. set the Area to Square meters.NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. and click Open. Select c_Pantheon. expand Elevations. and double-click South. select Training Files and navigate to the Common folder.

click Axis. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. click Create. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. and click Open View. select Roofs for Family Category. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. The center wall section view is displayed. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 7 On the Design Bar. select Pick a Plane. and click OK. enter Dome for Name. click . 652 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. select Section: Wall Section . click Set Work Plane. and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK.Center.Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 12 On the Options Bar.

17 Move the cursor out. click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. Creating In-Place Families | 653 . until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane.Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. click .

20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. and select Chain. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. 654 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. click .The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. 19 On the Options Bar.

click . click Lines. Creating In-Place Families | 655 . The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. select Delete Inner Segment. click . 27 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar.

32 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. click and select Chain. 656 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint.

click Finish Sketch.Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. click for Material. 41 On the Design Bar. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. click Finish Family. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 40 On the Design Bar. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. The dome roof closed profile is now complete. click Revolution Properties.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. under Materials and Finishes. 38 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. Creating In-Place Families | 657 . and click OK. select Concrete . 42 On the View toolbar. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. click .

click Set Work Plane. and click OK. and click OK. click Axis. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. select Section: Wall Section . 11 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. click . 3 In the Name dialog box.Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. and click OK. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. select Pick a Plane. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve.Center. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. 5 On the Design Bar. select Floors for Family Category. click Create. enter Concave Floor for Name. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. 658 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click South.

and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. click .O. and select Chain. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. click Lines. 14 On the Options Bar. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. Creating In-Place Families | 659 . 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. Footing level line and the axis.

18 Specify the intersection of the T. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile.O. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. select Cobblestone for Name. 22 In the Materials dialog box. click for Material.O. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click OK. click Finish Family. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. and click OK. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. click Revolution Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click 3D Section View. 24 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 660 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.

In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. In this case. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open-joist wood floor truss. and detail level controls. you will understand the process. 661 . and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. not specifically how to make a floor truss. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Autodesk Revit Building. At the end of this tutorial. formula-based parameters. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. During this tutorial. methodology. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. The truss also has multiple types. assigned subcatecories. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords.Parametric Component Design Techniques 20 In this tutorial. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. In exercises that become increasingly complex. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor.

In this case. In this case.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. It should also be an available option within a beam system. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. and also works intuitively with them. For every complexity added to a family. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. Although this solution is possible. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. Take this into consideration during your design planning. and structural walls. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. this must be a structural beam component. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 662 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . NOTE When creating a new family. In addition. it is not the best solution. you should avoid over-designing the component. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. In this lesson. Two types should be created. a generic floor-based component might work. In the next exercise. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. beams. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. you determine the requirements of the new component. the design spec requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. For training purposes.

This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. These materiails can be applied using Object Styles. What types are most commonly used? In this training case. Depending on the family you are designing. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. ■ ■ ■ You have completed the planning stage for the new family. the means in which to gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. 4 Continue with the next exercise. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. In the previous exercise. the planning stage and questions may differ. Selecting the Family Template. In addition. you determined that the component type is a structural beam.■ What materials need the most control? These materials. Planning a Parametric Component Family | 663 . would require Instance or Type parameters. such as wood type. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise.

notice the preview. NOTE Although this is the template you use to start the tutorial. On the right side of the New dialog box. In addition. Because of its simplicity. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. ■ Metric Structural Framing . 3 In the New dialog box. select Metric Generic Model floor based. do not open this template. scroll through the various template options. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rft and notice the preview. 6 Select Metric Structural Framing . this template resides within the training folders and should be opened from there. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. and display functions required by structural beams. Like most generic family templates. scroll to the structural framing templates. navigate to it.Complex and Trusses. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion.rft. If you are not in this folder. 4 In the New dialog box. Select it so that the preview displays. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). 664 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and notice the preview.Beams and Braces.Complex and Trusses. spacing. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . for example: wall based or floor based.Beams and Braces. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). There are two structural framing templates provided.rft This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it.rft. Notice this template offers three horizontal planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. For training purposes. This template is the best starting point for the new family. ■ Metric Structural Framing .rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box. 5 In the New dialog box. it is not the best starting point for the beam family.

10 Maximize the view. Like many templates. under 3D Views. double-click Front. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. double-click View 1. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. Therefore. Floor Plan: Ref. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family.rft located in the Metric  ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates ➤  folder. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. click the Training Files icon. 12 In the Project Browser. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. 11 In the Project Browser. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. Level. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. 9 Open Metric Structural Framing . Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. under Elevations.Open the family template 8 In the left pane of the New dialog box. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. Creating the Component Skeleton | 665 .Beams and Braces. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. Creating the Component Skeleton. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. Level In this view. lines. you add the reference planes. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. however. Floor Plan: Ref. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry.

under Floor Plans. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. In the image below. In the project plan view image below. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. 3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. Level. notice the location of the beam extents. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. you add reference planes to the beam design.Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. 666 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . double-click Ref. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. Reference Plane: Left. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock.

click . you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes.■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. Creating the Component Skeleton | 667 . Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. In a later exercise. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Before adding new reference planes.

TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. click Ref Plane. double-click Front. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. Level. Level. click on the Edit toolbar. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. 10 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. select the lower horizontal reference plane.8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Level as the mirror axis. Add ref. 668 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . To do this. and select the Level: Ref. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser.

and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. click Ref Plane. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. click to place it as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. click to place it as shown. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. 16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. 14 On the Options Bar. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left.These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. click . Creating the Component Skeleton | 669 .

and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 24 In the Project Browser. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. 670 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. Level. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. click to place it as shown. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. 20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). double-click Ref. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. which you do in the next exercise. 19 On the Options Bar. specify an Offset of 238 mm. 22 On the Options Bar. specify an Offset of 200 mm. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. click to place it as shown. Before you move on to the next exercise. under Floor Plans.

Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. 28 In the Save As dialog box. After adding the dimension. navigate to the folder of your choice. Creating the Component Skeleton | 671 .25 On the Design Bar. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. click Modify. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry.rfa. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. and click Save. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Make sure you remember where you saved it. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. click Dimension. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . Wood Floor Truss. 2 On the Options Bar. Adding Dimensions and Constraints. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown.

click Dimension. place the dimension to the left as shown. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. double-click Front. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. 6 On the Design Bar. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. Place the dimension as shown. the Center reference plane. click Dimension.4 On the Design Bar. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. 672 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Level. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. click Modify. and the lower horizontal reference plane. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane.

and place it below the dimension you added previously.11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. add two dimensions as shown. Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. Creating the Component Skeleton | 673 .

and constraints as needed. consider making it an instance parameter. In addition. it becomes a parameter. 674 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter.rfa. you will add additional reference planes. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. Throughout the tutorial. In this exercise. In the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. dimensions. consider making it a type parameter. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. ■ ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Creating New Length Parameters. If the component has material that varies per component. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Wood Floor Truss. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. Level. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. When you design a new family. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. double-click Ref. consider making it a type parameter. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor.15 Add four dimensions as shown. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them.

3 On the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Click OK. select Add parameter for Label. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter Chord Width for Name. double-click Front. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Creating the Component Skeleton | 675 . Click OK. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Family parameter. under Elevations. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. select Family parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Type. select Add parameter for Label. enter Depth for Name. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. ■ Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser.2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. 7 On the Options Bar.

Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Click OK. Under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Under Parameter Data. 10 On the Options Bar. select Add parameter for Label. Select Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 676 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . select Family parameter. Click OK. Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. select Family parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. enter Center Chase Width for Name. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. enter Chord Thickness for Name. select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. Creating the Component Skeleton | 677 . 16 On the Options Bar. select Chord Thickness for Label. Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model.

Wood Floor Truss. you can drag it to the opposing corner. Adding or modifying a parameter. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. This is not limited to length parameters. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. 20 On the File menu. After you verify this. Adding a new constraint. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. When you open the Family Types dialog. Dimensions. 19 Click Cancel. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. When you load this family into a project. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. ■ 678 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . In the Family Types dialog box. or Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. If you add a new material parameter. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. When you flex a family. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. click Save. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box.rfa. When you open the Family Types dialog box. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group.18 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. Flexing the Component Model. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. click Family Types. Nesting a component. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model.

Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Level. enter 600 mm for Depth. 800 mm for Center Chase Width. Creating the Component Skeleton | 679 . Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. In addition. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply.Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. under Dimensions. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. and click Apply. 80 mm for Chord Thickness. 2 On the Design Bar. click Family Types.

Click Apply. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. 6 On the File menu. 680 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. you align and lock their position. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. When working within the Family Editor. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. Adding Solid Geometry. Click OK.Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. click Save. double-click Left. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After flexing the design. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.rfa. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. After creating the extrusions. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. under Elevations. Wood Floor Truss. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. After adding the chords.

click Name. and verify that Lock is selected. and select Lock. and click OK. click . 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. click . 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. When using the Trim tool. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box.3 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. click . 8 On the Tools toolbar. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. click Lines. click the part of the line you want to keep. 10 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Reference Plane: Member Left. 6 On the Options Bar. Adding Solid Geometry | 681 . click Lines. the lines will no longer overlap.

double-click View 1. 16 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 17 On the File menu. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry In this exercise. this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. Wood Floor Truss. 2 Enter SD. 3 Select the chord extrusions. 15 On the Design Bar. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Elevations. Constrain the extrusion ends 1 In the Project Browser. click . Dataset Continue to use the dataset.rfa. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown. you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. under 3D Views. 18 Proceed to the next exercise.13 On the Tools toolbar. click Save. double-click Front. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. 682 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry.

Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. click Family Types. enter 3000 for Length. Flex the design 6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise.4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right. On the Design Bar. as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. click Apply. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. Therefore. and click Apply. as shown. you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Adding Solid Geometry | 683 . Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. Add a new dimension and constraint 9 On the Design Bar. 5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes. not the member right or member left reference planes. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog box is open. and click OK. enter 6000 for Length. click Dimension.

13 In the Family Types dialog box. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. In a later exercise. you add the web members. Later in this lesson. TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected. Flex the chord width. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. Flex the length 12 On the Design Bar.11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working. under 3D Views. Therefore. use the Align tool and add the constraint. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK. Afterwards. you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value. adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. and thickness 15 In the Project Browser. you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment. In this particular case. depth. double-click View 1. and click Apply. enter 6000 for Length. 684 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Family Types.

21 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 17 On the Design Bar. try picking a method. that allows you to easily return to the original values. click Save. Click Apply. 19 Specify the beam values shown below: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Therefore. Wood Floor Truss. such as doubling.16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. and click OK. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply. TIP When flexing. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 600mm for Depth. click Family Types. Adding Solid Geometry | 685 . you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase. 20 On the File menu. Creating Additional Solid Geometry In this exercise. 18 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Creating Additional Solid Geometry.rfa. Dataset Continue to use the dataset.

4 On the Design Bar. vertical member of the center chase as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. click Lines. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the left. the lines will no longer overlap. click . This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. vertical member of the center chase as shown.Add the center chase extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click the Hide/Isolate control. and verify that Lock is selected. under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. 11 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. click . 5 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the right. click . 13 On the Tools toolbar. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. and verify that Lock is selected. 686 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. and click Hide Object. 3 On the View Control Bar. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left. click . 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown. click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar. Level.

click Finish Sketch. under Elevations. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion. click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. Adding Solid Geometry | 687 . 16 In the Project Browser. it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. and after the alignment. double-click Front. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. and lock the alignment as shown. Align and lock the new extrusions 18 On the Tools menu. 20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions. This next process is very important. select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. click Align.15 On the Design Bar. 21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord. 17 Zoom in on the center chase. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options. 19 For the align-to reference.

27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. The truss should adapt to all the changes. Click Apply. If it does not. 688 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. This will make subsequent work much easier. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. select Add Parameter for Label. 29 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. redo any problematic alignments and constraints. Clean up the view 26 Zoom to Fit. click Modify.22 On the Design Bar. Add the truss end extrusions 28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown. and click OK. click Family Types. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the center chase 23 On the Design Bar.

under Parameter Data. and click OK. 42 On the Options Bar. under Dimensions. 41 On the upper chord. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. click Apply. click Lines. enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click OK. select the upper horizontal reference plane. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. Adding Solid Geometry | 689 . click .30 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. double-click Right. select Trimmable End Length for Label. select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name. 38 In the Work Plane dialog box. and verify that Lock is selected. 33 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 32 On the Options Bar. Select Instance. 37 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. under Elevations. Sketch the right end extrusion 35 In the Project Browser. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. enter19mm for Offset. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 40 On the Options Bar. on the lower chord.

on the lower chord. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. double-click Left. select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name. 55 On the upper chord. 54 On the Options Bar. 51 On the Design Bar. select the upper horizontal reference plane. 45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. Sketch the left end extrusion 49 In the Project Browser. and verify that Lock is selected. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 48 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 53 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value. 52 In the Work Plane dialog box. under Constraints. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 46 On the Design Bar. 47 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 690 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .44 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch. 56 On the Options Bar. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. click Lines. click . enter 19mm for Offset. and click OK. under Elevations. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

double-click Front.58 On the Tools toolbar. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. Adding Solid Geometry | 691 . they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. click Extrusion Properties. 59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. under Elevations. Add alignment constraints 63 In the Project Browser. specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value. 60 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point. click Align. Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends. click . 62 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. click Finish Sketch. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu. 61 In the Element Properties dialog box.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion. 692 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 73 In the Family Types dialog box. TIP When you finish the alignments. Click Apply. 70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. 68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. and lock the alignment. if you select the end extrusion. under 3D Views. click Modify. Click Apply. and lock the alignment. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. 75 In the Project Browser. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Make adjustments to account for the right side. The truss should adapt to all the changes. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. click Family Types. double-click View 1. this is the align-to point. a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. and click OK. Flex the design 72 On the Design Bar. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 71 On the Design Bar. 74 In the Family Types dialog box. If it does not.

77 Proceed to the next lesson. you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls. click the Training Files icon. you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. and a rim joist. Testing the Family in a Project | 693 . Testing the Family in a Project In this lesson. NOTE Close any open families or projects. you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. If you are comfortable with your design. Loading a Family into a Project In this exercise. it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way. you can continue using it in the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. Testing the Family in a Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Datasets Open the truss family ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.76 Save the Family. Although you could continue using the previous family. click Open. After you load it into the project. a sill. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. Open the m_Wood Floor Truss_1.

a dialog box would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. click the Training Files icon. Load the truss family into the project 1 On the Window menu.Open the project file ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Testing a Family Instance in a Project. Notice that the project file is now active. and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. click m_Wood Floor Truss_1. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 4 Proceed to the next exercise. Open the m_WWF1. you add several instances of the truss family to the project. click Load into Projects. Testing a Family Instance in a Project In this exercise. and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. expand Families.rvt file located in the Metric folder. expand Structural Framing. If you had multiple projects or families open. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file.rfa. 694 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. click Open.

and double-click 3D . a wood sill. The rim joist was added as a beam. NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. and a wood rim joist. Testing the Family in a Project | 695 . This project consists of foundation walls. expand Views.Southeast Isometric. click Beam. under 3D Views. 4 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. 5 Using point-to-point insertion.Southeast Isometric.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. double-click 3D . therefore. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. expand 3D Views. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. a slab. under Floor Plans.

696 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 8 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. under 3D Views.Southeast Isometric. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. 9 In the Project Browser. not the wall or rim joist. double-click 3D . You do not need to be precise. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. under Floor Plans.

16 Proceed to the next lesson. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. Working with Nested Subcomponents. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. click Undo Drag. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. 15 When prompted to open the truss family for editing.Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. This should return the project to its original dimension. click Yes. 11 On the File menu. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. 10 On the Edit menu. In the next lesson. click Edit Family. 12 In the Save as dialog box. 14 On the Options Bar. Edit a family from within a project 13 Select one of the wooden truss components. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. click Save as. Because the family is already open. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 697 .

The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. Level. 5 On the File menu. and click Hide Object. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Hide/Isolate. click the Training Files icon. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected.rfa is the active file. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown.Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. under Floor Plans. This family is a single extrusion as shown. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. click Component. 698 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. This will make aligning the wood web easier. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. ■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. Open the m_Wood_Web. double-click Ref. 7 In the Type Selector.

Working with Nested Subcomponents | 699 . Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. 13 For the align-to point.9 On the Design Bar. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. Do not select it. 14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. click Modify. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. double-click Front. In the following steps. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. 10 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. You will align the left web component first. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. Align the nested web components 12 Enter . select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion.

18 Add two reference planes as shown. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. In addition. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. click Modify. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. 16 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Tools menu. click Align. 700 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width.Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. click Ref Plane. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. In the steps that follow.

23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. 25 Add the following two dimensions: ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. ■ Working with Nested Subcomponents | 701 . Place the dimension as shown. click Dimension. Place the dimension as shown. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. ■ ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component.

9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. 5 Click OK. select WebDepth. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. click OK.In the next exercise. you label these dimensions. and click OK. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. Select Common for Discipline. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. Select Type. Select Length for Type. 702 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you add new parameters to control the web components. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. click Modify. 28 In the Save As dialog box. click Modify. click OK. click Add. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. enter Depth . length. under Parameter Data. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. or the width of the center chase. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 12 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. In the Type Parameter dialog box. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Family Types. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. click Edit/New. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. 26 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. 29 Proceed to the next exercise.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. 27 On the File menu. and click Properties. under Other. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. click Save As.

click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. click Add. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Length for Type.Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Click OK. enter (Length . Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter 20 In the Family Types dialog box. enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. under Parameter Data. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends. under Parameters. Select Instance. Select Length for Type. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. do the following: ■ Enter CC for Name. Select Common for Discipline. which must remain at least 150mm long. Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase 13 On the Design Bar. Select Common for Discipline. under Parameters. After you enter the formula. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Other for Group parameter under. 16 Under Other. under Parameter Data. This parameter is primarily for convenience. 19 Under Constraints. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 703 . the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field. Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter 17 In the Family Types dialog box. In addition. Select Instance. click Family Types. Click OK. click Add. under Parameters.(CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula.

Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. click Modify. enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 22 Under Constraints. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Webhalflength for Name. 27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 29 On the Design Bar. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula. Add formula for Webhalflength 30 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. Select Instance. select Add parameter for Label. Select Common for Discipline. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayNum for Name. 32 Click OK. 31 Under Constraints. select Webhalflength for Label. Click OK. Add parameter to anchor web array 24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown. Select Integer for Type. 28 On the Options Bar. 23 Click OK. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 704 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Family Types. Click OK. under Parameter Data. under Parameter Data.21 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Constraints for Group parameter under.

37 In the Type Properties dialog box. In the Type Properties dialog box. The truss should adapt to all the changes. Flex the design 41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog box. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 42 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. 39 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. Because you have added and constrained new components. If it does not. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 705 . 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems. click Edit/New. double-click View 1. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. and click OK. click Family Types. it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. click OK. select WebArrayLength. the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth.Associate web component parameters 33 Right-click the left web component. 34 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Other. 40 In the Project Browser. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. Click Apply. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. and click Properties.

click Array. 706 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Elevations. 45 On the File menu. Select 2nd for Move to.44 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. When picking the corner. add alignment constraints. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. and click OK. click Save. Select Constrain. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. then you specify the move end point. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the Edit menu. and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. First. you array the nested web components. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. Enter 3 for Number. Arraying Nested Subcomponents. 5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. you specify the move start point. Click Apply. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. double-click Front. Arraying Nested Subcomponents In this exercise. Creating an array requires two basic steps. Array the left web component 1 In the Project Browser.

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. When picking the corner. 11 On the Options Bar. Select 2nd for Move to. When picking the corner. Array the right nested web component 9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. click Modify. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 707 . When picking the corner. Align and lock the arrays 17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. Select Constrain. 14 Press ENTER to complete the array. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 18 On the Tools menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. 7 Press ENTER to complete the array. then select the line twice. 16 Zoom out to view the truss. place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. click Modify. 19 In the left array. click Align. click Array. 10 On the Edit menu. Enter 3 for Number. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. 8 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point.

NOTE This step is very important. select WebArrayNum for Label. click Modify. If you do not lock the edges of the array. 21 Within the left array. you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other.Because there are two overlapping lines at this location. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. 28 On the Options Bar. select WebArrayNum for Label. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss. Label the arrays 23 Select the middle web component of the left array. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. NOTE Do not select the array value. 29 On the Design Bar. 708 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it. 22 Within the right array. 25 On the Options Bar. align and lock the two right web components.

and lock the alignment as shown. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown. Left. you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. 35 Select the reference plane. 33 Delete the dimension. 36 Select the reference plane. click Align. as the align-to point. Member Left. Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. This is because earlier in the tutorial. 34 On the Tools menu. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 709 .Notice the arrays appear to be too long.

46 On the Design Bar. however. click Family Types. in this case. Flex the design 45 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. Therefore. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right. 710 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 44 Click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. and click OK. if any. enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. The truss should adapt to all the changes. under Dimensions.NOTE With most beam families. and prepare the view for flexing. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. click Modify. 47 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. Change trimmable end length value 42 On the Design Bar. 41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. significant impact. this solution has little. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 37 On the Design Bar. you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes. Click Apply. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends. the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. Enter 12000mm for Length. under 3D Views. If it does not.

Reloading a Family into a Project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length. You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. View 1. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. the project. Click Apply. 1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. 49 On the File menu.TIP When flexing a complex model such as this. and click Yes. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 711 .rvt. Reloading a Family into a Project In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. select Override parameter values of existing types. these steps have been reduced. for training and time purposes. 3 In the Reload Family dialog box. should be open. you reload the truss family into the project. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. however. you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly. 2 On the Design Bar. displays. m_WWF1. and click OK. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes. Enter 6000mm for Length. click Save. click Load into Projects. In addition to the truss family. Reload the truss into the project.

and Parameters In this lesson. Materials. 7 On the Edit menu. 6 In the Project Browser. Materials. and Parameters. you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. click Undo Drag. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square.Southeast Isometric. 712 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 9 Proceed to the next lesson. under Floor Plans.4 In the Project Browser. Applying Subcategories. double-click 3D . double-click Level 1. In the next lesson. Applying Subcategories. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes. you create and apply subcategories and materials. under 3D Views. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.

Applying Subcategories. click Open.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure. click the Training Files icon. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open the m_WWF2.Creating and Applying Subcategories In this exercise. Apply Object Styles 1 Zoom in around beam system. Within the family. In this dataset. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. and Parameters | 713 . In addition. the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. the material values were set to By Category by default. Materials. you create new subcategories within the truss family.

enter Wood Floor Truss for Name. When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category. click Edit Family. notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. 10 On the Options Bar. If there was a metal beam in this building model. Create subcategories within the truss family 9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. you have more control over component visibility within a project.2 On the Settings menu. and click OK. and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice the Wood . it would also have the wood material applied to it. 7 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK. click Object Styles. click OK. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor. click Object Styles. 12 On the Settings menu. 3 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Undo Object Styles. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog box. 13 In the Object Styles dialog box. 8 On the Edit menu.Timber for Name. 5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. click New. under Modify Subcategories. In addition. click in the material field until the button displays as shown. click Wood . 714 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . verify that the Model Objects tab is selected. 6 In the Materials dialog box. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing.Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. 4 On the Structural Framing category line.

and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog box. enter Wood Floor Truss. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. Apply a subcategory to the nested web components 28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components. under Identity Data. click . click Check None.No Gloss for Name. under AccuRender. Applying Subcategories. 16 In the Materials dialog box. click Modify. Materials. select Natural. 20 In the Materials dialog box. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 24 In the Filter dialog box. 21 In the Object Styles dialog box. 19 In the Material Library dialog box. and click OK. click . click OK.Apply material to subcategory 15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory. 23 On the Options Bar. and Parameters | 715 . select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory. click Edit Family. 27 On the Design Bar. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. 17 In the New Material dialog box. click OK. Apply the subcategory to the truss components 22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 25 On the Options Bar. select Other. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. Yellow. and click OK. The web component family opens in a 3D view. click . navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. click Duplicate. press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. and click OK. 29 On the Options Bar.

select Override parameter values of existing types.No Gloss for Name. under Modify Subcategories. click New.Webs subcategory. enter Wood Floor Truss . click Duplicate. 39 In the Materials dialog box. click .Webs for Name. 35 In the Materials dialog box. Reload truss into project 47 On the Design Bar. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. and click OK. 32 In the Object Styles dialog box. enter Wood Floor Truss . 37 In the Materials dialog box. click . 40 In the Object Styles dialog box. 46 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. click Load into Projects. 38 In the Material Library dialog box. 42 On the Options Bar. select m_WWF2.31 On the Settings menu. you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project. and click Yes. 41 Select the web extrusion. under AccuRender. and click OK. 34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss . By creating a separate subcategory for the web components. 43 In the Element Properties dialog box.rvt. click Object Styles. select Wood Floor Truss . 716 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and click OK. under Identity Data. and click OK. 36 In the New Material dialog box. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click OK. Reload web component into truss family 44 On the Design Bar. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog box. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.Webs. click OK. and click OK. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog box. click Load into Projects. and click OK. select Natural.Webs for Subcategory. Yellow.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components. expand Structural Framing. and click Yes. however. under Visibility. expand Structural Framing. 55 On the Edit menu. you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Creating Material Parameters. clear Wood Floor Truss Webs.49 In the Reload Family dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics. and Parameters | 717 . 57 In the Save as dialog box. 52 Click OK. click Save As. 56 On the File menu. click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. Open truss family for editing 1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. click Object Styles. Notice the web extrusions not longer display. Creating Material Parameters In this exercise. Materials. and click OK. 50 On the Settings menu. 53 On the View menu. Notice the two new subcategories are listed. select Override parameter values of existing types. the stick symbols continue to display. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box. under Categories. Applying Subcategories. click Edit Family. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 51 In the Object Styles dialog box. 2 On the Options Bar.

28 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Floor Truss Material. 17 On the Options Bar. 8 Click OK. notice the default material is By Category. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. Click OK. under Parameters. 718 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.Steel for Name. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. under Parameter Data. do not assign a material to the parameter. click . 22 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. under Other. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Yes. click Load into Projects. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. click . click Check None. click OK. click Edit/New. 27 On the Options Bar. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. select m_WWF2. 29 In the Materials dialog box. click . Select Common for Discipline. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. select Structural Framing (Wood Floor Truss). click the button to the right of the Material value field. click Family Types. under Materials and Finishes. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. and click OK. and click OK. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. select Floor Truss Material. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components. In this case. Select Material for Type. click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. When reloaded into a project. select Metal . 21 Click OK twice. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. click . 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 11 In the Filter dialog box. and select the component.Create material parameter 4 On the Design Bar.rvt. select Override parameter values of existing types. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. Link truss extrusions to material parameter 9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Instance. click Modify. click Add. this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. and click OK. press TAB. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Floor Truss Material for Name.

Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Assigning Detail Level and View Controls In this exercise. 33 On the File menu. click Close. click Detail Level. Controlling Component Visibility. click Save. you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level. 35 Proceed to the next lesson. However. click Open. click the Training Files icon. all elements display at all times in all views. 34 Close any open files. you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels. Controlling Component Visibility | 719 .31 On the Design Bar. You can save the open files if you wish. click Modify. Controlling Component Visibility In this lesson. notice the floor truss has not changed appearance. Change detail levels 1 On the View Control Bar. 32 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. a new dataset is supplied. In the next lesson.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Open the m_WWF3. because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss. Notice the rim joist no longer displays. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam. and click Coarse.

Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click Visibility. select Override parameter values of existing types. Clear Left/Right. 11 On the Design Bar. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Apply detail level controls to web components 5 Select a web component. 6 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. Clear Left/Right. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Visibility.2 Select a floor truss. clear Coarse. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click Visibility.rfa. Under Detail Levels. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. clear Coarse. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 720 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 3 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. click Load into Projects. Assign detail level to center chase extrusions 14 Select the center chase extrusions. click Edit Family. 13 In the Reload Family dialog box. clear Plan/RCP. Click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the web extrusion. clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels. Assign detail level to truss ends 17 Select the end extrusions. and click OK. clear Plan/RCP. clear Coarse. Click OK. and click Yes. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Under Detail Levels. click Edit Family.

Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 28 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level. click Detail Level. and click Coarse. Notice the symbolic representation of the beams. click Visibility. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click Yes. double-click Level 1. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed. 26 On the View Control Bar. click Load into Projects. Click OK. select m_WWF3. clear Coarse. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 21 On the Options Bar.Assign detail level to truss chords 20 Select the truss chords. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 27 In the Project Browser. select Override parameter values of existing types.rvt. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Detail Levels. and click Medium. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Controlling Component Visibility | 721 . under Floor Plans.

Creating Multiple Component Types In this exercise. enter 64mm for Chord Width. and click OK. creating predefined types can speed up the design process. create types for those most frequently used in your projects. under Family Types. you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click Family Types. click Save As. 10 Select 89x38 for Name. In the final exercise. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length. and click OK. enter 64x38 for Name. navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 9 In the Family Types dialog box. click Edit Family. Notice the chord changes width. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project. NOTE When creating new components. Creating Component Types. 31 Proceed to the next lesson. 8 In the New dialog box. under Dimensions. under Family Types. and click Apply. and click Apply. Create new types 4 On the Design Bar. 6 In the New dialog box. click New. enter 89x38 for Name. you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. 2 On the Options Bar. Open the truss family for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 722 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Creating Component Types In this lesson. 30 In the Save As dialog box. click New. TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. The truss returns to its original designed value. 11 Click OK.29 On the File menu.

click Load into Projects. Notice the two beam types. 400. Creating Conditional Formulas. 286. if(Length < 7500. click Save. 2 On the Options Bar. select m_WWF3. click Family Types. and click OK. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 14 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click OK. click Apply. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. and click Apply. 350. 22 On the File menu. under 3D Views. Notice the truss depth increases. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. select 89x38. if(Length < 9000. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 18 In the Type Selector.rvt. click Modify. click Beam. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. <result-if-true>. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. select 64x38. and click Yes. 400))) 6 Click Apply. click Edit Family. enter 6000 for length.Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. double-click 3D . select Override parameter values of existing types. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog box. enter 8000 for length. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Creating Component Types | 723 . Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise.

select Override parameter values of existing types. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. and click OK. click Save. double-click 3D . double-click Level 1. click Load into Projects. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change.Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. 17 Close any open files. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. and click Yes. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. You have completed this tutorial. select m_WWF3. 11 In the Reload Family dialog box.rvt.Southeast Isometric. 16 On the File menu. 14 In the Project Browser. 724 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under 3D Views. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog box.

Finally. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans.Area Analysis 21 In this tutorial. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. 725 . Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships.

You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise.rvt file located in the Common folder. In the Area Settings dialog box. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. 6 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. your values will be different. click Project Units. Click OK. 2 In the Project Units dialog box.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. 726 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . select mm. there are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. it is not necessary in this exercise. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. expand Views (all). These schemes define spatial relationships. select Millimeters. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. click OK. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. right-click in the Design Bar. Open the c_Area. select 2 decimal places. select Square meters. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. expand Floor Plans. 3 Under Area. click Area Settings. For Rounding. TIP If the Area Settings tab is not visible. In the final exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. under Length. For Unit Suffix. If you are using metric units. For Unit Suffix. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. select m2 Click OK. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. click the Training Files icon. and click Area Analysis.

forming a closed loop. you must manually add these boundary lines. When you select Yes in this dialog box. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. If you select No. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). Create a gross building area plan 9 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. ■ 8 Click Cancel. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. 13 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the New Area Plan dialog box. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. under Views (all). notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). Click OK. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. 12 In the Project Browser. or 0. Using Area Analysis Tools | 727 . At Specified Height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated.7 In the Area Setting dialog box. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. click the Room Calculations tab. ■ 11 When the informational dialog box displays. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. the system-computed height defaults to the level. click Area Plan. click Area Tag. ■ At System Computed Height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level.

you create a new area plan for rentable space. and store area. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 16 In the New Area Plan dialog box. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. 18 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Next. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the exterior face of room-defining walls. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Add area boundary lines 19 On the Design Bar. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. click Area Plan. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Click OK. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). common areas. 728 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . 17 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 15 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. click Area Boundary. Expand Area Plans (Rentable).

click . click Modify. Using Area Analysis Tools | 729 . you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. you can either draw them or pick them. 25 Select the area tag you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 26 On the Options Bar. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. 22 On the Design Bar. 23 In the upper left corner of the building model. 21 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. 24 On the Design Bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. click Area Tag. When you pick the walls. If you do not select this option.20 On the Options Bar. When you add area boundary lines.

31 On the Options Bar. In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify and select the tag. Click OK. click . Click OK. 29 Add the tag to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 30 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. Click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. 730 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . Select Office area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. add a tag in the common area to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. click Area Tag. 33 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name.27 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Building Common Area for Area Type.

35 Add the last two area tags to the two areas on the right side of the building model. Using Area Analysis Tools | 731 . the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. and select Store Area for Area Type.34 Add an area tag to the building model core. enter Core for Name. Notice that within the two store areas. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4.

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise.rvt. 37 Navigate to your preferred directory. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. and click Save. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. and when the color legend displays. click Save. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. In this exercise. click Color Fill. name the project Area-in progress. In the next exercise. click to place it.36 On the File menu. Create a color fill plan 1 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. 732 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area.

click the Fields tab. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog box. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. click Schedule/Quantities. select Area Type and click Add. 5 In the New Schedule dialog box. and click OK. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. select Areas (Rentable). 7 Under Available fields. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Using Area Analysis Tools | 733 .3 When the dialog box displays. under Category.

734 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis .9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog box are displayed as column headings within the schedule.

If you modify a massing face. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. curtain systems. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. building elements. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. After you make building elements. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. floors. At any time. In this tutorial. 735 . you then need to update the building face. you can specify the view to display massing elements. or both. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model.Massing 22 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. and roofs.

sweeps. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Create Mass. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. Open the m_Massing_Start. floor. on the Options Bar. and click Massing. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 4 On the Design Bar. 736 | Chapter 22 Massing . TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. and cutting geometry. 5 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. roofs. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. and floors. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. You assign the default wall. click Lines. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. and click 6 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. click Open. 3 Click OK in the Name dialog box to accept the default name Mass 1. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. click the Training Files icon. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions.

17 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. and click OK. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Reference. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click 16 On the Options Bar.7 On the Design Bar. 18 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. under Materials and Finishes. click Extrusion Properties. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. click the Value for Material. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. 15 On the Sketch Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. 12 On the View toolbar. and then click . under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the Value for Material. click Finish Sketch. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. click . Using Massing Tools | 737 . double-click Level 1. click Extrusion Properties. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. Create next extrusion form 13 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. under Constraints. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. and click OK. under Views (all). 21 In the Materials dialog box. on the Options Bar. and then click . and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 In the Materials dialog box. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. click Lines. 19 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Constraints. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 On the Design Bar.

press TAB to highlight the entire face. 28 In the drawing area. 26 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click on the Options Bar. click Lines. under Views (all). 29 Click to select the face. double-click West. select Pick a plane. Sketch the blend base 31 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. The second form is on top of the first form. TIP If necessary. 27 In the Work Plane dialog box. double-click {3D} to see the results.24 In the Project Browser. 738 | Chapter 22 Massing . highlight the larger form. Continue creation of next massing form 25 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 30 On the Sketch Design Bar.

and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. and delete the vertical construction line. TIP If you do not see this option. click Modify. click . click the arrow next to the drawing options. 36 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. click . 39 On the Edit toolbar. and click to select the line start point. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 33 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 34 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. 37 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar.32 On the Options Bar. click . Next. Using Massing Tools | 739 . 38 Select the arc and the horizontal line.

click Lines and. 740 | Chapter 22 Massing . 44 On the Design Bar. Sketching the blend top 42 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 50 On the Design Bar. and click OK.40 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. . click Blend Properties. 48 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 43 In the Project Browser. double-click East. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 46 On the Options Bar. click . click 47 Create an arc as shown. click 45 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Edit Top. on the Options Bar. 51 On the View toolbar. 41 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 49 In the Element Properties dialog box. .

you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. as shown. click and enter 15000 for Offset. In this exercise. 4 On the Options bar. m_Massing_Start. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click Ref Plane. under Views (all). 2 In the drawing area. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. In the next exercise. Using Massing Tools | 741 . 1 In the Project Browser. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. select the mass. 7 Using the same technique. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model.rvt.52 Proceed to the next exercise.

and then click Hidden Line. click Extrusion Properties. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. on the Options Bar. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. specify Mass (Transparent) for Material. snap the corners to the intersections. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 14 Under Constraints. 15 Click OK. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. 17 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. In this exercise.rvt. 742 | Chapter 22 Massing .When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 19 On the File menu. and 0 for Extrusion Start. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. click Void Form ➤  Void Extrusion. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Mass. click Save As. click . click and select Chain. 18 On the Mass Design Bar. on the View Control Bar. 20 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. When sketching each extrusion. 9 On the Design Bar. click Lines and. under Materials and Finishes.

you create new family types from a mass family file. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width.rfa. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name.Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. Finally. click the Training Files icon. and click Apply. and click OK. 12000 mm for Height. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. under Other. Dataset ■ ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rfa. enter 15000 mm for Width. and click Apply. and click Apply. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 743 . 4 In the Family Types dialog box. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. and click OK. 9 Click OK. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. and 18000 mm for Depth. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Name dialog box. 11000 mm for Height. and 9000 mm for Depth. Open Box. and click OK. 5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. and 6000 mm for Depth. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. click Open. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click New. 10 On the File menu. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. click Save As. 18000 mm for Height. click Family Types.

4 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. click the Training Files icon. 7 Open the Box-Training. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 744 | Chapter 22 Massing .rfa. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rfa family files. Semi Barrel Vault. click Place Mass. and Triangle. click the Training Files icon.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 3 On the View Control Bar. 6 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder.rfa. Open the m_Massing_In-place. 9 In the Type Selector. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. double-click Site. You also load other existing mass families and place them. 10 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 2 In the Project Browser.rfa. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). Arc Dome. 1 If not already selected. click Open.

16 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. 20 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 12 Select the box. 22 On the Options Bar. and click . 25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select the 3 boxes. and click OK twice.11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. click Place Mass. 18 Press CTRL. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 745 . 26 In the drawing area. select the triangle. 23 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and click . 14 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. click Place Mass. select Rotate after placement. and click OK twice. 13 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. enter 90 for Angle. 19 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 17 On the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 15 In the Type Selector. and click to place the mass. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 21 In the Type Selector.

29 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 31 Place the box mass family as shown. 34 On the View toolbar. 28 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter.27 Select the triangle. and click OK twice. 746 | Chapter 22 Massing . and click . In the next exercise. In this exercise. 32 Select the box and click . Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. you join these mass elements. 30 In the Type Selector. 33 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click . and click OK twice. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. click Place Mass. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 35 On the View menu.

Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.rvt file. click . Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 747 . . and then press ESC to see the result. NOTE When you join geometry. 4 Select the triangle. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise.

under Views (all). Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. enter SM.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. under Floor Plans. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 748 | Chapter 22 Massing . double-click Site. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. on the Edit toolbar. click 8 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. click for Axis. and snap to the midpoint of the edge.

click 14 On the Tools toolbar. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 749 . You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. . Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. 17 Press ESC to see the result. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. and then select the triangle. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. click . The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. you joined mass elements together. In this exercise.

click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. 7 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 750 | Chapter 22 Massing . 1 On the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. 3 On the Design Options toolbar. and then click OK. under Floor Plans. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. enter 90 degrees for Angle. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. clear Curved. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. and select the triangle mass element. double-click Site. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. 10 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Window menu. select Sloped (primary). TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. click .Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson.rvt. under Views (all). 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown.

and click Wireframe. under Elevations. 21 In the drawing area. select the three arc domes. click . 20 On the Design Bar. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. and click OK twice. and click OK twice. 14 In the drawing area. 18 In the Type Selector. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. and click . double-click North. click . select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 16 On the View Control Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. and click Wireframe. and click . 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. click Place Mass. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 24 On the View Control Bar.13 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Using Mass Elements with Design Options | 751 . TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. click Modify.

click . click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. under Option.rvt. 30 On the View menu. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. clear Sloped. you can make it the primary option. click Make Primary. 35 Click Close and close the warning that displays. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. you placed mass elements into Design Options. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). In this exercise. 29 In the Project Browser. 752 | Chapter 22 Massing . click . select Curved and. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. and click OK. double-click {3D}.Create a Design Option set 26 Select the three arc domes and the two semi barrel vaults. select Curved. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. select Curved from the Design Option menu. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. and click OK. click the Design Options tab. 36 On the File menu. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. 32 Click the value for Design Option.

you pick massing faces to create walls. click to show the massing model.rvt file located in the Metric folder.Brick on CMU. under Views (all). 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 On the View menu. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. click the Training Files icon. select Basic Wall: Exterior . Open the m_Massing_Building_Components. click Wall by Face. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click . and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 753 . 2 On the View toolbar. 6 On the Options Bar. click Orient ➤ Southeast. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. 5 In the Type Selector. 1 In the Project Browser. click Open.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise.

14 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). NOTE If a Warning dialog box is displayed. under Views (all). double-click Level 5. double-click Level 1. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 11 In the Project Browser. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 9 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). click Wall by Face.8 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. double-click Level 3. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. Click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. 16 In the Type Selector. 754 | Chapter 22 Massing .

19 In the Project Browser.18 Select all the faces shown in red. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. double-click Level 9. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 755 . If desired. 21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. and click Wireframe. 20 On the View Control Bar. In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create floors. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. click . click Wall by Face. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. under Views (all). you can select the overlapping curtain wall.

clear Curtain Panels. 756 | Chapter 22 Massing . Curtain Systems. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics. 3 On the Model Categories tab. click Floor Area Faces. 4 Click OK. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 2 On the View menu.rvt. select all levels. and Walls. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Views (all). double-click {3D}.

click Orient ➤ Northeast. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. select Levels 1-4. and click OK. clear Exclude Options. click Floor Area Faces. 12 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 757 .8 On the View menu. 9 Press CTRL. 11 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box.

and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. click Create Floors. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 21 On the View toolbar. under Views (all). under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Level 1. 19 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. under Floor Plans. 758 | Chapter 22 Massing . 22 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. and click OK. click Floor Area Faces. 20 On the Options Bar. click . 16 In the Project Browser.13 Press CTRL. 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Floor by Face. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Mass Schedule. 18 On the Options Bar. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. 15 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box.

rvt. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 759 . 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown.In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. under Views (all). you pick massing faces to create roofs. click Roof by Face.

NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. click Create Roof. 760 | Chapter 22 Massing . select Curtain Panels. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. and Walls.4 In the Type Selector. Your model should now look as shown. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. and then click OK. 11 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. select Basic Roof : Generic . 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Curtain Systems. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar.400mm. click Create Roof. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. 9 On the Options Bar.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rvt. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 5 Press CTRL. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. click Curtain System by Face.In this exercise. under Views (all). 3 In the Type Selector. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 761 . and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 4 On the Options Bar.

762 | Chapter 22 Massing .6 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes.

10 Click Modify to exit the command. In this exercise. select the blended form on the in-place mass. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 763 . 9 On the Options Bar. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. click Create System.8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.

9 In the Element Properties dialog box. Next. and Walls. and click OK. clear Curtain Panels. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . Floors. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. under Floor Plans.rvt. click Edit/New. click OK. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Curtain Systems. enter 30000 for Width. under Views (all). click Duplicate. click Visibility/Graphics. 764 | Chapter 22 Massing . and click OK. and then click OK. Roofs. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. 2 On the View menu.

11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 765 .10 On the Design Bar. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. clear Exclude Options.

press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. TIP To select the curtain wall. 19 On the View toolbar. click .The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. under Floor Plans. you want to select the smaller one. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog box. 766 | Chapter 22 Massing . Also. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. double-click Level 1. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. under Views (all). 17 On the Options Bar. click OK. 15 In the Project Browser. click Remake. In the next steps.

20 Select the roof as shown.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 767 . you will notice that Revit Building resized the floors. click Remake. 21 On the Options Bar.

1 Open the 3D view. 768 | Chapter 22 Massing . The 3D view now shows only the building shell. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise.rvt. and click Remake. In this exercise. you changed the size of an existing mass family.

This concludes the massing tutorial. and click OK. right-click on the 3D view. 5 On the View menu. 8 Click None to clear the selection. to the building shell.Massing only. click All to select all categories. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. 9 Select Mass.Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 4 Rename the view 3D . you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. and click Duplicate. In this exercise. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 769 . 7 Clear one of the check boxes. If desired. 3 In the Project Browser. such as columns and an extruded roof. You might create the model shown. click Visibility/Graphics.

770 | Chapter 22 Massing .

771 .Site 23 In this tutorial. you use the site tools in Autodesk Revit Building to add and modify site components within a project.

and click Site. 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Site. expand Views (all). click Toposurface. expand Floor Plans.Using Site Tools In this lesson. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. Using the first method. and then modify the data. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. click Point.rvt file located in the Metric folder. right-click in the Design Bar. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. You add property lines manually. 5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. convert the data to a table. Open the m_First_Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and walkways. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. click the Training Files icon. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. 772 | Chapter 23 Site . 4 On the Options Bar. you create a toposurface using two different methods. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. This project file was created using the default metric template. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. In the second part of this exercise. islands. you add a building pad to the site. In the final exercises.

A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm.6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. 8 On the Options Bar. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Use the following illustration as a reference. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Using Site Tools | 773 . TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour.

click Finish Surface. 15 On the View Control Bar. 12000 mm. under Increment. 15000 mm. 13 In the Site Settings dialog box. click Site Settings. click . 12 On the Settings menu. Use the following illustration as a reference. 774 | Chapter 23 Site . click Model Graphics Style. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click Shading with Edges. enter 1500 mm. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. under Additional Contours.10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. 14 On the View toolbar. This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle.

under Floor Plans. 29 Select the imported topography. under Views (all). DGN. enter 1000 mm. Until it is exploded. Under Import or Link. Before importing the contour data. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. it is considered an import symbol. Using Site Tools | 775 . under Views (all). double-click Site. 26 In the Import/Link dialog box: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 23 Click the Level 1 text. and press ENTER. rename the level Base Site Elevation. 21 Click the Level 2 text. click the Training Files icon. 19 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Design Bar. modify the level names and elevations. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import.16 On the View toolbar. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog box. select Current view only and choose Select for Layers. Under Layer/Level Colors. click Modify. select Preserve colors. and press ENTER. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. click Yes. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 18 In the Project Browser. and double-click South. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. click Modify. click the elevation value. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. 25 On the File menu. 24 In the Project Browser. click to delete it. and click OK. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. on the Standard toolbar. Click Open. DXF. and press ENTER. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. rename the level Basement. SAT. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark.

click Toposurface. 776 | Chapter 23 Site . The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. click Pin Position. and then click OK. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. click Modify. When you select the import symbol. 32 On the View menu. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog box. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 34 Under Visibility. click the Annotations Categories tab. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. clear Elevations. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics.30 On the Edit menu. select it. when the edges highlight. clear C_INDX. 36 On the Design Bar. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance.

41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 43 On the File menu. click Finish Surface. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor.39 On the Design Bar. click . Using the second method.rvt. Using the first method. 42 On the View toolbar. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you add property lines using two methods. click Save As. 40 On the View toolbar. Using Site Tools | 777 . name the project Site-in progress. Adding Property Lines. and click Save.

Although you can use your preferred sketching method. Site-in progress. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. click Lines. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. double-click Site. do so before continuing. click Property Line. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 4 On the Design Bar. add an arc line on the right. Click Modify. and click OK. Select and delete the right vertical line. under Floor Plans. select Create property lines by sketching. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. If you have not completed the previous exercise. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. click Lines. On the Design Bar. 778 | Chapter 23 Site .This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Using the 3-point Arc tool.

8 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Property Lines dialog box.7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. A warning dialog box is displayed. click OK. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Using Site Tools | 779 . NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog box depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. select Edit Table. click Property Line. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 14 In the Property Lines dialog box. 15 Starting in Row #1. click 12 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. when they highlight. on the Standard toolbar. to delete them. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click OK. 9 In the warning dialog box. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. select the lines. and click OK.

Before adding property line segment tags. 22 Select M_Property Line Tag. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style. and click Shading with Edges. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 27 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. This means there is no gap in the property lines. 26 Under Visibility. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 24 On the View menu.Notice that after you complete the last line. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 23 In the Tags dialog box. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 19 In the Tags dialog box. and click Drafting. 28 On the Options Bar. click to place it.rfa and click Open. 31 On the View Control Bar. 30 Tag the three remaining property lines. 20 Click Load. right-click in the Design Bar. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. click Tag. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. click Training Files. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. 16 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. If the gap is not closed. clear Leader. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. click to place the property lines. 780 | Chapter 23 Site . and open the folder. open the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Annotations folder. 29 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference.dwg and click OK. The tags display more prominently in this view. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click the Imported Categories tab. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off.

you loaded and tagged the property line segments. Site-in progress. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog box. click Object Styles. In the Object Styles dialog box. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 2 On the Settings menu. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. Using Site Tools | 781 . click Model Graphics Style. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In this exercise. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. and click OK. click Save. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that it is a subcategory of Topography. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. In the final step. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog box. In the next exercise.rvt. this project file is required in its current state.32 On the File menu. you created two sets of property lines. enter the name Working Contour. and click Wireframe. click New. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography.

specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. The object style subcategory. Under Line Color. 782 | Chapter 23 Site . select Single Value. The next exercise requires a new dataset. Under Line Pattern. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. select a shade of Brown.0 mm. 12 On the File menu. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. 7 Click OK. Working Contour. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu.6 In the Object Styles dialog box. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. select Dash dot. Under Subcategory. Creating Topographic Subregions. click Close. enter 1000. In this exercise. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. 10 Under Additional Contours. 9 In the Site Settings dialog box. under Contour Line Display. Under Range Type. select Working Contour. 11 Click OK. click Site Settings.

such as material.In the next exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. click Open. 2 On the Design Bar. Although the exact dimensions are not important. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. parking areas. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. click the Training Files icon. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. parking areas. click Lines. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and islands. click Subregion. Open the m_Site. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. and islands. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Using Site Tools | 783 . try to replicate the location and proportion. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. NOTE In the Metric dataset. you create topographic subregions to define roads. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar.

Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. and double-click Topography Schedule. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. under Identity Data. click the Value for Material. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. When you finish the sketch in a later step. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. click Shading with Edges. click Finish Sketch.Tarmacadam for Name. under Materials and Finishes. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box.Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. 6 In the Materials dialog box. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser.Tarmacadam. click Properties. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. 784 | Chapter 23 Site . 8 On the Design Bar. select Site . enter Parking for Name. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . 9 On the View menu.

15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. 16 On the Design Bar. 22 In the upper-right parking area. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. As you create new subregions. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. they display within this schedule. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. and click Shading with Edges. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. Within each subregion. under Floor Plans. Delete overlapping lines. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. under Schedules/Quantities. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. 12 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Subregion. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. double-click Topography Schedule. Using Site Tools | 785 . click Finish Sketch. click Edit Boundary. 14 On the Options Bar. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. 18 In the Project Browser. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. Notice that the project area has increased. click Lines. In this training project. 21 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are not important at this time.NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch.

Grass for Name. click Finish Sketch.23 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Site. double-click Topography Schedule. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the Value for Material. and click OK. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information.Grass. You must sketch each region separately. Name each region Island . enter Island . 27 On the Design Bar. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration.Grass for Name. under Materials and Finishes. 25 In the Materials dialog box.Grass. under Identity Data. and apply the material Site . click Properties. 786 | Chapter 23 Site . 29 In the Project Browser. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. select Site .

click Subregion. and apply the material Concrete .30 In the Project Browser. Add the concrete walkway 31 In the Project Browser.walkway. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. Using Site Tools | 787 .Cast-in-Situ Concrete . WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. click Lines. 32 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Name the subregion Walkway. double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. 33 On the Design Bar. 34 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Notice that the schedule has been updated. 35 On the Design Bar.

If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. When you use the grading tool. double-click Topography Schedule. this project file is required in its current state. Grading the Toposurface. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. under Schedules/Quantities. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 36 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Save As. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Save. there is still only one toposurface. 38 Navigate to your preferred folder.rvt. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area.NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. 788 | Chapter 23 Site . Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Notice that the schedule has been updated. Site tutorial-in progress. 37 On the File menu.

6 On the Design Bar. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. double-click Site.Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. under Floor Plans. click Graded Region. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. see the tutorial. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Select and Edit. select Copy Internal Points. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. 8 Select the topographic surface. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. 5 On the Design Bar. Using Phasing. and click OK. under Phasing. 7 In the Graded Region dialog box. 2 Select the toposurface. Using Site Tools | 789 . A warning dialog box is displayed. 3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click . select Existing for Phase Created.

10 Press DELETE. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 790 | Chapter 23 Site . demolished. and new. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.

Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. Using Site Tools | 791 . Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 13 Press DELETE. click Point. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration.11 On the View Control Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. and click Hidden Line.

18 On the View toolbar. and click Shading with Edges. 792 | Chapter 23 Site . 19 On the View Control Bar. The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. click . click Finish Surface. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click View Properties.17 On the Design Bar. click . Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. click Model Graphics Style. 20 On the View toolbar.

click Lines. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 26 On the File menu. double-click Site. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. under Phasing. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. 23 Select the toposurface. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. Therefore. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. If you have an existing building model. 24 On the View menu. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. under Floor Plans. you can delete it. When you add a building pad. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Site tutorial-in progress. specify Existing for Phase. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. NOTE By default. the Pick Walls command is active. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Using Site Tools | 793 . Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser.22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Only the graded topography displays. under Phasing. Adding a Building Pad. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. you create a building pad. click Pad.rvt. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. and click OK. and delete it. click View Properties. only the original toposurface displays. and click OK. specify New Construction for Phase. this project file is required in its current state. 4 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.

click Finish Sketch. . and click Shading with Edges. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Model Graphics Style. 6 On the View Control Bar. Notice the new building 794 | Chapter 23 Site . click 8 On the View toolbar. . click pad. 7 On the View toolbar.5 On the Design Bar.

Adding Site Components In this exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. this project file is required in its current state. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. under Floor Plans. and select the parking space. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. Adding Site Components. click Save. 5 On the Design Bar. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . click Parking Component. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.rvt. Using Site Tools | 795 . click Modify. Site tutorial-in progress. double-click Site.90 deg. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.9 On the File menu.

Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. click Site Component. . . double-click Site.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. 796 | Chapter 23 Site . and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. click 9 On the View toolbar. Notice the new parking Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. 8 On the View toolbar. 12 In the Type Selector. choose any tree type. under Floor Plans. click spaces.

Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click . 14 On the View toolbar.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. Using Site Tools | 797 . 15 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click .

select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed.NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. click Save. In the following illustration.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. this project file is required in its current state. and click Apply. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Apply. and click OK. Site tutorial-in progress. click Tag All Not Tagged. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. In the following exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. 798 | Chapter 23 Site . 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. click Hidden Line. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Site. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. 16 On the File menu.

and click Add. click the Fields tab. and click OK.NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. 4 Under Available fields. select Parking for Category. select Type. select Mark. 7 Under Fields. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. enter Space. 8 Under Fields. Creating Parking Space Schedules.rvt. select Mark. The parking schedule is displayed. Site tutorial-in progress. and click OK. you create a parking schedule. Using Site Tools | 799 . and click Add. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 6 Click the Formatting tab. If necessary. click Save. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Under Available fields. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and under Heading. and under Heading. 7 On the File menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. select Type. click Schedule/Quantities. this project file is required in its current state. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. enter Size. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial.

This allows you to know which space you are numbering. number the first three spaces consecutively. 800 | Chapter 23 Site . 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Window menu. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. under Floor Plans. 12 In the Site plan. 13 In the Parking Schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. under Views (all). This closes all the views except the parking schedule. click Tile.9 On the Window menu. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. click Close Hidden Windows. double-click Site. under Space. under Space. click Save. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 15 On the File menu. 14 In the Parking Schedule.

It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. you also simplify the modification process. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Autodesk Revit Building. For example. You can also nest groups within other groups. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. you not only simplify their placement. and modify repetitive units. place. or with those working on a different project. 801 . In this tutorial. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. and then you create a group for a typical toilet room that is nested within the guest room group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. all instances in the building model are updated. By grouping objects. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. you create a model group for a typical hotel guest room.

Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include hotel rooms. The view is zoomed in to the selected room. 802 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Open. 2 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. You zoom in so that you can select objects in the room accurately. you create a model group for a typical hotel room. and double-click Level 2. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. expand Groups. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. click the Training Files icon. After you create a model group. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. Open the m_Grouping. expand Floor Plans. name the file Grouping-in progress. Specify a view 1 In the Project Browser. and select the bed. desk. 7 Right-click Group 1. expand Views (all). Create a group from drawing objects 4 Press and hold CTRL. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and click Rename. and press ENTER. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 Enter Typical guest room.Creating Groups In this lesson. click Save As. and typical office layouts. and click Save. and expand Model. click . 10 Navigate to your preferred directory. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 5 On the Edit toolbar. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units.rvt. Placing a Group. chair. 3 Draw a rectangle around the populated room. and two nightstands. 9 On the File menu. 6 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. classrooms. Creating a Group In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Grouping-in progress. 5 On the Options Bar. Modify the origin of a group 1 In the drawing area. 7 On the Edit toolbar. A second instance of the group is added to the drawing.Placing a Group In this exercise. you use drag and drop functionality to place a new instance of a group in the floor plan.rvt. You also mirror an existing instance of a group. Mirror a group 6 In the drawing area. 2 Drag the group origin to the wall intersection directly below the entry door. 8 Select the wall abutted by the desk and tub of the original instance as the axis of reflection. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click . 4 Snap the origin to the wall intersection below the entry door. select Typical guest room and drag it to the room below the original instance of the group. Drag a group into position 3 In the Project Browser. click Finish. select the original instance of the group. select the group. Creating Groups | 803 . using an adjacent wall as the axis of reflection. as shown.

Modifying a Group. as shown. 2 On the Options Bar. select the mirrored instance of the Typical guest room group. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit Group. Modifying a Group In this exercise. you make changes to a single instance of a group.You should now have three instances of the Typical guest room group in your model: two with the original orientation and one mirrored. Grouping-in progress.rvt. 1 In the drawing area. click Save. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. 9 On the File menu. When you finish the editing routine. 804 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.

The new group is considered nested within the host group. When you make changes to a nested group. This ensures that the modifications are propagated when each new instance of the host group is added to the building model and also when each stand-alone instance of the nested group is added. All other elements in the model are grayed out. click . you create a group that you add to a previously created group. 4 On the Edit toolbar. and select the desk and chair. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating Nested Groups In this lesson. and is contained in every new instance of the host group that you place in the building model. The edge of the desk is aligned with the exterior wall. All instances of the Typical guest room are updated to reflect the change.The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. Creating Nested Groups. click Finish Group. Creating Nested Groups | 805 . 6 Click the exterior wall as the move end point. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. 5 Click near the left edge of the desk as the move start point. 8 On the File menu. click Save. 3 Press and hold CTRL. the host group is also updated.

Grouping-in progress. select all the elements that make up the toilet room and closet. expand Model. When you nest the toilet room in the guest room.rvt. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. which acts as the host. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. In the selection. 806 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and click Rename. and press ENTER. you create a group for a toilet room that you add to the guest room group. make sure you also include both doors and their host walls. right-click Group 1. Change the origin of a group 5 Select the original instance of Typical guest room. click . 6 Drag the origin of the group to the intersection of the corridor wall and the guest room wall nearest the tub. and the wall separating the bathroom and closet. expand Groups. 3 In the Project Browser. The new group is then nested within the original group. 2 On the Edit toolbar. 4 Enter Typical toilet room.Creating a Nested Group In this exercise. Create a group 1 In the original instance of the Typical guest room group.

Grouping-in progress. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. click Finish Group.rvt. Modifying a Nested Group. you add a component to a single instance of the nested toilet room group. The Typical toilet room group is nested in the Typical guest room group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. select the Typical toilet room group. Creating Nested Groups | 807 . Modifying a Nested Group In this exercise. all instances of the nested group are updated in the building model. verify that Multiple is clear.Create a nested group 7 On the Options Bar. 10 In the drawing area. the host group is also updated so that new instances of either group contain the new component. Because the modified group is nested. select m_Pedestal_Sink-3D. click Add To Group. 8 On the Design Bar. The elements of the group are grayed out in every instance. click Save. 2 In the Type Selector. 3 In the drawing area. click Edit Group. click Component. When you edit the group to add the component. everything else is available for selection. 9 On the Options Bar. Add a component to the model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the File menu. place the cursor over one of the toilet rooms and press the spacebar three times to rotate the sink to the orientation shown. and all instances are updated to include the nested group. 11 On the Design Bar.

and select the nested toilet room group. 5 On the Design Bar. click Finish Group. 10 In the drawing area. Edit a nested group 6 Move the cursor over the same instance of the toilet room group in which you placed the sink. click Edit Group. 9 On the Design Bar. 808 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 7 Press TAB.4 Place the sink on the wall with the toilet in any instance of the Typical toilet room. select the sink. click Add To Group. 8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

Duplicating a Group In this exercise. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. but automatically create a new group as part of the process to fix the group. 12 On the File menu.All instances of the nested group are updated with the change. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation.rvt. you use the Duplicate command to create a group based on an existing group. 2 Right-click Typical guest room 2. Working with Groups | 809 . You also create a detail group in the level 2 floor plan that you add to the building model in a different floor plan view. You then customize the new group for use in the current building model. you draw an axis of reflection at the midpoint of the building model so that the group is mirrored from its location at the top of the building model to a location at the bottom. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. 3 Enter Corner guest room. Lastly. and press ENTER. having created a group that represents a typical layout. Grouping-in progress. Use Project Browser to duplicate a group 1 In the Project Browser. In subsequent exercises. and click Rename. you save it to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. When you load the group from the library into a new project. After you finish the modified group. Working with Groups. You create a group based on an existing group by using the Duplicate command. and then save the tags as an attached detail group. You then place the new group in the building model. right-click Typical guest room. A new group definition (Typical guest room 2) is displayed in the Project Browser. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. click Save. and click Duplicate. You use functionality that allows you to not only fix inconsistencies among instances of a group. Working with Groups In this lesson. and customize it so that it fits in the available space and has the correct group nested within it. under Groups. you add door tags to a group.

where the corridor wall and the exterior wall intersect. and press DELETE. click Finish. This is because the corner room is smaller than the interior rooms. click Finish Group. Edit a duplicated group 8 In the drawing area. 9 On the Options Bar. and drag it into the corner guest room. click Remove From Group. 12 Move the desk and chair so that they are within the room. select Corner toilet room. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar.Place a duplicated group 4 Drag Corner guest room from the Project Browser to the vacant room in the northwest corner of the building. 16 Select the same toilet room group. click Edit Group. 11 On the Edit toolbar. to specify the group origin. 14 Select the toilet room. and select the desk and chair. Notice that the desk overlaps the exterior wall. 10 Press and hold CTRL. click OK. select the Corner guest room group. 5 Click at the upper-right corner of the room. Nest a group 17 In the Project Browser. 7 After a warning message displays. click . 6 On the Options Bar. 810 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

21 On the Design Bar. past the exterior wall. 19 In the drawing area. 25 On the Edit toolbar. select the Corner guest room group. 27 Click the midpoint of the corridor wall as the start point of the axis of reflection as shown. enter SM on your keyboard to limit snaps to midpoints. 23 On the Design Bar. click 26 On the Options Bar. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. select the Corner guest room group. Creating a Detail Group. Working with Groups | 811 . click . A new instance of the Corner guest room group is added to the southwest corner of the building model. click Edit Group. click Finish Group. 28 Drag the cursor to the left. 18 On the Options Bar. for Axis. click Add To Group. 22 In the drawing area. select the Corner toilet room group. and click to specify the end point. TIP If a warning appears indicating that there are errors that cannot be ignored. TIP To help find the midpoint of the wall. Mirror along a drawn axis of reflection 24 In the drawing area.Use the inside corner of the exterior wall and the corridor wall as the origin of the group. click Finish to finish placing the group. click Unjoin Elements to resolve the errors. 29 On the File menu. staying perpendicular to the corridor wall. 20 On the Options Bar.

You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Add a text note 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click to draw a rectangular region. 812 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Filled Region. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 4 Move the cursor down and to the right. 5 On the Design Bar. Grouping-in progress. 9 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 3 Click the lower-left endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click to add an arc leader. 7 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Text. 10 Enter Tile. and select a point on the interior of the vertical wall. and click Modify on the Design Bar. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. 8 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Draw a filled region 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

clear Leader. Modify a group origin 16 In the drawing area. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added.rvt. 14 Right-click Group 1. Grouping-in progress. Because the detail group contains variables. and expand Detail. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. click Save. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. under Floor Plans.Create a detail group 11 Press and hold CTRL. you must manually attach it to each instance of the Typical toilet room group. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. you add door tags to the Typical toilet room group. 12 On the Edit toolbar. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the File menu. click Tag. and press ENTER. and select the note and the filled region. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Working with Groups | 813 . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 15 Enter Elevator lobby tile. double-click Level 2. double-click Level 3. Using Attached Detail Groups. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 4 Place two door tags in the original instance of the Typical toilet room. 19 Drag an instance of the Elevator lobby tile group from the Project Browser into the level 3 view. and click Rename. as shown. click . 13 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. expand Groups.

press TAB. 9 Right-click Group 1. 8 In the Project Browser. expand Attached Detail. A warning dialog box is displayed. and click Rename. click . Place a detail group in another group instance 11 Move the cursor over the Typical toilet room group. and click OK. The new instance of the attached detail group is added at the same relative position and orientation as in the original instance of the model group.5 On the Design Bar. and select the nested Typical toilet room group. 10 Enter Door tags. and expand Typical toilet room. click Place Detail. (this group is just below the original instance of the Typical guest room group). press and hold CTRL. informing you that an attached detail group has been created for the Typical toilet room group. click Modify. and press ENTER. select Door tags. 814 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and select the two door tags. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 13 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog box. 7 On the Edit toolbar. 12 On the Options Bar. expand Groups.

Grouping-in progress. click Save to Library ➤ Save Group. click Save. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. and place it in the upper-right corner of the square. Place an instance of the loaded group 12 In the Project Browser. select Typical toilet room for Group To Save. navigate to the directory where you saved the group.rte file located in the Metric folder. and click Open. and expand Model. click OK. click Load from Library ➤ Load Group. therefore. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. drag it into the drawing area. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. and click Open. and then drag the cursor so that all the walls in the square are 6000 mm long. as shown.rvg. 5 In the New Project dialog box. click the Training Files icon. click OK. NOTE Groups containing nested groups cannot be saved. 14 On the File menu. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog box. 6 On the File menu. expand Groups.NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. click to draw a square. click Wall. click Browse. 7 In the Load Group dialog box. under Template file. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Click Save. ■ ■ ■ In the New Project dialog box. 2 In the Save Group dialog box. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Select the m_Tutorial_Default. 10 On the Options Bar. select Typical toilet room. Working with Groups | 815 . click New ➤ Project.rvt. 13 Select Typical toilet room. 11 In the drawing area. Save a group to a library 1 On the File menu. Saving and Loading Groups. Sketch walls 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to specify the start point of the square. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise.

14 On the Options Bar.IMPORTANT Be sure to line up the outline of the group with the exterior surface of the walls. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 On the File menu. select the instance of Typical toilet room. Automatically Creating a Group. and click Save. The new group is created automatically and contains the same components as the existing group. The toilet and the tub are wall-hosted components whose hosts are not part of the group. click Save. so it is important to place the group accurately in order to use the walls you sketched. 816 | Chapter 24 Grouping . the software gives you the option of fixing the inconsistency by creating a new group. 3 Select the wall shared by the toilet and the sink as the axis of reflection. Automatically Creating a Group In this exercise. The Typical toilet room model group is added to the new project. 1 In the drawing area. you mirror the instance of the Typical toilet room group you added to the new project in the previous exercise. Because one of the wall-hosted components in the group does not have a wall in the mirrored group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 16 Enter Loaded_Group for File name. click Finish. click . 2 On the Edit toolbar. Loaded_Group. except for the wall-hosted component for which there is no wall.

click Create new group types. a warning dialog box is displayed. 7 On the File menu. 5 In the Fix Inconsistent Groups dialog box. and a new group (Typical toilet room 2) is created. 6 On the Design Bar. Working with Groups | 817 . Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. click Fix Groups. click Modify.Because there is no wall to host the tub in the mirrored instance. and click OK. The Typical toilet room model group is mirrored. The tub component is not included in the new group because there is no wall to host it. click Close. 4 In the warning dialog box.

818 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

After completing level 1. You begin by adding the structural walls. In the final lesson. and beams to Level 1. columns. you use the structural tools in Autodesk Revit Building to create a building model skeleton.Structural 25 In this tutorial. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. 819 .

Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. Open the m_Structural. 820 | Chapter 25 Structural .Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan.rvt file located in the Metric folder. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. click Open.

you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. go to the Project Browser.rvt. 8 On the File menu. select Invert colors. Sketching Structural Walls. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog box. SAT. Adding Structural Walls | 821 .Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. 6 Under Positioning. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. If necessary. under Import or Link. and select m_wall-import. select Automatically place. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. In this exercise. After you trace the walls. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. expand Views (all). 4 In the Import/Link dialog box.dwg from the Metric folder. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. DXF. 7 Click Open. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you imported a DWG file. expand Floor Plans. DGN. This file is used in the next exercise. to trace the initial set of structural walls. click Save As. click the Training Files icon. and select Origin to origin. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. Select All for Layers. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Link (instead of import). 2 On the File menu. Select Current view only. and double-click Level 2.

First. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the Structural tab already displays on the Design Bar. In addition. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. Structural_tutorial. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. rather than the height. you can add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. click Structural Wall. select Basic Wall: Generic . This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. proceed to Step 2. 822 | Chapter 25 Structural . and click Structural.200mm. 5 In the Type Selector.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Right-click the Design Bar.

and click to specify the next wall endpoint. 9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection.6 On the Options Bar. Specify Level 1. and click to specify the wall endpoint. Click . and click the next line intersection. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. Adding Structural Walls | 823 . ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. In the steps that follow. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Depth. 10 Move the cursor to the right.

in the View toolbar. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking the 3D view. TIP If necessary. expand Views (all). click Modify to finish the sketch. 12 On the Design Bar. click . Use the tools to modify 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View toolbar. expand Floor Plans. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. and double-click Level 2. 824 | Chapter 25 Structural . and click to complete the chain of walls.11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left.

sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. On the Options Bar. you may want to zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. click . click Modify to end the wall chain. Adding Structural Walls | 825 . click Structural Wall. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. 19 On the View toolbar. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar.16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK.200mm. This is the right extent of the arc. 25 In the Type Selector. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. 23 Under Visibility. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box.dwg. click Visibility/Graphics. 826 | Chapter 25 Structural . Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic . Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall.Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Structural Wall. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. This is the left extent of the arc. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. 26 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. click . 21 On the View menu. 28 On the Options Bar. click the Imported Categories tab. Click to create a three-point arc. clear m_wall-import. ■ 27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc.

29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. enter 1500. click the value. If it is not. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. Adding Structural Walls | 827 . 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. 32 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Modify.

35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown.34 Select the lower horizontal wall. you create the final structural walls for the project. enter 1500. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. clear Chain. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint shown in the illustration below. 36 On the Design Bar. Both walls are 1200 mm long. In the steps that follow. 828 | Chapter 25 Structural .

click . click Modify. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps.38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. 41 On the View toolbar. 39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. Adding Structural Walls | 829 . 40 On the Design Bar.

830 | Chapter 25 Structural . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. double-click Level 2. Structural_tutorial. In the next exercise. click Dimension.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In this exercise. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. This project file is required. You then make minor modifications to their position. click Save. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. in its current state. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model.42 On the File menu.

Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. Adding Structural Walls | 831 . 6 Move the cursor to the left.4 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. and click OK. Select Entire Walls for Pick. and click to place the dimension as shown. click Modify. select it. ■ ■ 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. select Intersecting Walls. the Options button becomes available. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. On the Options Bar. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. and when it highlights. After you select Entire Walls. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . click Options to specify the wall pick options.

832 | Chapter 25 Structural .9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. 11 Click the temporary dimension value.

Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. several different beam types. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial.Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 833 . click Undo Edit dimension length. click Save. 12 On the Edit menu. 13 On the File menu. In the next lesson. in its current state. This project file is required. joists. In this exercise. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. Adding Structural Columns and Beams. you add structural columns. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model.

press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. double-click Level 1. zoom in to place the column. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. click Structural Column. Structural_tutorial. select Height. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. TIP When adding the column. and Level 2. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. 4 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. and you place a column outside of the grids. 834 | Chapter 25 Structural . 5 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. you use the grid intersection tool. In addition. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. 2 On the View menu. If necessary.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

9 Use a crossing selection. and A. C3.7 Add similar columns to C2. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. TIP To create the crossing selection. and select grids 1-5. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 835 . and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. click Grid Intersection. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. and C5.

15 On the Options Bar.10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. 14 If necessary. zoom out until you can see all the grids. 836 | Chapter 25 Structural . Columns A3-5 are shown below. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. This completes this set of columns. click Finish. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position.

click Finish. click Modify. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 837 . Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. click Grid Intersection. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. click Structural Column. 19 On the Options Bar. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. 24 On the Design Bar.Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. B3-5 are shown below.

click . Adding Structural Beams and Girders. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. Start the beam at the column and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 838 | Chapter 25 Structural . click Save. you add beams manually. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. Structural_tutorial. 4 In the Type Selector. in its current state. As you use the beam tool. you add structural beams to the building model.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the View menu. In the next exercise. you used various methods to add structural columns. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.25 On the View toolbar. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. expand Views (all). you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. This project file is required. click Beam. 26 On the File menu. double-click Level 2. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically.

9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first.7 On the Design Bar. and then move the cursor up to grid A. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 839 . 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. 10 In the Type Selector. click Beam. select Girder for Usage. 11 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32.7.

840 | Chapter 25 Structural . For example. When you use the grid tool to place beams. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. click Grid. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. if a beam is joined column-to-column. Column Brace Ho o tal riz n Bracing Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns.Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. Use the following table for other conditions. 14 On the Options Bar.

and press ENTER. click Finish. 22 In the Type Selector. 18 On the Design Bar. click the temporary dimension value. press and hold CTRL. 23 On the Options Bar. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. 21 On the Design Bar. click Beam. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 24 Select grid 3.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. enter 8200. and select grid C. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. click Grid. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 841 . click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar.

Notice beams are added between columns. select Girder. In addition. select Chain. Press ESC to end the chain. select Girder for Usage. and for Usage. 28 On the Options Bar. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. Click column B5 to add the first beam. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. 842 | Chapter 25 Structural . click Finish. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar.

to snap only to intersections. Press ESC to end the chain. Press ESC to end the chain. select Girder for Usage. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. 34 On the Options Bar. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. click Finish. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. 30 On the Options Bar. SI. You can also use the shortcut key. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 843 . connecting the column at B4. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4.29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 33 Select grid A. click Grid.

The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. click Finish. 844 | Chapter 25 Structural . click . 38 On the Options Bar. 36 On the Options Bar.7 beam had crossed grid A. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. click Grid. 39 On the View toolbar. 37 Select grid B. If the W310x32.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly.

double-click Level 2. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 845 . 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. click Modify. 43 In the Type Selector. In the steps that follow. 47 On the Design Bar.Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click . 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar. select Girder for Usage. 46 Move the cursor to the right. click Beam. 45 Specify the beam start point at the centerline and endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grids 4 and 5. 48 On the View toolbar. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints).

50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region.Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. In the steps that follow. for Usage. double-click Level 2. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. 52 In the Type Selector. and click when it intersects grid 2. click Beam. 53 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Girder. 846 | Chapter 25 Structural . 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall and grid A. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall centerline and grid 3. and select Chain.

56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. and click when it intersects grid 1. 57 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 847 . Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. click .

and purlins to the building model. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. M_W-Wide Flange. you replace some of the existing girders with trusses. You also add joists and purlins to the building model. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise.7. you add joists. click Beam. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid 1. click Save. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.B3 quadrants. You then create a joist array. 848 | Chapter 25 Structural . when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists.58 On the File menu. in its current state. In the next exercise. In this exercise. double-click Level 2. Adding Joists and Purlins. Structural Framing. 2 Zoom around the A1 . Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. For example.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. This project file is required. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. 5 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. under Families. 4 In the Project Browser. click W310x32.

according to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary.6 On the Design Bar. the Automatic option was selected by default in the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 849 . notice that the Structural Usage parameter value is Joist. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. Create a joist array 11 On the Edit menu. click on the Options Bar. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. 7 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. 8 With the beam selected. 10 Click OK. click Array. In addition. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. click Modify.

Clear Group and Associate. Enter 14 for Number. enter 1250 and press ENTER. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. Select 2nd for Move to.12 On the Options Bar. Once the direction is set. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. 850 | Chapter 25 Structural . 13 Enter SI to snap only to intersections. Make sure the cursor is over grid A.

click Beam.7 beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin.Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 17 Add a W310x32. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 851 .

click Array. and click. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. 852 | Chapter 25 Structural . and purlins. Clear Group and Associate. Enter 7 for Number. 20 On the Edit menu. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage value. style. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown. This is the array start point. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. and color within the Object Styles dialog box. joists. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. 21 On the Options Bar. Select 2nd for Move to.

and click OK. 26 In the Filter dialog box. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 853 . 25 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. click . clear all options except Structural Framing. click .The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2.

This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. 854 | Chapter 25 Structural . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels. click Save. and notice the connection symbols display. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. in its current state. click Modify. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select Moment Connection Last Select Moment Connection First Click OK. click . 31 On the File menu. In this exercise. you create new levels. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. 29 On the Design Bar. This project file is required. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. 30 On the View toolbar.28 In the Element Properties dialog box. In the next lesson.

Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. Click to add Level 3. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 855 . click Level. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels.Defining New Levels In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. select Make Plan View. and double-click Building Elevation. Structural_tutorial. 2 Select grid 1. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Views (all). You need at least 3 meters of space. 5 On the Options Bar. expand Elevations. you create several new levels. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2.

where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. This project file is required. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. click Save. 856 | Chapter 25 Structural . In this exercise. 8 On the File menu. Each level is 3000 mm high. in its current state.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you created three new levels. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. Structural_tutorial. click .In the Project Browser. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. These levels that are required in the next exercise. Duplicating the Existing Design.

press and hold CTRL. click OK. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 857 . click Modify. 7 In the Select Levels dialog box. click Copy to Clipboard. and select Levels 3 and 4. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Select Levels dialog box. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. 5 On the Edit menu. 8 On the Design Bar. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select Level 2. 3 On the Edit menu. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. Make sure the entire building model is included.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. click Modify.

you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces.9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. you create a framing elevation. In this exercise. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. In the next lesson. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. click Save. 10 On the File menu. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. You copied the Level 1 structure elements and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. in its current state. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation. double-click Building Elevation. This project file is required. 858 | Chapter 25 Structural .

rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click. in the Project Browser.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 6 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. double-click Level 2. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. click Framing Elevation. make sure Attach to Grid is selected. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. You can now view the new elevation. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 859 . 4 Place the cursor over grid C. Elevation 1-a. click Modify. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Structural_tutorial.

Structural_tutorial. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. This project file is required.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In the next exercise. 7 On the File menu. Adding Structural Braces. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. you add structural braces to the building model. click Save. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. 860 | Chapter 25 Structural .Notice the stick framing representation. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. In this exercise. You are ready to add the structural braces. in its current state. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.

you use point-to-point insertion.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. When adding the braces. NOTE If necessary. 3 In the Type Selector. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 861 .4. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. click Brace. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select the grids and drag the grid heads above level 5. select M_C-Channel: C75x7. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. and using the shape grips. select the view crop box.

The second brace is displayed. 10 On the Edit menu. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. 7 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. Enter 4 for Number. Select Constrain. click Array. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. Select 2nd for Move to. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint.The brace displays. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. click Modify. 862 | Chapter 25 Structural . 11 On the Options Bar. Clear Group and Associate.

Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 863 . 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. select Structural Framing Tags. click . click Tag All Not Tagged.14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. and click OK.

In this exercise. you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. click Save. 864 | Chapter 25 Structural .17 On the File menu.

This prevents possible conflicts within the project. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. All other team members can view this workset. they cannot make changes to it. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. 865 . Only one user can edit each workset at a given time.Sharing Projects 26 When working with large building projects. You can enable Worksharing for any project. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. floors. however. such as walls. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Autodesk Revit Building®. A workset is a collection of building elements. stairs. In this tutorial. and so on. doors. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Using Worksharing. called Worksharing.

you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog box for that element. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. After learning the fundamentals. a dialog box displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. select the desired workset. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. use Element Borrowing. To make a workset editable. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. In a multi-story structure. you can select which worksets are open or closed. go to the Worksets dialog box. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. Elements specific to a view. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you must first enable Worksharing. When you are working on a shared project. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Building by opening only those worksets required for your work. and click Editable. When setting up Worksharing. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. The first time you activate worksets within a project. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. such as a tenant interior. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog box. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. such as annotations and dimensions. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. After the project is shared. Instead. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. 866 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . Working in a shared project In a shared project. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. ■ Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you specify an active workset. In the next exercise.

This allows Revit Building to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. if a workset named Interior was created. for a typical project. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Experience has shown that. Shared Levels and Grids. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. with each assigned a specific functional task. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. You should have at least one workset for each person. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Regardless of the default setting. Therefore. When creating the new worksets. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. ■ Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. When you create a new workset. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. On this tab. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. For example.■ Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. ■ Team member roles Typically. not including the Project Standards. In most projects. As new members create worksets for their own use. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. the file is saved as the central file. Step 2: Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. designers work in teams. and View worksets. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Generally. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Using Worksharing in a Project | 867 . the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly.

If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. and then save the local file. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. However. however. When you save to the central file. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. When you save locally (to your local file). You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. When working remotely. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you make that workset editable by you. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. save to the central file. you can select which workset is active. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. When you save to the central file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. After saving to the central file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable.Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you should use it only when: ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. your changes propagate to the entire team. you work no differently then you would in the office. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. your changes are saved. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you should then save to your local file. or 868 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . This makes them available to other team members. within the local file. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you have the option to choose which worksets to open.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. When finished or at regular intervals. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. In this instance. This is called “Selective Open. make any required worksets editable. In this situation. proceeds as usual. As you work. On the Options Bar. Step 9: Work on the project Work on the project. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them.

you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In this conceptual exercise.■ You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. A dialog box displays suggesting that any user new to Worksharing should complete this training. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. click Open. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios.rvt file located in the Common folder. Alternatively. for instance. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names." Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. Open the c_Worksets. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. click Worksets. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. Using Worksharing in a Project | 869 . To do this. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. click the Training Files icon. reload the latest changes from the central file. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to default worksets. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. using VPN. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Building. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. and make that workset editable. The Worksets dialog box is displayed. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you should check out the Materials workset. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. In the next exercise.

one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. Your username displays as the present owner. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. 9 Click OK. select Workset1. In this simple training project. 6 Under Show. and notice all are editable by you. another is assigned the interior layout. 4 In the Worksets dialog box. 13 Click Rename. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Project Standards. Therefore. In this case. Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog box. it is better to make them visible by default. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. you can rename the default workset. 12 In the Worksets dialog box. turn off Families. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. under Show. For training purposes. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. and click OK. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Only User-Created worksets should display. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. imagine four users including yourself. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. 10 Click New. click New. currently named Workset1. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. 870 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects .3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. clear Visible by default in all views. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. Because the interior walls appear in many views. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. and Views.

select Interior Layout for Workset. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. type the name Exterior Shell. 18 On the Options Bar. including the interior doors. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. and walls. When you initially activate Worksharing. 15 In the Worksets dialog box. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. 24 Select all of the interior elements. under Identity Data. 21 Select one of the interior walls. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. expand Floor Plans. under Identity Data. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. click . Using Worksharing in a Project | 871 . expand Views (all). In this training file. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. 22 On the Options Bar. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. 17 In the drawing area. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. stairs. click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets.14 In the Rename dialog box. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. You do. click . however. 20 Click OK.

36 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box.25 On the Options Bar. and click OK. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. If any interior elements remain. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. under Views (all). The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click . 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 35 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 872 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . Create the central file 38 On the File menu. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Worksets tab. 31 On the View menu. select Interior Layout for Workset. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. select Interior Layout for Workset. 27 On the View menu. select all of the interior elements of the building model. click the Worksets tab. 34 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. 33 Select Interior Layout. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. 30 Click OK. click . 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. double-click Level 2. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. click Save As. and click OK.

under Open Worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets. Using Worksharing in a Project | 873 . you enabled Worksharing on a project. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. Now that you have created the central file. click Options. select Specify. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. and click Save. select all the User-Created worksets. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. click Save As. Next. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 5 On the File menu. you create your local file. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. click Non Editable. 43 On the right side of the dialog box. and click OK. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. 39 In the Save As dialog box. click Worksets. 7 In the File Save Options dialog box. check out worksets. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. click Open. 40 Click Save. 3 Click Open. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 4 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. and click OK. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. In this exercise. click Worksets. 6 In the Save As dialog box. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. please do so before continuing. In addition. 45 On the File menu. click Close. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 2 In the Open dialog box. 44 Click OK. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 42 In the Worksets dialog box. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. If you have not yet completed the exercise. select the central file and. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. make modifications to the building model. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial.

click Worksets. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. The upper exterior wall should still be selected.The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. In this case. Before working on the model. In the Worksets dialog box. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. click Modify. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. under Identity Data. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. however. 874 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 17 On the Options Bar. In this case. If it was owned by another user. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 21 Click OK. 22 On the File menu. 11 Click OK. 23 Click OK. click . you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. On the Options Bar. If this is selected. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 19 Under Constraints. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 12 On the Window menu. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. select Interior Layout. click . select Interior Layout for Name. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. and select Yes for Editable. Because this element is not owned by another user. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. notice the Editable Only option. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. expand Views (all). you can still edit this wall. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. Revit Building borrows it for you and applies your changes. 20 On the Options Bar. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. 10 In the Worksets dialog box. Verify that it is cleared. expand Floor Plans. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. 14 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. and click OK.

28 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 33 In the Type Selector. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. The precise location is not important. click Wall. click Door. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. Using Worksharing in a Project | 875 .Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. select Basic Wall: Interior . 25 Delete the door. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 30 On the Design Bar. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr). 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner.

they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. In addition.34 Using the following illustration as a guide. 876 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . The Save to Central dialog box is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. which matches the information in the Status Bar. and proceed to Creating a local copy. leave this file open in its current state. and save locally immediately afterward. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. skip the following section. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. two users access the central file through a network connection. it is recommended. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. At the end of a work session. Whenever you save. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. add two door openings into the rooms you created. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. For training purposes. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. 36 In the Save to Central dialog box. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. displays the workset as well as the element type. In this exercise. save to central. you should relinquish all worksets. and reload the latest changes. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). By default. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. you should perform regular saves. Throughout the process. each user must check out worksets. You modified the building model. you created your local file. If you have not yet completed these exercises. Borrowed Elements is selected. make elements editable. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 37 Click OK. click Save to Central. please do so before continuing. In the following section of this exercise. In this particular case. a tooltip. When working in your local file. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. checked out worksets. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements.

8 Click Open. click Open. In addition. and reset the Username to your computer login name. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. For training purposes. enter User 2. and click OK. consider that person to be User 1. 16 Click OK. select Specify. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. 11 In the Save As dialog box. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click OK. 4 Click the General Tab and. 14 On the File menu. specifically sequenced. click Save As. one user has already created a local file. any referenced workset is opened but hidden.rvt. return to the Settings dialog box. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. click Worksets. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and click Save.Using a second Revit Building session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Building window. 12 In the File Save Options dialog box. select the central file and. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. You are now the owner of that workset. You now have a local copy of the project. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. under Username. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. under Open Worksets. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. and click OK. instructions are staggered. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. 2 Start a new Revit Building session by double-clicking the Revit Building icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. select all the User-Created worksets. click Options. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Options. 3 On the Settings menu. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. User 2: Create a local file. This file is for your use only. and select Yes for Editable. Using Worksharing in a Project | 877 . 7 In the Open dialog box. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. 10 On the File menu. This is a system setting.

select the lower exterior wall.User 1: Check out worksets. 23 In the Project Browser. If you only have one workset checked out. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. expand Views (all). 28 Click OK. If it is not open. expand Floor Plans. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. expand Floor Plans. 27 In the Save to Central dialog box. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. open it now. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. click Worksets. and select Yes for Editable. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. 18 On the File menu. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. it becomes the active workset. 878 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . modify the building model. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. click Save to Central. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 26 On the File menu. and double-click Level 1. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog box. 22 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2.

48 On the Design Bar. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. the Visible by default option was not selected. you should create a furniture plan view. 47 In the Type Selector. 42 On the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. and click Duplicate. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. click Worksets. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. select Yes for Editable. 38 Click OK. 34 Click OK. 36 On the File menu. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. click the Worksets tab. 37 In the Save to Central dialog box. click Modify. Before adding any furniture. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 41 Select Furniture Layout. under Floor Plans. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 32 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. right-click Copy of Level 1. click Visibility/Graphics. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. User 1: Reload latest worksets. and click OK. 49 On the View menu.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. and click inside any room. When you save to central. click Save to Central. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. click Reload Latest. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. under Floor Plans. 33 In the Save to Central dialog box. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 40 On the File menu. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. Using Worksharing in a Project | 879 . choose any desk. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. click Save to Central. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. click Component. under Views (all). you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. Click Yes. and click OK. 43 On the Project Browser. and click OK. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 45 On the Project Browser. and click Rename. However. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 44 In the Rename View dialog box. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. The changes User 2 made are apparent. Therefore.

select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 880 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. click Save to Central. Each user checked out worksets. 59 In the Rename dialog box. 66 In the Save to Central dialog box. and click OK. leave this file open in its current state. select Save to Central. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 67 Click OK. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. 61 On the File menu.200mm. 70 In the Save to Central dialog box. 60 Click OK twice. In the final exercise of this tutorial. 62 In the Worksets dialog box. under Show. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. Checking out worksets. click Reload Latest. leave this file open in its current state. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. and click OK. 64 Click OK. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. modified the building model. click Edit/New. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box. 69 On the File menu. select Project Standards. enter Exterior Wall . This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. click Worksets. and save 68 On the File menu. User 1: Reload latest. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully In this exercise. 54 Click OK. click Save to Central. 57 In the Element Properties dialog box.52 On the File menu. select the following. select Reload Latest. and click Properties. 53 In the Save to Central dialog box. 65 On the File menu. and published their changes back to the central file. click Rename.

you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. you need to set up your central and local files. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. Open the c_Worksets Project-Central. Each user must have network access to the central file. click Options. click Save As. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. 3 In the Save As dialog box. This is the local file for User 1. click Save As. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. 4 In the File Save Options dialog box. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. 9 In the Save As dialog box. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. and click Save. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. As each of you work. throughout this training. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. finished the previous workset exercises. and click OK. and still have your local files open. User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. and these problems are rectified. click the Training Files icon. 7 On the File menu. and click OK. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Building by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). 10 In the File Save Options dialog box. There are specific instructions for each user. This exercise requires two users and. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. On the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. and click OK. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. In subsequent steps. Click the General tab of the Options dialog box. click Options. The central file should still be open.Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. click Options. select Make this the Central location after save. click Open. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). you save the dataset as a central file.rvt file located in the Common folder. ■ ■ ■ Using Worksharing in a Project | 881 . Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Set the Username to User 2. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. 5 Click Save.

This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Save As. return to the Settings dialog box. and click Open. select Interior Layout. under Floor Plans. and reset the Username to your computer login name. You are now the owner of that workset. select the Interior Layout workset. 19 In the File Save Options dialog box.This Revit Building session is now set up for User 2. Next. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 18 In the Save As dialog box. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 25 Under Active Workset. and click OK. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. select the second window from the top. select Exterior Shell. In addition. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and then click OK. verify that Editable Only is cleared. and click OK. and then click OK. select the central file and under Open Worksets. click Open. select Specify. You are now the owner of that workset. and click Save. 30 On the Options Bar. 28 Under Active Workset. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. 24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. click Worksets. Afterwards. select them. 15 Click Open. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. click Options. double-click Level 1. 882 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 14 In the Open dialog box. if any User-Created worksets are not open. This is a system setting. 17 On the File menu. 23 In the Worksets dialog box. click Worksets. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. 27 In the Worksets dialog box. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and select Yes for Editable. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 13 On the File menu. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. and select Yes for Editable. 31 On the left exterior wall.

At this point.A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. 35 In the Editing Requests dialog box. select the request submitted by User 2. 37 Click Close. A message informs you that your request has been granted. and notice the window is in the new location. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. Leave this dialog box open until User 1 grants permission. click the File menu. click Check Now. User 2: Check for editability grant 38 In the Check Editability Grants dialog box. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. After you submit the request. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 39 Click OK. and click Editing Requests. Using Worksharing in a Project | 883 . You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 36 Click Grant.

In this case.User 1 and 2: Save to Central. click Close. and click OK. 884 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . and close 40 On the File menu. to Local. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 42 On the File menu. 41 In the Save to Central dialog box. select the following. you requested permission to edit the element. In this multi-user exercise. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and the other user granted it. select Save to Central.

you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). In this tutorial. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options.Creating Multiple Design Options 27 When working with a building model. 885 . you create multiple design schemes within a single project file.

In the second exercise. The client has asked you to create various options. With the second option. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 886 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . At any time in the design process. under Option Set. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. you design each of the structural options. click Open. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set.Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. For example. After you create a design option. you can have multiple sets of design options. In the first exercise in this lesson. you set up multiple design option sets. you can edit it. click the Training Files icon. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. Open the m_Urban_House. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. and delete the unwanted options from the project. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. each with multiple design options. In this particular case. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. 2 In the Design Options dialog box. After you and the client agree on the final design. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary).rvt file located in the Metric folder. the only available command is to create a new option set. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the final exercise of this lesson. make your final design decision. and each option set can have multiple schemes. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. click New. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. The first time you open the Design Options dialog box within a project. In addition. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes.

Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. click Edit Selected. TIP To center the middle column. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). or add a dimension string between the columns. In this case. 5 On the View menu. and click Close. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. add three columns. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 9 On the Design Bar.TIP In this exercise. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). and double-click ROOF TERRACE. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. click 12 On the Options Bar. and the third column centered between the two. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. expand Views (all). select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. the roof and structure systems must work together. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 887 . Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 7 In the Type Selector. 4 In the Project Browser. therefore. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. In the following illustration. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. each is constructed for interchangeability. click Column. select: ■ ■ ■ . By selecting Multiple. click Modify. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. expand Floor Plans. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied.

15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. Notice the 12 columns that you added. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. using the same technique. 18 On the View toolbar. click . they are difficult to see in this view. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. When you are finished. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 17 Zoom out and. Because of the size of the columns. 888 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . 16 Zoom in around the notch construction.

select Round Bar : 50mm. In it. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Adding a beam is a two-click process. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. click . The second click specifies the end of the beam. under Floor Plans. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 21 In the Type Selector. Use the following illustration as a guide. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 889 .Next. 25 On the Edit toolbar. 23 On the Design Bar. double-click TOP OF CORE. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. click Beam. The first click specifies the beam start point. Zoom in on the upper right column. 19 In the Project Browser. you add the beams that span the columns. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. select: ■ ■ ■ Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and select the center of the column to add a copy.26 On the Options Bar. 890 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click the center point. move down to the next set of columns. Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 28 Zoom out. zoom into the left column. click . 30 On the View toolbar.

click Rename. under Option. click New. enter Brackets for New. under Option. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 36 In the Rename dialog box. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. not a new option set. and click OK. under Option Set. 37 Select Option 2 and. and click OK. 33 Click Finish Editing. and click OK. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 891 . click Rename. 40 In the Rename dialog box. click Rename. 38 In the Rename dialog box. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option.Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 32 In the Design Options dialog box. enter Beam for New. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. enter Structure for New. under Option.

You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. and click OK. 43 In the Rename dialog box. select Edit Selected. click Rename. select Option 1 (primary). and click OK. name the option Louvers. This allows you to more easily manage the project. click New. 48 Under Option. Under Now Editing. name the option Sunscreen. under Structure. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 41 Under Option Set. 50 In the Design Options dialog box. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. There should now be two roofing design options. 46 Under Option. 51 Under Edit. click New. 45 Under Roofing. click Rename. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. When finished. under Option Set. it will resemble the following illustration. and click OK. under Option. 47 Under Roofing. select Beam. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. click Rename.Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. you create the second design option. select Option 2. 52 Click Close. enter Roofing for New. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. 892 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .

The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 58 On the Tools menu. 56 In the Type Selector. click Component. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 893 . under Floor Plans. click Align. select M_Roof Beam. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Refer to the following illustration. double-click ROOF TERRACE.53 In the Project Browser. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.

click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click to indicate the end point of the move. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. on the Edit toolbar. The first click sets the move start point. 61 On the Design Bar. The second click represents the move end point. 62 Select the beam and. 894 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Modify. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.60 After aligning the beam. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.

m_Urban_House-in progress. With the second option. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting